P. 1
Giao an Tieng Anh 10

Giao an Tieng Anh 10

|Views: 467|Likes:

More info:

Published by: Bui Tuyet Chinh Tuyetchinh on Dec 04, 2011
Copyright:Attribution Non-commercial

Availability:

Read on Scribd mobile: iPhone, iPad and Android.
download as DOC, PDF, TXT or read online from Scribd
See more
See less

04/15/2014

pdf

text

original

English 10

Period 1:

School year: 2011 - 2012
Get to know English 10

I. OBJECTIVES: By the end of the lesson, the Ss will get to know English 10: what to learn and how to learn it. II. PROCEDURE: T: How many words in English do you know beginning with “T”, “T” and “E” (2 minutes: 1 for preparing, one for presenting) Checks and gives feedback T: I am Thuan. I’m your Teacher of English. Now, let’s begin the first lesson “Get to know English 10” What do you study in English 10? Discussing the following questions and answer them: 1. How many units are there in the book? How many topics (themes)? What are they? What topic do you like best? - 12 units. 12 topics. - A Day in the Life of, School Talk, People’s Background, Special Education, Technology and You, An Excursion, The Mass Media, The Story of the Village, Undersea World, Conservation, Natonal Park, Music, Films and Cinema, The world Cup, Cities, Historical Places 2. How many lessons are there in each unit? What are they? - 5 lessons - Reading, Speaking, Listening, Writing, Language Focus 3. How many tests yourself are there in the book? - 6 tests your-seft 4. How many 15-minute tests are there? - 6 15-minute tests per a school year (3/ semester) 5. How many 45-minute tests are there? - 4 45-minute tests (2/semester) 6. How many semester tests are there? - 2 semester tests Groupwork: 3.How will you learn English 10? Ss discuss in the group of 8 students, giving idea(s) T gives feeedback (1/semester)

1

English 10
Suggested answers: - Learn new words by heart - Read the text in advance at home

School year: 2011 - 2012

- Watch and listen to progammes in English in the radio and on TV - Do homework and exercises - Practise a lot, sing English songs - .......... 4. Consolidation Summarising the lesson Give some recommendations Homework: Preparing Unit 1: A Day in the life of .... Lesson One III. EXPERIENCE

UNIT1 : A DAY IN THE LIFE OF .... Period 2: Class 10A2 10A3 A. READING Absentees

Teaching date

I. OBJECTIVES: - Ss read the text and guess the meaning of the new words, ask and answer base on the content of the text, scan and take note the information - Students should appreciate the daily activities of some people. II. LANGUAGE FOCUS: 1. Grammar: - The present simple tense 2. Vocabulary: Words related to daily activities: working time, working day,... III. SKILLS: Reading for gist and for specific information. IV. TEACHING AIDS: some pictures of farmers' activities and hand- out. V. PROCEDURE: Teacher's activities Students' activities

2

English 10
WARM UP: (5mn) Gives some hand-out 1 and gets Ss to match A with B, then asks: A 1. teacher 2. doctor 3. worker 4. seller Where does a teacher work? Where does a farmer work? .......................................... We'll understand more about the life of a farmer in unit 1. 1. Pre-reading: (10mn) Shows the pictures and introduces some words and phrases: Guides Ss to read in chorus 5. farmer

School year: 2011 - 2012
Match A with B in pairs B a. market b. school c. hospital d. field e. factory

He / She works at a school. He / She works in the field. Peasant (n) = farmer (n) -Lead the buffalo to the field -Pump water (v) -Transplant (v) -Plough (v) (n) -Harrow (v) (n) - Fellow (n) = friend Read the chart and guess what Mr Vy does and Mrs

Gives hand- out 2 and guides Ss to do it. Introduces: Mrs Tuyet and Mr Vy are farmers.

Tuyet does. Their activities 1. take care of children 2. transplanting 3. drinking tea and chatting with friends 4. ploughing and harrowing the plot of land 5. preparing meals 6. leading a buffalo to the Mr Vy Mrs Tuyet

3

English 10
Asks Ss to check the information and read the text. 2. While- reading: (20 mn) Asks Ss to read the text silently. 4 Gives the correct answer field

School year: 2011 - 2012

7. boiling water Open the book and check the information about Mr Vy and Mrs Tuyet's daily routines.

Requires Ss to do task 1 in groups of Skim the text and do tasks. Task 1: Practise with groups of 4 Check the correct answer. 1. C 2. C 3. A 4. A

Practise task 2 with pairwork. Suggested answers: 1. He's a peasant / a farmer. 2. He gets up at 4.30 and then he goes down the kitchen to boil some water for his morning tea. 3. In the morning, he ploughs and harrows on his Task 2: Gets Ss to ask and answer in pairs. plot of land, drinks tea and smokes local tobaco during his break. 4. In the afternoon, they repair the banks of their plot of land. Mr Vy pums water in to it while his wife does the transplanting 5. Yes they are. Because they love working and they love their children. Scan the passage and make a brief (short) note about Mr Vy and Mrs Tuyet. Do it individual and compare their note with a partner. Suggested answers: * In the morning: - 4:30 : The alarm goes off, Mr Vy gets up, goes down to the kitchen, boils water for tea, drinks tea,

4

Assigns homework (3mn) Tuyet's daily routines.m : have dinner * After dinner: .Close the book and talk about Mr Vy and Mrs 3.Do exercise 1. School year: 2011 . chat with them .Talk about their parents' daily routines. . 5) in workbook.6:00 p.11:30 : has lunch with family Can help some bad Ss * In the afternoon: . 4.sometimes visit neighbours.7:45 : takes a rest . (about 80 words) COMMENTS (2mn) . lead the buffalo to the field. ploghs and harrows his plot of land . He pums water in to it.reading: (8mn) Asks Ss to close the book and discuss about Mr Vy and Mrs Tuyet's daily routines.5:15 : leaves the house .English 10 Listens and checks their answers Guides Ss to make a brief note about Mr Vy and Mrs Tuyet's daily routines. go to bed .2012 has a quick breakfast.7:00 p. repair the banks of their plot of land. Post. 2 (p. . .watch TV.2:30 p.5:30 : arrive in the field. Homework: .Write a paragraph about a farmer's daily routines in Viet Nam.Prepare lesson 2: speaking 5 .10:30 : goes home . . She does the transplanting.m: finish work .m : Mr Vy and Mrs Tuyet go to the field again.

II. SKILLS: Fluency in expressing opinions IV.2012 Period 3: Class 10A2 10A3 B.Ss know about daily activities of some people or themselves. PROCEDURE: Teacher's activities Students' activities WARM UP: (3mn) Shows the poster and asks Ss try to remember the subjects Retell the subjects individual.Ss ask and answer about daily routines and talk about daily activities of some people or themselves. EXPERIENCE School year: 2011 . LANGUAGE FOCUS: 1.English 10 VI. SPEAKING Teaching date Absentees I. III.out. Biology 6 . Grammar: The present simple tense 2. OBJECTIVES: . . Vocabulary: Words related to daily activities. Civic education 7. Subjects are learn in school 1. V. TEACHING AIDS: A poster and hand.

Technology 3.m on Monday? S2: (At 7:15 on Monday he has) a Civic Education lesson....................Geography 11.m.....00 7.speaking: (20mn) Task1: Guides Ss to ask and answer about Quan's daily activities using his weekly timetable...05 1. English Listens and checks School year: 2011 .....40 17..English 10 2. S1: What time does Quan have a Civic Education lesson on Monday? S2: (He has a Civic Education lesson) at 7:15 a...History 12. 7 ...m five o'clock p....45 10..2012 8. using the information from the timetable (practise with pairwork) 2. Physical education 10.... ..15 8. Or: S1: What lesson does Quan have at 7:15 a.30 B a quarter to ten five to nine a quarter past seven five past eight twenty to eleven half past six p..m six o'clock a. Literature 6........m Ask and answer about Quan.... Physics 5.speaking: (8mn) Gives handout and asks Ss to match a number in A with a suitable in B 8...... Maths 4.Information technology Match a number in A with a suitable in B work in pairs A 6...55 9. S1: What time does he have English lesson on Friday? Helps and checks S2: (He has English lesson) at 8:55 on Friday... Pre. While. Chemistry 9.00 18......

m He comes back home at 6:30 p.m he reviews his lesson/ 3. Practise individually I usually get up at 5.50 p.m.speaking: (10mn) Task 3: their classmates about his/ her daily routines. From 8. At 6. I watch TV.2012 Look at the pictures and describe Quan's activities Work in groups of 4 Task 2: Asks Ss to look at the pictures (p.30 I cycle/ ride home. I have dinner with my family at 7. I have the first lesson at 7.00 to 10.m . He has dinner with his family at 7:00 p. Then I watch TV until 10. I go to extra classes at 1.15p.m.15 I do my homework.00 Assigns homework (2mn) p. read books or go out with my friends at 4. does his homework.30.Prepare lesson 3: listening COMMENTS (2mn) 8 .English 10 School year: 2011 . There he plays football with his friends at 5:15 p.m.m.45 p. He studies his lesson at 2:15 p. listen to music.m.m. Then I take a nap until 1.00 p.30. At 8:00 p.m Quan gets up after taking a short nap. Post.45 p. He watches TV at 4:30 p.15 a.m.m.m. I go to bed at 11. At 12.30 p. Then he goes to the stadium by bycicle at 5:00 p.m.15 a.m Asks Ss to close the book and tell Suggested answer: Lets 1 or 2 good Ss come to the board to speak.00 I have lunch with my family. At 11.00 I have breakfast and then I cycle/ride to school at 6.15) and descibe Quan's activities Answer: At 2:00 o'clock p. I do morning exercises at 5. takes/has a shower at 6:45. HOMEWORK: -Write a 50-word paragraph about your daily routines .m.m and get home at 4.

Requires Ss to asks and answer in Practise with pairwork. Grammar: Simple present tense 2. work.He is a cyclo driver. plough. I have.Number the pictures in their correct order . leave the house. EXPERIENCE School year: 2011 . listen and come to the board to tick Shows a poster and asks Ss to words or phrases which T's just read listen and tick the words or get up. SKILLS: Listen for gist and for specific information. S1: Have you ever travelled by cyclo? S2: Yes.2012 Period 4: Class 10A2 10A3 C. LANGUAGE FOCUS: 1. . start phrases which T's just read 1. Vocabulary: Words related to daily activities.Tick ( ) in box T or F according to the content of the passage.listening: (8mn) Shows the picture and asks: What is this? Points to the cyclo Who is he? pairs. III.. PROCEDURE: Teacher's activities WARM UP: (3mn) Students' activities Look at the poster. have breakfast.English 10 V.. II. S1: When was it? S1: When I was in HaNoi last summer. . LISTENING Teaching date Absentees I.. TEACHING AIDS: A poster ..Students understand a daily activities of a cyclo driver . learn. take a nap. IV. V. Pre. .It's a cyclo.Students listen and understand a daily activities of Mr Lam. Answer . OBJECTIVES: . Helps and checks. drink tea. 9 .

2 Asks Ss to read the sentences a. 3 Plays the tape the third time and Listen for specific information and number in the box Practise asking and answering about Mr Lam's daily activities in pairs. going by bicycle or by cyclo? S2: I prefer going by bicycle because it's interesting and helps me to strengthen my muscles. F 2. Read the sentences and guess to tick in box T or F The correct answer: 4. asks Ss to check the answer. gives Ss 1 minute to tick the box. 2.listening: Task 1: School year: 2011 . 4 d. Task 2: (p. F Plays the tape the second time and Listen and tick Plays the tape the third time and 1. F Listen for gist on the top of each piture. Plays the tape the first time. it is. 5 c.English 10 Asks Ss to listen and repeat some S2: Yes. T 3. routine passengers office ride pedal park purcharses food stall Asks Ss to look at 6 pictures and Listen and repeat guess their correct order then district number them. A: What time does he start work? 10 . F 6.17) and tick in box T or F Plays the tape the first time. drop Look at the pictures and try to guess their correct Plays the tape the second time and order. then number them. 1 f. 6 e. Eg: A: What's his name? B: His name's Lam A: What's his job? / What does he do? B: He's a cyclo driver. words. asks Ss to check the answer.2012 S1: Is it interesting to travelled by cyclo? S1: Which do you prefer. While. gives Ss 1 minute to number Work in group of 4 pictures. Listen and check the correct order Answer: b. F 5.

m. Post.00 a. EXPERIENCE Period 5: Class 10A2 10A3 D.(about 50 words) V. LANGUAGE FOCUS: 11 . / At 6.2012 B: He starts work at 6. II. WRITING Teaching date Absentees I. OBJECTIVES: . 3. using the given prompts .Students learn to build up a narrative about a hotel fire.00 am. Assigns homework (2mn) COMMENTS (2mn) Try to retell about Mr Lam's daily activities HOMEWORK: Write what you can remember about Mr Lam's daily activities. A: Does he take a long rest? B: No. He only takes a short rest.English 10 School year: 2011 . A: Who is his first passenger? B: An old man. A: What time does he have lunch? B: He has lunch at twelve.listening: Requires Ss to ask and answer about Mr Lam's daily activities. he doesn't. a lady and two school pupils. A: How many passengers does he usually have in the morning? Who are they? B: He usually has 4 passengers a day. They are an old man.Students know how to build up a narrative.

wrting: (20mn) Task2: Identify the events. frightening / an interresting It happen when I was young. PROCEDURE: School year: 2011 . then. . I have. got. TEACHING AIDS: poster IV.writing: (10mn) Task1: Asks Ss to read the model Task1: It made me frighten / happy / bored/ . While... Pre.... ....English 10 fire. Emphasizes the past simple to narrate a story. / When I was in the six When and where did it happen? grade. How did you feel about that? 1... was.. At first.. narrative (P. arrived.. SKILLS: Writing a narrative about a hotel fire.17&18) and find Read the model narrative.2012 1... Grammar: Students know how to use the past simple to write a passage about a hotel Teacher's activities WARM UP: (3mn) Asks Ss some quetions: Have story? you ever heard Answer Students' activities (suggested) a Yes. III. began. 2. and the conclusion of Stared. Guides Ss to work in groups of 4 Helps and checks. Vocabulary: III. circle the past simple and the connectors (time expression) in the story such as: connectors(time expression) in the story... 2.. It happen at my house/ school /. Work in groups of 4 12 . underline the verbs that all the verbs that are used in the are used in the past simple tense. the climax....

It was crowded with people. It was the most frightening experience of my life. Luckily. Work individually. Then 1 or 2 Ss read their narratives in front of the 3. live. of 4 School year: 2011 . Everybody started to scream in panic. plane seem to dip. Many people began coughing and choking. using the given prompts. + The climax: We thought we had only minutes to Checks and helps. we landed safely. town. One door was blocked. The hotel was modern and comfortable.English 10 Asks Ss to do task 2 in groups the story. Read one another's narratives. They were dancing and singing happily. Firemen fought their way into the room and soon everyone was safely out of the building. 13 . Then. plane took off. Post-writing: (10mn) class.2012 +The events: got on plane. Then black smoke began to fill the room. People ran toward the fire Surveys and helps exits. the fire brigade arrived. Suddenly we smelt smoke. Suggested answer: Last year. + The conclusion: Pilot announced that everything was all right. just as we thought we had only minutes to live. I spend my summer holiday at a seaside Task 3: Asks Ss to build up a narrative about a hotel fire. I had a wonderful holiday until the fire. people screamed in panic. hostesses were just beginning to serve lunch when plane began to shake. It was Sunday evening and everybody was sitting in the discotheque (which was) on the ground floor. nobody was seriously hurt.

.English 10 Gives corrections Assigns homework. OBJECTIVES: . the past simple and adverbs of frequency. HOMEWORK: suggestions and School year: 2011 . the past simple and adverbs of frequency. writing. Grammar: the present simple. III.. LANGUAGE FOCUS Absentees Class Teaching date 10A2 10A3 I. biscuit biscuits) and asks Ss to find the words He drinks tea every morning. leap. wind. PROCEDURE: Teacher's activities WARM UP: (3mn) Draws a picture (a cup of tea and some Suggested: tea.Do all exercises II. TEACHING AIDS: poster IV. 2.. . creep. III.Should distinguish between the vowels / i / & / i: / .Complete their narratives base on the teacher's suggestions and corrections. Vocabulary: tent. flow.Prepare language focus.Review the present simple. listening. Students' activities 14 . COMMENTS: (2mn) V.2012 . LANGUAGE FOCUS: 1. SKILLS: reading. Put out. . EXPERIENCE Period 6: E.

He usually goes to school by bicycle everyday but yesterday he went to school on foot usually: adverbs of frequency goes went : simple present : simple past / i:/ heat beat meat eat leek Exercise1: Complete the blanks... She is late for school.. He usually gets up early.. Checks and calls 1 or 2 ss to read in place in the given 3.. say 11......19) and show the vowels / i / or / i:/ School year: 2011 . He is a schoolboy.......... 1. Pronunciation: (8mn) Introduces how to read 2 vowels / i / (short) & / i:/ (long) Read aloud Asks Ss to open the book (P......are 5. am Exercise2: (6mn) Guides Ss to know how to put each of those adverbs of frequencyin its appropriate sentences. Grammar and vocabulary: Shows the picture and introduces the simple present... give up 10.....am Exercise2: Practise individual.. 15 . simple past and adverbs of frequency... . go 9.... catch 8. Notes the sentence stress 2..realise 12... use the correct present simple form of the verbs in the box...2012 related to the picture then make I want to eat some biscuits. Example: He gets up early..English 10 sentences with those words.....catch 7.worry 6..fish 4. Practise in pairs Answer key: 1.. Checks and helps Is he coming to the cinema? We'll miss the beginning of the film.. Exercise1:(10 mn) Asks Ss to choose the correct form of the verbs in the box to fill in the gap...... Listen and repeat Minimal pairs: /i/ hit bit meet it lick Eg: Guides Ss to read aloud sentence by sentence in the book..is 2... Revise the simple present. simple past and adverbs of frequency.

(2mn) HOMEWORK: . flowed Assigns homework. began 8. slept 12. Exercise3: (14mn) ASks Ss to choose the past simple of the verbs in brackets.m Exercise3: Remember the form of the past simple tense and supply the correct past simple form of the verbs in brackets . put out 10. .tent (n): lÒu . EXPERIENCE 16 .wind (v) . wound 18.English 10 front of the class. Note: As a rule. was 14.flow (v): ch¶y.crept: ®i rãn rÐn . sang 7.2012 She is often late for school. felt 9.crept: nh¶y dùng lªn . tr«i Practise with pairwork. crept 11.00 p. cooked 3.Do exercises in part LANGUAGE FOCUS of UNIT 1 in workbook. woke 13. was done 2.Put out: dËp t¾t Helps and checks . were 4.crept .creep (v) crept . leapt 15.wound . I go to bed at 10. smelt 5.wound: cuén. hurried 16. lîn vßng . found 17.leap (v) .Prepare unit 2 COMMENTS: (2mn) V. Suggested answer: 1. Can give the meaning of some words School year: 2011 . told 6.

Do you often tell about your school? c. TEACHING AIDS: poster IV. etc.3. What does “school talks” means? b. PRESENTATION: While you read. it is football. . SKILLS: Reading for gist and for specific information III..Calls some couples to ask and answer. It means the dialogues at school. P3. I do.Asks pupils: a. Vocabulary: Words related to school III.. Which topics do you often talk about when you meet your friends? pairs to say which topics they often talk about when they meet or talk to each other. OBJECTIVES: By the end of the lesson. 2. LANGUAGE FOCUS: 1.2. Students' activities . We often talk about our favourite sport. Grammar: gerund and to-infinitive 2.English 10 School year: 2011 .Answer teacher’s questions.2012 Period 7: A. PROCEDURE: Teacher's activities 1.Introduces the situation of the passages 1. (25’) Task 1: .Asks pupils to look at the book and work in Pairwork 17 . Ss will be able to know how to appreciate tell daily avtivities at school. P2. P1. introduce themselves II. . (7’) . WARM-UP: Before you read.READING Class Teaching date 10A2 Absentees I. Yes.

.+ Miss Phuong enjoys teaching. a noun.Asks pupils to read up the new words.Asks pupils to close their books. a verb P2: 4. 4crowded. P1. . + I like to learn English + I don’t really like getting up early. Ha worries about someone else’s safety.Asks pupils to read the passages in skim to find the new words. P3.language .Asks pupils to work in groups to find the sentences with the main verbs which are followed by V-ing and those followed by to + infinitive Task 2: . . 18 . . 5. School year: 2011 .Asks pupils to scan the passages to find who often do the actions given. + Phong loves learning English.+ Phong studies at a high school . P5. 3 pupils write on the board.Calls pupils to decide the part of speech of the word needed to fill in each blank. a verb. 2.Calls some pupils to read up the sentences.+ Miss Phuong loves working with children. an adjectives.work in groups to fin the sentences. . 2. Task 3: . a noun.English 10 .Read the passages in skim to find the new words: + international (adj) + be crowded + narrow (adj) .Work in groups to fill in the blanks P1: 1. P3: 1.Read up .Asks pupils to work in groups to fill in the blanks with the suitable word. + Phong lives far from school P2.traffic. .Asks 3 pupils to correct the mistakes of writing.2012 .Write full sentences. 3. P6: + I love working with children. 3.Work in pairs to do the task . .enjoy. .worry.Calls 3 pupils to go to the board to write full sentences. + Phong has to get up early. work in + Miss Phuong teaches English at a high school + Mr.Asks some pupils to correct the mistakes. 5. + Phong rides a bicycle to school every day.

but she enjoys it because he loves working with children 3.taking part in social activities . V.speakING Class Teaching date 10A2 Absentees I. 19 . Because it is an international language 4.Correct Key: 1.I like learning Math. School year: 2011 .English 10 pairs to ask and answer about the passages. homework . He studies many subjects such as maths.Give comments 1. – doing a lot of homework . What do you worry about at school? Key: .Ask students to tell the content of the small important means of international talks communication .Has students work in groups and answer narrow and crowded streets to get to school the questions 1. OBJECTIVES: By the end of the lesson. interesting 2. What do you like or dislike doing at school? 3. (10’) 5.Calls some couples to ask and answer.2012 .Asks pupils to do the reading .Introduce themselves . chemistry and 3. Ss will be able to make small talks in daily life. HOME WORK: (3’) . 2. What subjects you like best and why? .Do the exercise at home.Work in groups to speak.Listen to the teacher and write down Workbook. 2. He studies at Chu Van An High school .Ask to tell themselves .Present the content of the small talks again comprehension at page 10 & 11 in the . Chemistry or Vietnamese Literature because it’s useful. EXPERIENCE Period 8: B . I worry that many students cheat in exams/ live far from school/ difficulty in speaking English 4.Have discussion then present ideas in front of the class .talking with my parents 3. After you read. physics. Because his son has to ride his bike in . I like English best because it is an . She says that teaching is hard work.

How will you say to open and end the conversation? .Copy the conversation and complete the conversation with suitable words (1) Hi/ Hello (2) I’m very busy now. Perhaps another time 1. How can you say to your teacher when Students' activities Listen to the teacher .People who use greetings when they meet to each other . And you? B: I’m fine.People use greetings when they say goodbye to eachother 3. (1) B: Hi. Let’s go somewhere for a drink A: Sorry.requires Ss to complete this conversation with simple sentences. ………. How can you say when you meet your friend in the morning? 5.Ok.Give a situation and write a short conversation on the board Situation: suppose that you meet a friend at the supermarket. How many kinds of “greeting”? 3. How are you? A: I’m fine.explains these are two sentences which are used to open and close a conversation . There are 2. you are very busy. Vocabulary: Words related to school School year: 2011 . Grammar: gerund and to-infinitive 2.2012 III. we will practice speaking conversation having stating and dosing sentences . Lan. English textbook 10. Thanks. How can you say when you meet teacher in the morning? 4. . They are:.Give a short conversation: A: ………. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures. PROCEDURE: Teacher's activities Warm-up: (5min) . that’s a short conversation between A and B (1) & (2) are two ways to start and close a conversation Today. (2) . Goodbye/ Byebye/ See you again 20 . What do you think about “greeting”? 2. It is important 2. IV.English 10 II. SKILLS: Fluency in expressing oppinion and expressions for making a conversation III. Good morning/ Hi/ Hello 5.Raises the questions: (8mn) 1. Today we will pratise speaking conversation having starting and closing sentences . Good morning 4. LANGUAGE FOCUS: 1.calls some Ss to give their answer and then can calls one pairs to pratice this conversation .

Corrects students’ pronunciation if necessary Task 3(8min) Complete the following conversation with suitable words.Walk around the class to help students when necessary . Talk to you later .Divide the class into 4 groups . I’ll see you tomorrow. I’ve to go.Introduce some expressions that we can use to start and close a conversation .Do the task .Hello.Hello.Give the meaning of some words when necessary .How’s everything at school? .Check and give suggestions .Hi.B.Give instruction .Do task 4 .Give answers: D.Work in pairs .Give suggestions Task2(7mn): Rearrange the following sentences to make a conversation and then practise it with a partner . It’s been nice talking to you . Minh.Practise the conversation Answer: A: Hi.Ask students to complete the conversation with suitable words . It was wonderful 21 .Ask students to rearrange the sentences to make a conversation .Practise with partners . See you later -Great.F.Ask student to place the expressions under the appropriate heading .E.Walk around the class and help all students School year: 2011 .Good morning .Work in groups .Give answers: A: What’s the matter with you? B: Awful/ a headache A: You’d better go home and have a rest .Ask students to work individually then in pairs .Do task 3 .Walk around the class to help student when necessary .Ask student to practise it with a partner .Ask students to work individually then work in pairs .C-G .Give answers: * Starting a conversation: . what are you doing? .Goodbye.Ask students to practise this conversation . Place them under the appropriate heading then practise with a partner .Well. Huy. Catch up with you later .Sorry.Correct their pronunciation when necessary Task 4: (10mn) Make small talks on the following topics. How was your trip to Da Lat? B: Hi.Ask student to work individually then work in groups . phrases or sentences in the box and then practise it with a partner .H.Do the task .Check and give suggestions .2012 . how is school? * Closing the conversation: .Ask students to read all words in the box . How are you? . using the starting and ending of a conversation .English 10 your school finishes? Task 1(7mn) These expressions are commonly used when people are chatting.Ask each group to discuss one topic and make a small conversation .

weather and travelling III. Grammar: the present continuous.English 10 when necessary .For two weeks.Give comments School year: 2011 .I’m taking English. IV.Homework: 1. EXPERIENCE Period 9: Class 10A2 C . 2. again A: Oh. too.I’m travelling alone 22 . Lan. OBJECTIVES: By the end of the lesson. But I have a plan to go out with . cassette player.No. past simple. Nga.3 at the page 8 and 9 B: Bye (English exercises book) V. * Plans for the next weekend: A: Hello. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures. 2.Do you like travelling ? 4. PROCEDURE: Teacher's activities Students' activities WARM UP (5'-7'): Requires Ss to find the listen and find the questions for the questions for the answers answers 1. English textbook 10.I really like it 1. II.Ask students to practise all conversations Lan. B: Hi. Vocabulary: Words related to school. present simple tense. LANGUAGE FOCUS: 1. bye . SKILLS: : Listening for gist and for specific information III. Work in pairs Expected answer: 2. A: Are you free on Friday? Would you like to go to the cinema next weekend? B: Thanks.Ask students to present the conversations .2012 A: What was the weather like in Da Lat? B: It was cool. A: Really? I love it.What are you taking this semester? 3. Ss will be able to listen to some small talks about duty.2. party and trip.listenING Teaching date Absentees I.

Would you like to go somewhere for a drink? work in individuals and then in pairs to do the task * Expected answers: 1-c. he is at a party 4. Asks Ss to work in pairs Calls some pairs to give answer Checks and corrects New lesson ( 35'-37’) I. she traves alone listen to the conversation give answers CD and complete the Answer keys : 1. comfortable 23 .checks and gives the right answers II.requires Ss to work in individuals and then work in pairs . she is in Miss Lan Phuong’s class 3. she is talking English 2. conversation 3 – picture d. she dosen’t. conver 2 – pic C. While you listen Task 1 Asks Ss to listen to the conversations Plays the tape more than once Tells Ss to listen for main ideas and the key words. no. big 4. Before you listen . not specific information in the first time. conversation 4 – picture a read all the questions listen the CD again to find the answers some Ss go to board towrite. he plans to stay in Nhatrang for week. it here 2. Answer keys : 1. 4-b. 2-e. 5-d. 5. conversation 2 – picture c. conver 4 – pic a Task 2 Requires Ss to read al the questions lets Ss listen again to the CD to find the answers Pauses between conversation to make it easier for Ss While they are doing the task Introduces Ss to take note the main ideas first and then complete the full sentences calls some Ss to write the answers on the board Checks and corrects Task 3 Asks Ss to work in pairs and study the conversation.English 10 5. Can tell the content of four pictures for Ss Calls some Ss to explain their answers to class keys : conversation1 – picture b. 3-a.How long are you staying there? 4.Are you travelling with your parents ? 5. listen to the CD find out the main content in each of conversation match give answers * Expected answers: conversation1 – picture b. conver 3 – pic d. very nice 3. Encourage them to guess the missing words Plays the last conversation again asks Ss to listen to it and complete the conversation by filling in the missing words Calls some pairs to give answer and then to practise the conversation Comments on Ss’ performance and gives correct answers School year: 2011 .That’s great.walks around for help Ss .2012 3.

advises Ss to use these questions : What problems have you got at school? What is / are the reasons ? What have you done to solve it / them? Who helps you to solve it? . School year: 2011 . Ss will be able to : .. OBJECTIVES: By the end of the lesson.. IV. library admission form . Grammar: present simple tense... .calls some Ss to talk about their problems at school checks and corrects if necessary Home work (2’) Write a conversation about the problems you have experienced at school 5.. . . After you listen Asks Ss to work in groups and discuss the problems they have experienced at school suggests the common problems at school: getting bad marks.goes round to help Ss .2012 travelling no alone for a drink listen to the T’s help use these suggestions to do this task give answers work in individuals V. EXPERIENCE Period 10: Class 10A2 d.fill some common forms such as simple application form.writING Teaching date Absentees I. SKILLS: : writing III.. coming to class late. Vocabulary: Words related to application form. 7. 6. III.use useful language and structures in some certain forms II. 2. PROCEDURE: 24 ... having difficulty in making friends. LANGUAGE FOCUS: 1.English 10 III. TEACHING AIDS: Poster English textbook 10. 8.

2012 Students' activities The whole class Expected answer: 1. but they ask for information -Call on Ss to read their answers -Tchecks and give correct answers PRACTICE TASK 3: Doing what Forms ask -Have Ss do the task individually -Go around the class and provide help if necessary. -Correct the form as the whole class.age. 3. occupation. . -Further explain and translate into VietNamese if necessary TASK 4: Filling in a form -T asks Ss to study the form carefully and fill the form using their own information.1995 25 ./ To attend to a club. telephone number.They are forms 2.What sort of imformation do you often have to provide when you fill in a form? School year: 2011 .etc. PRE-WRITING Activity 1:Present vocabulary + country of origin: Quê quán + Present address: chỗ ở hiện tại + Marital status:tình trạng hôn nhân + Block capital: chữ viết hoa + Applicable:thích hợp -T asks Ss to read the newwords loudly Activity 2:Matching .surname. -Expected answer: 1-D 5-B 2-F 6-C 3-E 7-A 4-G Work individually -Some Ss speak and explain their ieads for this form in front of class -Work individually.T asks Ss to do TASK2 Match a line in A with a question in B . Pair .Have you ever filled in a form? When? 3. -T can explain: Forms do not usually ask questions.work and then the whole class.To apply for a job. PRODUCTION -Write a form to apply for a job / attend a club.Firstname.. And then compare their answers with a partner. reason.English 10 Teacher's activities Warm up ( 7’ ) T supplies for students some kinds of forms and asks 1.. Work individually and write down their writings on the blackboard The oak tree school of english please write in capital letters Mr / Mrs / Mss * Surname : Hoang First name : Mai Phuong Date of birth : May 09 th . -Call 2 students to fill the form on the blackboard while others doing the task in the textbook. maritalstatus../ To change school .Let them have 4 minutes and then tell Ss to look at the board and comment on their performance.Have Ss compare their answers with a partner .address.What are they? 2./ To open accounts To send or receive money at the post office..

CB province Occupation : Student Reason for learn English : Business / Pleasure / Exams / Others ( if others. Ss will be able to : .using gerund and to – infinitive appropriately II. Grammar: gerund and to – infinitive 2.pronounce the sounds /^/ and /a:/ correctly . suggest. V.2012 Nationality: Vietnam Language(s) : Vietnamese. IV. PROCEDURE: 26 .. please specify) How many hours a day do you want to stay at school? 3-4 hours What date do you want to start? May. Vocabulary: threaten. EXPERIENCE Period 11: Class 10A2 E . Japanese Address in your country: Na Khoang village. 19th * delete where not applicable -Let Ss write in 3 minutes and T goes around to help if necessary. OBJECTIVES: By the end of the lesson. SKILLS: reading. III. TEACHING AIDS: Poster. Tra Linh District. listening and wrting III. English textbook 10. speaking. English.English 10 School year: 2011 ..language Focus Teaching date Absentees I. LANGUAGE FOCUS: 1. situation. -Peer correction -T collects five Ss to correct and give them marks. target. mind.

I have got.flood ou:country. PRONOUNCIATION 1.fun.English 10 Teacher's activities I. What time is it now? 7. When did you come? 2.aunt d.The verbs can only be followed by gerund Enjoy consider practise Avoid miss postpone Mind risk like 27 . -oo: blood. GRAMMAR AND VOCABULARY Revise the form how to make questions 1. trouble .. -T asks: What do you call theses questions ? Yes-No question Wh -question 2.Call on some Ss to read the completed letter School year: 2011 . * I learn English to get a good job. touch.Example:Make questions for these responses * Yes.2012 Students' activities -Note: distinguish two sounds: /^/ /a:/ -o:wonderful. some.h ard.Tell Ss to compare their answers with a friend . How many children do they have? Distinguish the infinitive and gerund 1.Peer correction II. How long did you stay? 3.coupl e. far. month.star.oe: does . * I like listening to pop music *Yes.husban . Where do you live? 5. son -a: father.The verbs can only be followed by to-infinitive Agree decide plan Refuse hope expect Manage seem tend Fail pretend want 2.Form:WH-word+auxiliary V/be+S+V ? Exercise 1:Make question for the following responses Call on some pairs to read the questions and responses aloud in front of the class Exercise2: Ask Ss to read the letter carefully and fill in each blank with an –ing and toinfinitive form of the verb in brackets . u:bus. Listen and repeat: Example: love father /^/ /a:/ -T helps Ss to distinguish two sounds -Ask them to listen and repeat 2. I am tired. Who did you come with? 4.Practice: -Open their textbooks and practise the sentences -Calls on some Ss to pronounce two sounds . something alarmstart. Why do you like learning E? 6.individualwork -The whole class and make questions for responses -Are you tired today? -What kinds of music do you like? -Do you have you got many subjects today ? Why do you learn English? Listen to T’s eliciting and takes notes Work individually Exercise1: Expected answer: 1. -a+r: : farm.young.au: laugh.

Prepare Unit 3 lesson 2 READING 3.talking 10.to call 8.in Workbook. doing 5.living 6. to hear 2.to post V. hearing Exercise 3: 1.The to -infinitive and -ing never mean the same when we use after theses verbs: Remember Stop Forget Regret try mean 4. to pay 7.to lend 9.to go 2.find 5.2. visiting 9. EXPERIENCE Unit 3: Period 12: Class 10A2 A . to go 8.Do all exercises 1.3 4.English 10 .Asks Ss to work in pairs and complete the sentences using an – ing or to – infinitive from of the verbs in the box.making 7. going 3.waiting 3. worring 6.Reading Teaching date Absentees 28 . . seeing 10.The to-inf and V-ing has the same meaning after some verbs Begin start like dislike Love Exercise2: Expected answer: 1.having 4.Feedback and give correct answers: * Consolidation:-Practise the sounds /^/and /a:/ -Make wh-question -Use the infinitive and gerund of verb * Homework .2012 . .5. remembering 4.Gives task School year: 2011 .

Give some famous persons’ names in the column A and their job in the column B . Grammar: . job. students will be able to: .The past perfect vs. Can you name and tell some scientists and their specializations? 2. . Procedure: Teacher's activities Students' activities Warm-up: (5') . Marie Curie.English 10 School year: 2011 .read better through Matching and True or False exercises.Recheck and introduce the new lesson: Marie Curie I.Let students write some information about Marie Curie with model given What you already know about her ..Let students match the people with their .. Vocabulary: Words to describe people’s back ground: name(s).Some of them do on the board and speak out jobs A B A B Hong Nhung scientist Hong Nhung singers Marie Curie Miss writer Marie Curie Miss scientist Hanh singers Hanh teacher Ngo Tat To teacher Ngo Tat To writer .Write down in their papers and then discuss in their groups .Ask some questions about some famous people and Marie Curie 1.The past perfect . Teaching aids: Some photos of famous people and some information about them IV. age.Work in pairs to discuss to fill some necessary inform about Marie Curie 29 . Objectives: By the end of the lesson. place/date of birth. LANGUAGE FOCUS: 1.Some students stand up and answer in roles A: Can you name…? B: They are NewTon. the past simple 2. What do you know about her? . . Have you ever heard of Marie Curie? 5.improve background knowledge about famous scientists especially about Marie Curie. DarkWin. education. interest III. Where are they? 4.Do themselves and then working pairs . What are their job? 3. Before you read: (8') . Skills: Reading for general or specific information IV.Listen to the teacher . II.2012 I.

English 10 What you want to know about her School year: 2011 .Read quickly and find information to compare to the sentence given: True of False? .Let students work in pairs to do the task 1 text which are in A Task 1 .Predict the meaning of words .Speak out: a.Match words A with B 1.Read quickly and give some sentences in the .No. 5. it wasn’t.Work in pairs and some of them stand and say about Marie Curie .While you read: (20') . With flying colors.Work in groups and discuss which sentences go with the word given . with a very high mark/grade . To whom do these words refer to? . strong willed: harboured the dream of a scientific career. After you read: (10') -Ask students to close their books and practise telling something about Marie Curie .Remember some information about Marie silently while teacher reads aloud and Curie correctly .Ask students to read themselves and write down some information .Ask students to reread and answer some 4-D: make less severe questions to practise with some words 5-B: keep in the mind above . then one reads the sentence and the other corrects it .Let students work in pairs .Listen and correct if needed Task 3 .Read words in A and ask: .Work in pairs to find information to answer the questions -Expected answer: 1.What about her? 2.Let students reread the passage quickly to find evidence from the passage to prove each of them 30 .Speak out their knowledge about Marie Curie A: Marie Curie is a scientist .She was a brilliant and mature student. Her real joy was “ easing human suffering” . Who passed the exam with flying colors? Task 2 . 4.Read silently . what does it mean? 1-C: very well.Work in pairs.She was awardes a Nobel Prize in Chemistry for determining the atomic weight of radium.She worked as a private tubor to save money for a study tour abroad.Let students translate them into 2-E: find out exactly by making calculations Vietnamese 3-A: having a fully developed mind . 2.2012 .Marie Curie was born in Warsaw on November 7th.Let each student stand and speak their B: I want to know when and where she was opinions born . impossible for a woman at that time III. 3.Go around and help them if necessary Class organization: students do it in pairs II.Let students read all sentences and explain some new words if necessary .Let students open the book and read . 1867.Work in pairs and answer some question 1.

Humane: easing humane suffering .Listen and explain some use of the words: work as.Copy the words .Ask students to close the book . in spite of. Procedure: Teacher's activities Warm-up: (3') .Work in pairs . hard-working: difficult living conditions.Working pairs and write the full sentences .Reread the passage and write about another famous person (about 100 words) V. hard-working d. Marie Curie was born in Warsaw on November 7the 1867 2.Some others repeat .SPEAKing Class Teaching date Absentees 10A2 I. humane .Listen and copy Unit 3: Period 13: B . brothers. Teaching aids: Textbook.2012 b. intelligent e. Objectives: By the end of the lesson. students will be able to talk about their own background and know how to ask for other people’s background. Skills: Talk about people’s background III.Close the books . sisters… B: He’s a doctor 31 . Homework (2') . Marie Curie harboured the dream of a scientific career. Intelligent: Nobel Prize e.Each student speaks out the sentence they’ve done 1. EXPERIENCE School year: 2011 . photos of some famous persons or some real information about someone to speak IV. took up the position V.Give some words and let students complete the full sentences: 1. ambitious c. Ambitious: kept moving up in her career c. strong willed b. worked together on. Marie Curie/ born/ 7th/ November/ Warsaw/ 1867 2. Marie Curie/ harbour/ dream/ scientific career/ impossible/ woman/ time Students' activities .work hard d. which was impossible for a woman at that time Pre-speaking: (8') .Ask students to practise speaking about A: What is your father’s job? their parents. II.English 10 a.

English 10 . They are interviewing 2. date of birth. hobby. Nice to meet you.Ask students to tell about others they’ve heard by interviewing their friends .Ask students to read some words given and then let them choose which words used for someone’s back ground .Go around and listen to them While-speaking: (22') Task 1 .Work in groups with some cues given below (Greeting.Other groups go on practising speaking .Others listen and write down some .Let some groups play in role as information they get journalists and other answer the questions .What are three students holding in their hands? . A: Could you tell me something about yourself and your parents? B: Oh. How do you know they are conducting an interview? .2012 A: How old is he? B: He’s 40 years old A: What does he like doing in his free time? B: He likes playing badminton ..They’re in the classroom 3.Listen and correct Task 2 ..Observe the picture .. please A: Where is he from? B: He’s from .Go around listening to some groups and help them if needed School year: 2011 . education .Some groups go on speaking each other . home.Some students can show off these words: family.Practise interviewing as a dialogue A: Hello! I’m Huong B: Hello! I’m Lan. A: What does he do? B: He’s a student.Let students imagine they are journalists and interview each other in groups and pairs . dislike.Ask some pairs to stand in front of the A: What does he like doing? class and practise speaking B: He likes playing football Task 3 .Work and discuss in groups and one of this group asks and one of other answers A: Where was he born? B: He was born in Missouri in 1835 A: Which name did he adopted? B: It was “Mark Twain” A: When did he die? 32 .Work in groups A: Can you tell me something about Nam? B: Yes. What are they doing? 2.. . One speaks and one writes down in the notebook .Let students open the books and observe the picture and describe what they are doing 1. Where are they? 3.Ask students to look at the pictures again .Read these words and work in groups .. . parents…) A: Hi! When were you born? B: I was born on August 18th 1991 A: Where do you live? B: I live in .Look at the picture and answer the questions 1..Ask one group to do the task as a model . yes! Please ..They’re holding the pens and notebooks .

Who is this in the photo? 2.Listen and write down in their notebooks mark if they do it well Homework: (2') . BEFORE YOU LISTEN: (8') .English 10 School year: 2011 . students will be able to talk about one of the Olympic champions by using the information regarding her background and career. How many time Olympic Champions did Students’ activities . He/ died/ 1910 . What’s her name? 2.listening Teaching date Absentees I. Where does she come from? 3. Procedure: Teacher’s activities Warm-up: (4') . he ever won the award of the best football player in Viet Nam . She won five-time Olympic Champion 33 . Yes.2012 Post-speaking: (10') . II. He plays football 3. He/ adopt/ pen name/ “Mark Twain” 3. EXPERIENCE Unit 3: Period 14: Class 10A2 c .Give some information about Mark Twain: 1.Give some photos of athletes in Viet Nam and in the world 1. Huckleberry”… 4. He/ write/ his famous novels/ “Tom B: He died in 1910 sawyer.Let students open the books and ask who is in the picture 1. Which sport does he play/ take up? 3. Did he win any Olympic champions? I.Work in pairs and answer the questions 1. Teaching aids: Some pictures of persons or some real information about them IV. Objectives: By the end of the lesson.Let students write about someone they admire or look forward to meeting V.Observe the pictures and give some information 1. He/ born/ Missouri/ 1835 2.Listen to each group and correct or give . Skills: Listening for general or specific information III. She’s Nellie Kim 2. He is Hong Son 2. She comes from Russia 3.

we haven’t .joined when she was 15) 2.Before listening.Let students read some sentences given and explain some new words if necessary .Work in groups and each group has one .Let students listen the first time: Who can guess some words? .Let students read some words they’ll listen then . family 3. Which words in the 1st sentence? 2.Read silently the sentences given before listening . different. F (not much free time) 4. AFTER YOU LISTEN: (10') . a general education 2.No.Let students listen the second time .Work in groups: 1.Listen and correct their listening School year: 2011 . love stories 5.Check their listening .2012 4. F (be a sports teacher) Task 2 .Read in chorus .Let student listen the last time and let them work in groups to speak out . is T or F? P2: It’s T .Observe the class and listen to each group’s feedbacks .Listen the third time and work in groups to decide which are T or F P1: In 1995. s chief God Zenus and once for every four years .Read or let students listen first Have you got anything from the conversation between Bob and Sally? . 2 brothers) 3. T (like different sports reading) 5.Listen to the teacher and answer the questions P1: Can you name any Olympic Champions? P2: What would you like to know about these people? . she joined the star sport club P1: Number two. WHILE YOU LISTEN: (20') Task 1 .Listen the first time .Listen and do the task . teacher’s diploma III.Each group asks and explains why they choose by some information they’ve listened .Let students listen the second time 1.Give more information if students wonder or not clear 1. T (born 1980.Work in groups and guess .Listen the second time and begin doing the task .Some students read themselves: + love story + sport teacher + romantic + teacher’s diploma . swimming 4. Which words in the 2nd sentence? . T (father.Try to write down words they’ll fill .Listen and check II. Sally joined the star sport club P2: It is True P1: Why is it True? P2: Sally was born in 1980 and when she was 15. let students read quickly some sentences they’ll listen and guess some missing words that will be in the conversation .Give more some information about Olympic: The first Olympic Games were held at the foot of Mount Olympus in 776 BC to honor the Greek. lives.Ask students to retell something about person who says about Sally 34 . mother.Let students listen the third time and let them choose and decide whether the statements are True or False .English 10 she win? 4. She is Olympic gymnast .Speak out their listening . Which sports does she play? .

Procedure: Teacher’s activities Students’ activities I. (curriculum vitae) .7g 3. Teaching aids: Some cues.Some students do matching on the board 1. Where did she go last week? part in recently 2. students will be able to: .Write in groups and ask someone to speak out their writing .Give the papers with some words given with the words in B in the column A and B . layout and essential information of a C. Previous jobs 7. Place of birth .Other students speak sentences and write 4.c-6.d. Name Key: 2.Ask students to write a short passage about Sally or a person they like V.Ask students to write a short passage to Ex: tell their outdoor activities they’ve taken 1.Other groups listen and copy some information and give some questions . Date of birth 1.write a simple V. What did she like best? .2012 .2.3. Was it interesting? Homework:(3') .V.Listen to each group and correct mistakes 3.English 10 Sally School year: 2011 .Work in pairs and match the words in A . Objectives: By the end of the lesson.writing Class Teaching date Absentees 10A2 I.May answer in different ways .b. Interests 35 .5. II. Exam passed 6.a.School attended down in their notebooks 5. EXPERIENCE Unit 3: Period 15: d .Practise writing . Who did she go with? if they’ve done 4. Skills: Writing about people’s background III.4. Warm-up: (4') .get to know the format.Ask students to close the books . information of someone IV.e.f.C.

Pre-writing: (8') . 12/11/1969 g.English 10 a.2012 .Practise asking some questions like in Task 1 before writing .Listen and work in groups .V .Other group appreciate and correct mistakes each other Task 2 Name Mr/Ms .The answers may be various . 1969 in Boston.Listen and copy .Read aloud the C.C. of Mr Brown .Listen to the teacher .Ask students to open their books .Ask some other groups to write down a paragraph about Mr Brown using some cues below and then each student on be half of his group read aloud -Listen and correct .Work in pairs P1: When and where was he born? P2: He was born on November 12th. English.Each member of groups reads aloud his/ her writing .He went to Kengsinton High school and passed exams in English. 1969 in Boston P1: Which school did he attend? P2: He attended at Kensington High School .Ask students to read the V. III. While-writing: (18') Task 1 .Introduce Mr Brown’s C. Boston b.Read those words and copy .V to apply for a job + It consists of: name. French.): + Mr Brown’s C.Introduce the form of the curriculum vitae (shortening V. date of birth ect. French.C. He likes music and dancing. tourist guide e.Practise writing in groups .Let students read quickly Mr Brown’s C. Kensington High School c. and Mathematics.He worked in a travel agency from June 1991 to December 1998. And from 1999 to 2002. David Brown j.V .Ask students if they often see some information of someone . and then Date of birth fill some necessary information about 36 .Read silently II. . he worked as a hotel telephonist.It is the curriculum vitae .Explain some new words if there are: + previous job: the job was done in the past + tourist guide: a person guide visitors who travel somewhere .Discuss and find out some errors if they make . Music and dancing School year: 2011 . Maths d.Ask students to make some questions after reading some cues of Mr Brown .Each group read their writing .V.Practise writing with some information of Mr Brown: Mr Brown was born on 12th November.Ask: what does these information call? .

V.Change the C.Give some information about Uncle Ho.Listen and correct if needed . students will be able to: . New Ton.Listen and copy V. give more exercises of tenses IV.LANGUAGE FOCUS Class Teaching date Absentees 10A2 I.2012 Place of birth Education: School attended Exams passed: Previous job: Task 3 Date from/ date . II. Homework: (2') .Let students practise writing freely about to their parents or relatives .Each group does the writing and read aloud .English 10 their parents .V about someone V. Objectives: By the end of the lesson. Marie Curie.Write a paragraph and a C. Procedure: Teacher’s activities Warm-up: (5') Students’ activities 37 .Ask some students to write on the boardother groups appreciate their friend’s writing School year: 2011 . and each group corrects mistakes IV. EXPERIENCE Unit 3: Period 16: E .Listen and give mark if they do it well . Mr Nam on papers . Skill: fluency in pronunciating /e/ and /æ/ and use of past perfect III.use the past perfect tense appropriately and distinguish it with the past simple tense. Teaching aids: Some words related to /e/ and /æ/. Post-writing: (13') .pronounce the sounds/e/ and /æ/ correctly .Work in groups .

laughed. tan. bad. left.Let students practise pronunciating these words: end. Let students practise doing exercises Exercise 1 Exercise 1 . send. laughed.Each student of each group gives correct and give which action happened before form of verbs and which happened after in the past .Listen and check for pronunciation . bag. left.Give some words and ask students to make full sentences 1. man – pan * had obtained: past perfect sad – bad * took up: past simple mat – sand men – pen . Pronunciation: (15') . Marry left her bag at school yesterday 2. aloud the words given and try to + She took up the position which happened pronounce syllable /e/ or /æ/ correctly after.Some students repeat aloud . bed. lad .Ask students to listen and read after these sentences II. and.Do the exercises 1. Mrs Black/ has/ from/ a/ message/ Jen . sand. let. bag. sand.Ask students to do exercise themselves Work individually and then compare the then discuss in groups answers with a friend -Have Ss compare their answers with a Expected answers: 38 .Ask students to determine which verb in Past Simple or Past Perfect . ten. Marry/ her bag/ left/ school/ at/ yesterday 2.English 10 . The fat man has a red pen. This handbag will be sent to Helen.Let students read aloud the sentences I.Read in silent first . 2. Let students open the books and read before.Some of each groups read aloud .Read these sentences . Mrs Black has a message from Jen .Do the exercise themselves . Ask students to read an example given . Grammar: (22') a. tan.2012 . let + /æ/: and.Listen and remark b. ten.Read after teacher and work in groups to find the syllable /e/ or /æ/ in the word in these sentences: 1. send.Work in pairs and read aloud these words then choose which words have sound /e/ and which have sound /æ/ + /e/: end.Listen and correct the syllables students read School year: 2011 . Introduce two syllables /e/ and /æ/ .Close the books! a.Read silently and give the opinions: + Her husband had obtained which happened b. lad .Listen and repeat following the teacher . bed.Students work in pairs and give the use and said – send form of past simple and past perfect met – bed . bad. .

had left 8.hadn’t turned 5.had just finished /came 2. she had made some cakes for breakfast.Explain why they did like that: .Listen and copy in notebooks .had met 4.had ever seen 6.had broken in Exercise 3 .Practise give more situations in the past use past simple and past perfect 39 . Before she called her children.had just got/ phoned /had been Exercise 3 -Work in pairs and then compare the answers with another pairs Expected answer: Sentence 1:had climbed -> climbed 3:had turned ->turned 5:had called -> called 7:had heard -> heard 9:went -> had already gone .had seldom travelled/went 3.Practise doing exercise in the Workbook V.Work in groups and give the correct tense of verb and explain why they did it -Work individually and then compare the answers with a friend .had broken 2.2012 1.Ask students to revise the use of Past simple and Past Perfect . After he had done all exercise.Listen and remark -Feedback and give correct answers: School year: 2011 .had done 3.had moved 9. 2.Did you manage/ had he gone 5. EXPERIENCE Exercise 2 . Homework: (3') .Give more other sentences .Ask students to remind of the use of Past simple and Past perfect .Call on some Ss to read aloud their answers in front of the class.some actions happened following in the past we should give the verbs in the Past simple (1-4) + We use: Before and After in a sentence to express which action happened after or before in the past 1.hadn’t seen 10. -Make sure all the verbs have been put the correct form.Listen and write down . Expected answer: 1. .Listen and copy . he went out for a walk.went/had already taken 4. -Feedback and give correct answers: Exercise 2 .Let students read the passage and find mistakes and correct them .had been 7.English 10 friend.

2012 Test yourself A Class Teaching date Absentees 10A2 I. 9.Speaking .5 points) (10’) . 8. Objectives: By the end of the lesson. writing .Go round the class to control the work . 7.Correct mistakes 1. listening. 6. 4.Greeting .Check themselves their skills in reading. Procedure: Teacher’s activities Students’ activities Warm-up: (5') .English 10 Period 17: School year: 2011 .Tell students the topic of the table .Get students to look through the table .Ask students something about the test yourself A . 15th January 1929 2.Then read the passage the last time for students to check their results .understand the task .Listening . 3.Correct mistakes Keys: . Teaching aids: Textbook. speaking. cassette taper IV.Improve their knowledge through the test yourself II. hand-outs. Listening(2.Look at the book and listen to the task .Fill in the blanks with the words they’ve just heard .Writing III. students will be able to: .Listen to the teacher’s reading carefully . 5.Explain the meaning of new words .Let students fill in the blanks with the words they have just heard .After that read the passage aloud twice .Answer teacher’s questions * Have you prepared it at home? * Have you got any difficulties? I. 4th April 1968 40 .Greeting .Present the task: Listen and complete the table below . In 1951 for 4 years he met they got married a minister at a the black freedom movement heard his speech at the In 1964 10. SKILLS: .Reading .

5 points) (8’) .State the keys . A: the chairman of Fairfield Education Committee 4. F: took a degree in Economics 2.Get students to discuss the letter in groups or in pairs . am 3.In groups or in pairs.Ask students: + to study all the lessons again + to get ready for the 45 minute-test in the next School year: 2011 . passed 5. Grammar(2.Finish the task .Finish the letter . Homework (2') .English 10 II. got 6. reading 8.Correct mistakes Keys: 1.Present the task: Read the passage and choose one appropriate phrase in the box for each blank.2012 . C: worked hard 3. Writing (2. There are more phrases than needed .Work in groups to complete the letter .5 points) (10’) . write her a letter .Go round the class to control the students’ activities .Compare the results with the other groups . can 7.Get students to work in groups. Read the letter carefully and then in Phong’s name. know 9. and then with the keys .Work in groups to discuss about the passage .State the best option .Go round the class to control the discussion .In Phong’s name. hearing IV.Correct mistakes 41 . B: for the best essay on education III. discuss about the passage .Present the task: Sally Green writes Phong a letter. am able 10.Compare their results with the other groups.Correct mistakes Keys: 1. D: for two years 5.Listen to the teacher .Correct mistakes V.Present the task: Use the correct form of the verbs in brackets to complete the letter of application below . get students to write Sally Green a reply . To apply 2.Compare the results with the other groups . Reading (2.Correct mistakes .Look at the textbook and listen to the teacher .Go round the class to control the set’s activities . attended 4.Ask students to read the letter carefully . write her a reply .Read the letter carefully .5 points) (10’) .

Study all the lessons again .2012 . EXPERIENCE Period 18+19: WRITTEN TEST 45' + CORRECT THE TEST Class 10A2 Testing date Absentees THE ANSWER KEY (50 sents x 0.A C©u §.2 = 10pts) C©u M· ®Ò 015 §.A C©u M· ®Ò 789 §.A C©u §.English 10 period School year: 2011 .A C©u M· ®Ò 556 §.A C©u §.A 42 .Get the knowledge ready for the coming test V.

EXPERIENCE UNIT 4: Period 20: Class 10A2 Teaching date Absentees I. school life of disabled children III.The + adjective . Language focus: 1.Grammar: . raising questions V.SKILLS: Reading about special education IV Teaching aids: textbook.English 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 School year: 2011 . Vocabulary: Words to describe special education. Procedure: 43 . board.Which as a connector 2. II.2012 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 V. students will be able to understand the term special education and talk about it through Matching and Multiple Choice exercises. Objectives: By the end of the lesson.Used to + infinitive .

Before you read: (10') .Thanks .dumb people .disable people 44 .25 . there was a person.Where did you stop last time? . people who cannot be able to listen and watch are called deaf and blind people.Look at the books .Miss Thuy . are C.Raising some questions: * What do you do everyday? * Do you go to class? listen to music? watch T.Open your book and we will go to Unit 4: Special Education I.Read individually .Listen to the teacher . He was Louise Braille. the D.Answer in chorus .Who’s absent today?. He came from France. we B.Ask students to read through the passage individually and do Task 1 .2012 Teacher’s activities Students’ activities Warm-up: (3') .Look at Braille Alphabet (on the page 44) and work with your partner about the message .Raising some questions about the passage: * Who’s in the passage? * What does the passage talk about? * How many children are there in her class? * Who are they? * Do they go to school? * Why do you know? .Take notes students’ answers on the blackboard * Which of these activities would be difficult for disabled people? Ok. * Who can say nothing?.Answer freely .Greeting .We don’t know (maybe students answer by Vietnamese) .Explain new words: proper schooling (n) = enough and good study * What do the parents of the disabled children think? Which line helps you know? Which word? . He was a blinded in a childhood accident.Greeting .Open the books and listen to the teacher . world II.V? .After guessing.special class . correct the answer under the teacher’s construction .Give answers: A. . While you read: (20') .use signals .Good * How can they communicative with each other? * How can blind people read? Well.Work in pairs .a man invented the letter systems for blind people to help them read easily.Listen to the teacher .The monitor answers .English 10 School year: 2011 .Open your books Task 1 .

maths 8. EXPERIENCE Period 21: Class Teaching date Absentees 10A2 I.opposition 6.Confirm the correct answers for students to check and write down .B 5.No.proud .Do the exercises in the workbook .Ask some students to give their answers .Write down on the notebooks V.Call on some students to give answers .They believe that the children could .Correct the answer III.A 4.read 3.Listen to their friends Key: 1.3rd .Ask students to do matching in chorus not learn anything at all ( 2nd sentence. After you read: (10') .Call on some students to read aloud each part of paragraph) the passage .Go around and provide help .Ask students to read the passage in pairs and fill the blank of summary using suitable words from the passage .D carefully and do the task 2 .Call on some students to read the completed summary aloud in front of the class Homework: (2') .Ask students to read the passage again more 1.They are proud of their efforts .in 4th sentence disable children in a math lesson? * How are the children? . students will be able to: 45 .She raised both arms and opened up Task 2 her fingers… (2nd sentence.Read the passage and do the task .English 10 School year: 2011 .efforts 5.Listen to the teacher attentively and check the answers . they don’t * How does Miss Thuy Teacher’s activities the .A 4.Listen to their friends .2012 opposition (n) = disagreeing viewpoints .B 3.C 5.Check pronunciation Key: .time-consuming 7.D 2.Confirm the correct answers 2nd paragraph) .Read in pairs and do the task .E 3.arms 9.figers 10. Objectives: By the end of the lesson.C 2.D .write 4.Listen to the teacher Key: 1.disable 2.Summarize the passage into 5 sentences .

board.Call some pairs to read the completed conversation .Instruct students to do this task by using following information .talk about school life of a student .Check whether students can make questions or 46 .Work in pairs . hand-outs IV.Help students use some questions related to .Give correct answers .Work in pairs .Ask some questions: * What are your favourite subjects? * How much time do you prepare for your lesson everyday? OK.Check pronunciation Students’ activities .English 10 School year: 2011 .Listen to the teacher .4 B. we will go to Lesson: Speaking to talk about school life of a student While-speaking: (25') Task 1 .Ask students to read the answer before choosing the best questions .3 F. raising questions. 1 take notes) and carry out the interview.2 D.5 G.Work in pairs and do the task 2 under words. using the questions in Task 1 .Listen to the teacher Hand-outs .Answer freely . Procedure: Teacher’s activities Warm-up: (2') .1 C.Ask students to use his/her own information to answer the questions . Teaching aids: textbook.7 .Listen to their friends Key: A.Ask students to work in pairs to fill in the blanks with the right questions .Ask students to work in pairs with 3 students (2 practice interviewing.Answer freely .Call on some students to explain their answers .Do the exercise in hand-out . such as: the construction of the teacher What subjects were you good/ bad at? How much homework did you have to do? . today.Give hand-outs to review the names of subjects at school -Ask students to work in pairs .How are you today? .Correct the answers .Listen to the teacher attentively then correct the answers Task 2 . SKILLS: Talk about some types of special education Talk about school life III.6 E.2012 .actively engage in an interview II.Read the answers and do the task 1 .Are you ready for new lesson? Pre-speaking: (15') .

Answer freely . SKILLS: Listening for specific information about a photographic club for disabled children III.Give comments and correct mistakes . Objectives: By the end of the lesson. Students will be able to listen better through True of False Statements and Gap-filling exercises. raising questions IV.Greeting . EXPERIENCE Period 22: Class Teaching date 10A2 Absentees I. today we will listen to the Vang Trang Khuyet Club in which all the members are all disabled children Before you liten: (10') 47 .2012 Task 3 .Check pronunciation if necessary . board.Give marks Post-speaking: (2') .Ask students to write a short paragraph about his/her studying at school (80-100 words) .Do you like taking photos? .How do you feel today? . we do Yes.Listen to the teacher and write down on the notebook V.English 10 not by giving the previous words and let students to make questions using those words .Some students to tell a school life of Homework: (1') others in front of the class . II.Go around and provide help if necessary School year: 2011 .Yes.Practice speaking in pairs life of a student by using information that was taken note in front of the class . Teaching aids: textbook. Procedure: Teacher’s activities Students’ activities Warm-up: (2') .Ask students in each pair to tell about a school .Summarize the main points .

Before listening.Read new words 1st time .Let students read the statements carefully . then do task 1 and 2 Task 1 . photograph 5.Ask students to work in pairs to fill each blank with a suitable word .Listen to the teacher .Take note quickly .Guess the meanings of the words .English 10 . I have some questions for you .Listen 2 times and ask students to compare their answers with a friend .2012 .Give correct answers Task 2 .Listen to the teacher . photographer 4.Check the answers and correct 1.Read the statements independently .Ask students to listen to the tape and decide whether the statements are T/F .Confirm the meanings of the previous words and remind students the stress in the words photograph photographic photogenic photographer photography . photography 3.Check the answers as the whole class .Listen to the teacher attentively then correct the answers KEY: 48 .Give some photos and ask: * What are they? * How do you call a person who takes photos? * Well-done! What word do you use for a person who looks good/ attractive in photos? .Listen to the tape attentively and do the task 1 .A photographer .Answer in chorus .Work in pairs .Ask students to read the passage carefully and have a guess of missing words (give necessary suggestions to help students guess kinds of School year: 2011 .Work in pairs . photographic 2.Photogenic . photogenic + Listen and repeat . You should listen carefully.They are photos .You are going to listen to a talk about a club for disabled children.Let students guess the meanings of the words by giving explanation sorrow (n) = pain (n) passion (n) = great love for st mute (adj) = unable to speak exhibition (n) = a display labourer (n) = worker While you listen: (20') .Listen to the teacher and write down on the notebooks .Read aloud 2nd time .

simple 7.Listen to the tape again . 50 5.Call on 2 students to write the answers on the board to check dictation .Have students listen to the tape and write in each blank with a suitable word .F.F. stimulated answer about the Vang Trang Khuyet 10.Read the passage individually .Retell story about the Vang Trang Khuyet Club (80-100 words) .Tell students to work in groups: ask and 9.T.2012 1.Listen to their friends * What are their photographs about? * What does their passion of taking photographs help them? . escape Photographic Club by suggesting some .Work in groups questions as follow: .Do the task 2 .T. 3.English 10 words in each blank) .Call on some students to practice . chickens . photographic 2.Check the answers as the whole class .T .Give correct answers: School year: 2011 .Listen to the teacher and write down on the notebook V.Listen and correct mistakes if necessary Homework: (1') . 2. Objectives: By the end of the lesson. beauty 6. peaceful After you listen: (12') 8. 4. EXPERIENCE Period 23: Class 10A2 Teaching date Absentees I.Look at the board and find out mistakes KEY: 1. exhibition 4.Answer the questions based on the * What is the name of the club? information in the passage * Who are the members of the club? Where do they come from? How many are there? * How many photographs are on display? . students will be able to: . 5.read and understand a simple letter of a complaint 49 . 19 3.

Ask some questions: * What is a complaint letter? * Have you ever written a complaint letter? * Do you know how to write it? Well.Give hand-outs .Go around and provide help if necessary .Read the dialogue and do the task in the hand-outs .What kind of letter do you write if you feel .Listen to the teacher A complaint letter is written when someone is unhappy with something.Some pairs read aloud in front of the 50 .Then have students discuss and fill in the hand-outs .How did you feel when you wrote a letter? happy or sad? . such as: a story.2012 .Who did you write? . board.English 10 School year: 2011 . Procedure: Teacher’s activities Students’ activities Warm-up: (3') .Ask students to read through the dialogue . Teaching aids: textbook.Help them guess the meanings of the words in the advertisement native teacher (n)= teachers who come from English-speaking countries air-conditioned (adj)= to be equipped/ furnished with air-conditioner .A complaint letter angry about something or unhappy with something? A letter of complaint or a thankyou letter? Pre-writing: (15') .Read in pairs . rasing questions.Correct mistakes . please listen to me attentively .Work in pairs and do the task 1 .Give the form of a formal letter While-writing: (20') .write a letter of complaint about the poor quality of the service at an English Centre II.Answer freely .Listen to the teacher and take note quickly . .Have you ever written a letter? .Let students read the advertisement and work in pairs . SKILLS: Writing a letter of complaint III. hand-outs IV. a service. a course ect.Ask students to read the letter and get the information to fill in the blanks in the handouts .Call on 2 students to fill in each column .Listen to the teacher and write down on the notebooks . if you want to know how to write a letter of complaint.Help students realize the necessary parts in a complaint letter (= a formal letter) and remind them the way of using words .Check answers and correct mistakes .Try to guess the meanings and take notes .Do the task .

Work in groups and do the task .Check and give correct answers P2: No. * What do you have to write in that letter? P2: No. but there are over the letter basing on the dialogue in task 1 30 students in my class.Explain the general form of a reply to a letter of complaint: Opening 51 . P2: No. moreover etc. To make . (5) the room is not airconditioned. Furthermore. from the advertisement.Write down on the notebooks .Suggest students to retell the form.2012 Task 1 class . Sometimes it starts 20 minutes late. Task 2 . Classes are not . not all of them are native ones. P2: .English 10 School year: 2011 . The class time is not the same as mistakes the advertisement says..Review the above knowledge .Call on some pairs to read aloud the P2: No.Ask students to read through the letter questions individually .Correct mistakes information in 2nd column to complete the P2: No.Listen to the teacher attentively then * What does the writer complain about? write down * Is it worse or better than in the “First of all..Work independently and languages in the letter .Let students in one group compare their do not like most about your centre is the writings with ones in other groups to correct time..Look at the letter .Ask students to work in groups and complete more than 20 students. but my class has one * How does the writer want to resolve the Vietnamese teacher and two native problem? teachers. You also say each class has no . .Change the writings group by group ..Pick up some writings to check the mistakes only start late but also finish early.Ask students to work in pairs. What I . . also.. second.. in .” as the whole class .. (2) there are only few native completed dialogue teachers. The first sentence can be “You say in the an cassette tapes free of charge but in advertisement…” fact we have to pay for them.Listen to the teacher Post-writing: (3') . in fact. There is only a ceiling fan in my classroom. but in fact classes often start late and finish early.Ask students to write a reply to the letter of complaint at home .Listen to the teacher and answer the . (4) I have to pay for them. It is very hot. the classroom is not writings: air-conditioned. (1) I’m definitely not happy with dialogue it at all.. Students can use some connectors in their the matter worse. structures .Summarize the main points Homework: (4') . you say that there are only advertisement? native teachers.Raising some questions: .51) . (3) in fact there are more than * You want to write a letter of complaint? 30 students in my class. using the .Give suggestions: the advertisement you say we have books . That is quite different first. Finally.Ask students to look at the letter (on p.

John wants to watch Walter wash the dog. Objectives: By the end of the lesson. Procedure: Teacher’s activities Warm-up: (3') .Take notes quickly 52 .What’s the weather like today? .Remember them the way to pronounce two sounds: / ɔ / is a short sound / ɔ: / is a long sound. today I’ll introduce to you 2 vowels / ɔ / and / ɔ: / + Listen and repeat .Look at the board .Write on the board 2 following sentences: 1.Call some students to read aloud these sentences in front of the class Ok.Did you finish your homework? Pronunciation: (15') .Listen and repeat .What did you do last night? .Answer freely .Listen to the teacher . 2. .2012 Period 24: Class Teaching date 10A2 Absentees I.Ask students to repeat several times to help them distinguish the difference between 2 sounds Students’ activities . raising questions IV.Listen to their friends . Laura’s daughter bought a horse and call it Laura. put the back of your tongue up a little .Ask students to listen and repeat .Read all the words 1st time clearly .English 10 Explaining the mistakes Solving the problem V. Teaching aids: Textbook. EXPERIENCE: School year: 2011 .Distinguish and pronounce the sounds / ɔ / and / ɔ: / correctly use the + adjective as a noun. combine two sentences with which and review used to + infinitive II. students will be able to: . SKILLS: Pronounce the sound / ɔ / and / ɔ: / correctly III. board.

Check the answers as the whole class .Review the structure and write down on the notebooks .Ask students to work in pairs and do the exercise 3 .Read the exercise .the unemployed 4. used to live 4.Work in pairs Key: 2.Call on some students to give the answers .Call on some students to read aloud the sentences in front of the class .I used to… . used to take 7.Retell the relative clauses with which . the sick 5.English 10 School year: 2011 .Work in groups and do the exercise .Give correct answers Exercise 3 . did you use to go . used to be 8.Listen to the teacher . the injured 3.Ask students to work in groups with 3 members: read all the words and check the meanings .Ask the question: What did you use to do when you were a child? .Ask students to do the exercise .Read all the sentences .Help them review the relative clause with relative pronoun which Which can be used in relative clauses to refer to the whole of the earlier clause .Remember them the function of each column: A and B .Help students by giving suggestions: find key words in each sentence to complete the exercise more quickly Ex: 2nd sentence: accident – injured 3rd sentence: job – unemployed .Ask all groups do the exercise .Correct the answers Key: 2.Let students review the structure used to + infinitive: we use this structure to express a past habit .Check and correct pronunciation .Check and give correct answers Note: We use the + adjective to describe a group of people as a whole Example: the rich = rich people (a group of people who are rich) Exercise 2 . used to be 6.Give some examples to help them understand clearly (both negative and question) .Correct the answers 53 .Listen to the teacher and write on the notebooks . used to eat 5.Listen to the teacher .Work in pairs .Repeat following the teacher Grammar and vocabulary: (25 minutes) Exercise 1 . used to have 3.Read each sentence and ask students to repeat .Ask students to read through the exercise .Let students compare their answers with a friend .2012 + Practise these sentences . the rich/ the poor .

Can you use computers? 2.f 4.The present perfect passive .Look at the book and do the task 54 .a 6. Teaching aids: Student’s book.The present perfect .Ask students to look at the illustrations of different parts of a computer system and match .b Homework: (2') . Objectives: By the end of the lesson. VDU. Yes. . Grammar: .d 3. Vocabulary: Words related to modern computers and equipment III.improve reading skill through Matching and Answering questions exercises. EXPERIENCE Period 25: Class 10A2 Teaching date Absentees I.g 5. CD.English 10 School year: 2011 .Listen to the teacher and answer the . LANGUAGE FOCUS: 1.Listen to the teacher and write on the notebooks V.Give correct answers 2. Procedure: Teacher’s activities Students’ activities Warm-up : (3') . The computer listen to music/ do calculators/ play games? 2. that 2. ROMS. students will be able to: . real objects and pictures showing modern computers and the illustrations of different parts of a computer V. floppy disks… and talk about their benefit in our modern life. I can. Before you read: (6') .use a number of words about computers such as CPU. SkillS : Reading for gist and for specific information IV.2012 .c 7.Ask students to do the exercise in the workbook . II.Check the answers as the whole class Key: .Who. What machine is used to type/ watch a film/ 1. which.Ask students some questions: questions: 1.

Look through the passage .. learn and so on A: Why is a computer a miraculous device? B: It’s a miraculous device because it’s a capable of doing anything you ask.Ask students to match the word or phrase in A * Task 1 with its definition in B .Ask students to read loudly the difficult words can’t be understood in chorus .Work in pairs .Ask students to discuss other uses of the 55 .Let them work in pairs .Explain pronunciation and meaning of the new words which appear in the passage .Walk round and help students if necessary A: What can a computer do to help us in our daily life? B: It can help us to visit shops and place of entertainment.Work in pairs 1. A-Central processing Unit (CPU) 6. B or C? * Task 3: .Ask students to look through the passage . check and help students .Let them work in pairs .Listen to the teacher and read the * Task 1 difficult words loudly in chorus . pay bills. B-CD rooms . After you read: . F-floppy disks While you read: (34') 7.Listen to the teacher .2012 each number item with one of the words or phrases in the box .Ask students the question: C–what can the computer do? What’s the best title A.Let students work in groups student’s book and do task 1 in groups .Ask students to decide which of the three * Task 2 options below is the best title for the passage .Walk round and help students if they can’t do * Task 2 . D-visual display Unit 2.a – 4. G-printer 4.Ask teacher some new words which .Ask students to use the cues below to answer * Task 3: the questions in task 3 .Some students give correct answers: 1. read books etc.Read the passage loudly .Help students read the passage .Look at the student’s book and do task .b – 5. E. receive emails.Go round.Listen to the teacher and do task 3 .e – 3.c – 2.d .Listen to the teacher and look at the .Let them work in groups .mouse 3.Listen to the teacher .English 10 School year: 2011 .Introduce students to check information in the 2 in groups passage for the answer . C-keyboard 5. it can speed up the calculations ect.Answer the teacher’s question: .

Ask students some questions: 1.Ask students to prepare B-Speaking at home V. electric cooker. Procedure: Teacher’s activities Warm-up: (4') . a computer. T. TV.Look at the things teacher shows and answer the questions: 1. What is used to wash the clothes? 1. an electric cooker etc. a fax machine. an air conditioner. It’s a fax machine 2. It’s used to send and receive letters quickly . IV.Computer. A washing machine Task 1: . air conditioner… II. Radio While-speaking: (24') 2. fax machine.Walk round and help students if they can’t do Homework: (2') . What’s this? 2.26) . What is it used for? Students’ activities . to read the text about computers in workbook (p.English 10 School year: 2011 . What is used to listen to music and news? 2.Show a modern device (or a picture of a modern device) and ask students the questions: 1.Ask students to find out some problems that people encounter when using computer. radio. EXPERIENCE Period 26: Class 10A2 Teaching date Absentees I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson. Teaching aids: Real objects and pictures showing various modern devices.Ask students to ask and answer questions Task 1: 56 .V.2012 computer in our daily life at home . students will be able to talk about he use ò the modern inventions in daily life such radio.Listen to the teacher . SkillS: Talking about the uses of modern technology III.Ask students to name some modern devices . they know air conditioner Pre-speaking: (5') .Listen to the teacher and write down .

listen.Check and help students A: Do you think information technology . 8.Work in pairs .Help students if necessary School year: 2011 .Look at the books .Walk round.store.English 10 about the uses of modern inventions . 5.Let them work in groups .Ask students to talk about the uses of information technology.Look at task 2.V is used for? Task 2: D: It is used to watch news .Walk round and help students if necessary Keys: 1.Let them work in pairs A: In what way is information . Task 3: 9.Do task 1 in pairs A: Can you tell me what a radio is used for? B: It is used to listen to music and news C: Can you tell me what a T.Listen to the teacher . 4.Look at Task 4 above . receive. listen to the teacher . use the information .make. 6. process.Ask students to do part Speaking: exercise 1. 2.Listen to the teacher explain why .send. 7.hold.Ask students to do task 2 Task 2: .Call some students to talk to each other then is very important to our lives? why? mark them B: Yes.Listen to the teacher and write down Homework: (3') . check and help students if technology the most useful to our lives? they can’t do B: I think… A: Why do you think so? B: Because… Post-speaking: (9') Task 4: Task 4: . Because it can help us store very large amounts of information transmit information quickly .Ask students to look at the ideas in task 2.transmit.Let them work in pairs .send. Task 3: then rank them in order of importance and .Introduce students how to do task 2 .Work in pairs . 2 in workbook and prepare part Listening at home V.Walk round.Let them work in pairs .2012 .Work in groups . 3. EXPERIENCE Period 27: Class 10A2 Teaching date Absentees 57 .design . listen to the students .

refused excuse.Ask students to open the books and look at the on… part “Before you read” . Objectives: By the end of the lesson.Decide whether the statements are T .Listen to students and repair their mistakes .Look at task 2.Listen and repeat the words worried.Ask students to listen to the old man’s story . listen to the teacher .Ask students to give their answers .Ask students some questions: .Look at the picture to say how to do when you use a radio . some pictures of the modern devices IV. What are they? 2.Listen to the teacher .Show the picture about a radio and ask students . VDU (visual display unit) headache . Procedure: Teacher’s activities Students’ activities Warm-up: (4') .Read or turn on the tapes script again once or .F – 6. II.F – 2.2012 I.Listen to the tapes script .Give the correct answers 58 .Read or turn on the tapes script twice or F .Look at the task 1 and listen to the .T – 4.Let they work in pairs B: very often A: How often do you use a cell phone? B: sometimes ………………. They are… * Ask students to ask and answer how often they use each of the items below and put a tick ( ) in . Skills: Listening for gist and specific information about a computer III.Ask them to read the statements carefully and . tape.F – 5. There are…. Teaching aids: Student’s book.Listen and correct mistakes While you listen: (20') Task 1: Task 1: . 2. students will be able to know how a person learns to use a computer and improve listening skill through True or False and Gap-filling exercise.Ask students to look at Task 1 teacher . cassette player. look at the book 1.Read the statements and try to try to understand them understand them .Ask students to listen to the tapes script and . memory.Answer the questions: the table? 1.T – 3. How many electrical appliances are there on .Listen to the teacher.English 10 School year: 2011 .Read the passage again and write in the missing words . * Ask students to listen and repeat the words: .Give correct answers: 1.F Task 2: Task 2: .Listen to the tapes script decide whether the statements are true or false .Work in pairs the right column A: How often do you use a radio? .Ask students to read the passage carefully .Speak about what we’ll do when using a radio Before you listen: (9') A: First plug into socket then turn it .

invented 2. real objects and pictures showing a public telephone. a card phone. Objectives: By the end of the lesson. ask students to open their books and introduce the set of instructions on how to use a public telephone 59 .Listen to the teacher .Work in groups . beginning the story with the following sentence: The story is about an old man who doesn’t know how to use the computer… .Help students and correct mistakes Homework: (2') .Ask students to listen and answer the questions: questions: 1.still 3.Listen to the teacher and write down the task 4. anything . Have you ever used a public telephone? 2. Teaching aids: Student’s book.The students are called to stand up and retell the story about an old man who doesn’t know how to use the computer… . Period 28: Class 10A2 Teaching date Absentees I. Can you show me how to use it? . Skills: Writing a set of instructions III. Procedure: Teacher’s activities Students’ activities Warm-up: (5') .Listen to the tapes script again .Ask students to rewrite the old man’s story and retell .Ask students to close the book .It students cannot answer the question or answer them incorrectly.Ask students to listen to the man’s talk again then retell his story.refused excuse 5. students will be able to writ simple instructions on how to use some household appliances. I have not 1. II.Let them work in groups . EXPERIENCE School year: 2011 .Call some students to retell the story .Listen to the teacher and answer the . I have/ No.2012 1. Yes. Is it easy or difficult to use it? ( Answer freely) 3.Ask students to prepare the part Writing at home V.English 10 twice . a remote control. a television IV. It is easy/ difficult 2.Try to retell the story .Help students give the correct answers After you listen: (10') .Read or turn on the tapes script again .

Introduce how to do it .English 10 Pre-writing: (8') Task 1: . 4… Task 4: 5. Press the programmed button Post-writing: (12') 4. Next. They are first.Give the answers: . 2. listen to the teacher . Press 1. What are the steps in using a public telephone? 4. insert.Some students stand up to read loudly .Let them work in pairs and try to understand its meaning .Do task 2 in pairs . It is a phone card. It is used to make a call 3.Let them work in groups . until + Imperative form of the verbs: lift. What’s this? 2.Show a phone-card and ask students: 1. First. If we want to operate a T.Walk round and repair students’ mistakes 1. Press the mute button . To obtain help.Walk round and help students School year: 2011 .Let them work in pairs .Ask students to give the answers .Correct mistakes the card is plugged in and the main is turned on. press the power button to turn on the T.Look at task 3. you must make sure that .Introduce how to do task 2 .V.Discuss its meaning .V with a loudly their sets of instructions remote control.Read task 1 carefully . dial 116 Task 3: .Give the answers: + Connectors: first.Listen to the teacher . press.Let them work in groups . next. Press the power button 3.Work in pairs . wait 60 . What should you do if you want to get help? While-writing: (18') Task 2: .Ask the teacher some new words or phrases .Answer the questions: 1.Ask some students to stand up and read A: If you want to operate a T.V with a remote control .V with a remote control. lift… next.Look at the students’ book .Ask students to look at task 3 . 3.Do task 4 in groups . insert… 4. select the .Explain meaning of words and phrases students haven’t known .2012 .Ask students to look at task 4 6. we have to make sure that the card is plugged in and the main is turned on 2.Do task 3 in groups task 3 .Walk round and help students if they want the set of instructions . then. Press the volume button up and down .Help students to answer the questions in .Ask students to read carefully the set of instructions on how to use a public telephone .Ask students to write a set of instructions on how to operate a T. 2. What’s it used for? 3.

Look at the board and listen to the . .2012 channel by pressing number 1. instructions in the notebook. 2.Introduce new lesson Pronunciation: (10') . Teaching aids: Student’s book. Skills:./ u: / and read aloud appearance in the sentences ./ u: / .Write on the board two sentences: teacher 1. take them off./ u: / which . Sue often goes to school on foot. EXPERIENCE Period 29: Class Teaching date 10A2 Absentees I.Read loudly the sentences . Objectives: By the end of the lesson.Ask students: What sounds are you learning today? .Look at the book 61 .Ask students to look at the books .Pronunciation : /  / .Grammar and vocabulary: + The present perfect + The present perfect passive + Relative pronouns III.English 10 School year: 2011 . . 2.Ask students to show /  / . Procedure: Teacher’s activities Students’ activities Warm-up: (4') .pronounce the sounds/  / and / u: / clearly and correctly .use the present perfect and present perfect passive appropriately II.Ask students to read loudly the sentences . Finally. do part writing in work book and prepare new lesson at home . cassette player IV.Show /  / .Listen to the teacher and write down V. tape. 3 … then press programmed button to select the programmed you like. Look at your shoes. press the volume button up and down to select Homework: (2') the volume and if you want to turn off.Ask students to close their books .Ask students to rewrite the set of press the power button again. students will be able to: .

afternoon .Do exercise 2 .which 10. 4.who 6.Listen and repeat loudly the words in the book . 2.which 2.Introduce how to do exercise 3 . 5.which 4. full.which 3.Introduce how to do exercise 2 . school.Listen to the teacher and write down .who 7.Call some students to write their answers on the board . … has been built … 2. Tan has laid two bottles of water on the table. shoes.Ask students to repeat * Practice the sentences .Call some students to write their answers on the board . that . Tan has turned on the lights.Pick out the words containing the sound: //: could.2012 .who * The present perfect passive: . bookshelf.Ask students to pick out the words containing the sound /  / .V. 6. … have been killed … . Tan has cleaned the floor. which. looking / u: /: June.Look at the book .Correct mistakes Exercise 3 .Correct mistakes School year: 2011 . … has been sent up … 3./ u: / .Turn on the cassette player or read loudly the sentences in the books .English 10 .Ask students to build sentences after the model and write in the present perfect passive . Exercise 2 .Do exercise 1 . Tan has tidied the house.The students who are called write the answers on the board: 1.The students who are called to write the answers on the board: 1.Explain the form: S + have/has + been + P2 Ex: Our school has been built since 1965. boot. … have been cut down … 4.Correct the mistakes Grammar: (29') * The present perfect tense: . which/that 9.Work in pairs 1. look.Ask students to look at their books .Walk round and help students 62 . put. Tan has opened the door.Let them work in groups .Explain relative pronouns: who.Do exercise 3 .Walk round and help students . Tan has turned on the T.who 5. 3.Let them work in pairs .Turn on the cassette player or read loudly the words in the books .Work in groups .Ask students to do exercise 1 . .Listen to the teacher and write down .Introduce how to do exercise 1 .Listen to the teacher and write down .who 8.Explain the form : S + have/has + P2 ( It is used to express a recently completed action) Exercise 1 .Listen and repeat the sentences . book.Let them work in groups . moon.

Vocabulary: Words to talk about activities in an excursion: planning for a trip. Procedure: Teacher’s activities Students’ activities Warm-up : (5') . Grammar: The present progressive and be going to 2.get information about some famous places in Vietnam through activities Before and After you read. Yes. such as: + Thien Mu pagoda + Ha Long Bay + The one-pillar pagoda + Valley of Love .Listen to the teacher and write down Homework: (2') homework to do at home . III. students will be able to: . Da Lat V. EXPERIENCE Period 30: Class 10A2 Teaching date Absentees I. Language focus: 1.Ask students to do exercise in work book . II.English 10 School year: 2011 . Ha Long Bay. Have you ever visited Thien Mu Pagoda? 1.Ask the students to match the photos with the information on the board Before you read: (7') .Ask students some questions: 1.improve reading comprehension skill by doing Multiple choice and Answering questions exercises. Skills : Reading for gist and for specific information about an excursion to a beautiful spot near Hanoi Iv. Objectives: By the end of the lesson.Ask students to prepare Unit 6 at home V.2012 . I have. Teaching aids: Textbook. 63 . entertainment activities.Correct mistakes . preparation.Match the photos with the information board and give a list of famous places in Viet on the board Nam.Hang large pictures of reading part on the . .Call some students to write their answers on the board . large pictures about Thien Mu pagoda.

It’s a picturesque site. 5. It was built in 1049 in the shape of a lotus. Expected answer: 1. some caves While you read: (20') * Task 1: Multiple choice . C or D to complete each of the sentences .A * Task 2: . 4.Let students sit in pairs and ask students to match the photos with the information in the books .Give correct answer School year: 2011 .500m) with some wonderful places to visit: Xuan Huong Lake. 4. They may not want to let her stay the night away from home. They are going to make a two-day trip and have a night campfire.Ask students to read all questions . 6 kilometers from the city Number 2: is Ha Long Bay.C 2.Ask students to read the summary carefully . They are visiting some caves because they want to understand their geography lesson better and many of them have never been inside a cave.Call on students to read and explain their answers in front of the class . wonder of the world. Where is it? 5. B.2012 2.The answers may be various Number 1: is Thien Mu pagoda. It’s a mountain resort (altitude 1. D 3.Give correct answers * Task 2: Answer the questions . is going to go on 2. pine forests. Number 3: is the one-pillar pagoda. Yes. Is it beautiful? 3. Number 4: is Da Lat city.Ask students to do the task . it is.Give correct answers After you read: (10') . Where is the one-pillar pagoda? . .Ask students to compare their answers with their friends 64 .Read the summary carefully . 5. Lan is anxious about her parents’ permission.Give correct answers: 1. It’s on the left bank of Hong River. It’s in Quang Ninh. . waterfalls * Task 1: .Call on some pairs to act out the activity in front of the class .Ask students to read the letter individually and choose the best answer A.Read and answer all the questions 1. 2. Have you ever visited Ha Long Bay? 4.English 10 2.Walk round and give comments when students need help . They are going on a trip when they have some days off after the 1st term. They are bringing their own food and sharing buses with some other classes to make the trip cheap. 3. 165 kilometers from Hanoi. I have. Yes.Do the task individually. It’s only over 20 km.Ask students to work in pairs and answer the questions . 3. It’s in Hanoi.

non-air conditioned 4. Today.Give some suitable places 1. we study part B: Speaking to know how to choose the best seat then we go on a boat trip” Pre-speaking: (8') .Ask students to write about their own excursion (100 words) . Have you ever gone on a boat trip? 2.Ask some questions: 1. board IV. want to see summary 4.English 10 School year: 2011 . 2. her classmates Homework: (3') . only problem 7.Call on some students to read the completed 3. EXPERIENCE Period 31: Class Teaching date Absentees 10A2 I. their trip 6. students will be able to talk about the seat plan on a boat trip on Lake Michigan in Chicago. The seat on the sundeck… 65 .2012 . sundeck 2. Yes. to persuaded them 8. Is it interesting? 4. refreshments 5. II. Skills: Talking about a boat trip abroad III. have learnt . Teaching aids: Textbook.Write down on the notebooks V. Procedure: Teacher’s activities Warm-up : (5') . Objectives: By the end of the lesson. I have. Which seat do you think the most suitable for you? . air-conditioned 3. pictures.Give correct answers 5. there are many nice seats. Yes. it is. Last summer 3. 4.Say “Ok. When? 3. occupied Students’ activities 1.

20. B: That’s right. A: Which seat do you think the most suitable for Tim? B: I think Tim had better take the seat 40. Put her in seat 34. maybe you are right. it’s not a good idea because Tim want to visit in the sun. A: Which seat seems suitable for Mr. 6 + Sam: seats which can help a good view.Give correct answers School year: 2011 . She doesn’t like it.English 10 While-speaking: (20') * Task 1: Multiple choice . A: Ok.Ask students to work in groups . The seat 34 for Mr. B: Ok. From here she can see all her students.2012 . Seat: 31.Let students work in pairs and discuss the . B: I don’t think so. A: Ok.Ask students to read the information about some of the participants . suitable for taking photographs. A: Well.Practice question: 66 . 37. 19.Work in groups and give the answers + Mr. 26. using the information in task 1 and the seat plan in task 2 . A: No. safe. Andrew: seats which aren’t in the sundeck but can help see all the students. A: What about Susan? B: I think Susan had better take the seat 10. so.Ask students to read the seat plan and decide the best seat for each person.Ask students to work in groups . 34 . Andrew? B: I think she should sit in seat 12. 40. A: But it’s in the sundeck.Go around the class and provide help when necessary . 32 + John: seats which aren’t air conditioned. John doesn’t like airconditioning so put him in seat 37 and he would like to take photographs. using the information in task 1 . 46. Andrew * Task 2: Conduct a conversation . 4.Call on some groups to conduct the conversation . 29. 11. Seats: 16. Seat: 1. A: I think put John in seat 45. Seat: 43.Give comments * Task 3: . put him in sit 1 or 6.Go around to help the students when they need .Conduct a conversation 1. 2.Tell students to conduct the conversation like the example in the book.Work in groups . 45 + Mary: seats which have plenty of fresh air. Seat: 10. A: I think so because she wants to be near Mary. 3. 12 + Tim: seats which are in the sundeck.

The answers may be various 1.2012 Homework: (2') .Listen and take note next summer in their notebooks V. students will be able to improve their listening skill through Ordering.Call on some students to present in front of the class . at weekend/ in the summer ect. Yes. EXPERIENCE Period 32: Class Teaching date Absentees 10A2 I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson. Teaching aids: Textbook.Give the missing letters: P …………… C . 2.Copy down . 3.Ask some questions: 1. please speak about the things you should take on the trip and give reasons School year: 2011 .Ask students to guess the missing letters and fill them in the blanks to have a meaningful word Pre-listening: (5') . cassette player IV.Comment and make necessary corrections Post. Why do people go for picnics? Students’ activities .Give answer: Picnic . you are going to Hue next summer. Gap-filling and Answering questions exercises. II. When is the best time for a picnic? 3. I don’t. Skills : Listening for gist and specific information III.English 10 Which seat do you think the most suitable for you? why? .speaking: (10') . Procedure: Teacher’s activities Warm-up : (4') . They go for picnics to visit some 67 .Let students write their topics about the trip . Do you often go for a picnic? 2.Suppose. I do/ No.

Play the tape several times if necessary . . 2. 3.Call on some students to explain their answers in front of the class * Task 2: Gap-filling . The garden was beautiful.Call on some students to read aloud their answers in front of the class . They took pictures.3. Yes.2012 beautiful places/ to relax ect. sang and danced.Ask students to compare their answers with a friend .Call on some groups to present the topic in front of the class .e .Work in pairs weekend.Play the tape more than once if necessary . The weekend picnic I enjoyed most was just a few weeks ago.Work in pairs .4. 2. They could sleep soundly because it was so peaceful and quiet in the garden.Ask students to work in pairs to discuss the topic: “ If your class could go for a picnic this .Ask students to listen to the tape again and fill in the blanks with exact words they hear .a . .6.Give the meanings of some words: glorious assemble destination left-overs delicious Botanic Garden spacious sleep soundly .Comments and make necessary corrections . 4.Give correct answers School year: 2011 .Ask students to listen and repeat While-listening: (24') * Task 1: . Post.Ask students to compare their answers with a friend .English 10 .d * Task 2: .listening: (10') . 4. My class decided to pay a visit to the Botanic Garden. In the afternoon.Do the task individually Correct answers: 1.Tell students to read the sentences carefully and have a guess of the missing words .Call on some students to read aloud their answers .Ask students to listen to the tape and number the pictures in the order they hear .f .Correct answers: 1. We met at the school gate on time.c . The weather was very nice.Listen to the tape and do the task * Task 1: .Check and give correct answers * Task 3: Answer the questions . it was. 3. talked. played games.5.Listen the tape again Correct answers: 1.Ask students to work in pairs and study the pictures carefully . what would your plan be?” .Play the tape again and ask students to answer the questions independently .2. 5.b . we went on playing some more games.Give own answers .Present the topic in front of the class 68 . We made a short tour round the garden. 5.

English 10 Homework: (2') .Say “ Ok. handouts IV. Writing a letter of complaint/ a thank you letter/ a love letter ect.Give the meanings of some words .Ask students to work in pairs and read two letters below and find the requests in Nga’s letter and confirmation in Hoa’s .Tell students to underline the structure Students’ activities 1.Ask students to write: Your plan for a picnic this weekend School year: 2011 . I didn’t.Explain the definition of request and confirmation letters .Ask students some questions: 1. Objectives: By the end of the lesion.Confirmation is the letter that responds to the request. No. Did you study how to write a confirmation letter? .Give answers: + Request: Can you go shopping with me to buy the things we need for the trip? 69 .Work in pairs and do the task . students will be able to write a confirmation letter responding to a request and an invitation II. .Listen to the teacher and write down . While-writing: (20') * Task 1: . Teaching aids: Textbook. What sort of letters did you study? 2.2012 . EXPERIENCE Period 33: Class Teaching date Absentees 10A2 I. today we will study how to write a confirmation letter” Pre-writing: (15') .Listen to the teacher and write down V. It confirms whether the help is provided or the information is available or not.Request is the letter that ask for information or help . Skills : Writing a confirmation letter to a friend that responds to a request and an invitation III. 2. Procedure: Teacher’s activities Warm-up : (3') .

Teaching aids: Textbook. fir.Lan asks you to buy some fruits and bring them to her house.Ask students to exchange their writings with a friend .Call on two students to read the letters aloud in front of the class * Task 2: Writing confirmation . I will be at your home at 6.Ask students to read the situations carefully and find the requests in both of them Post. Objectives: By the end of the lesion. bird. today.Minh wants to borrow you a book about wildlife.Ask students to choose the first situation to write a confirmation letter responding to each of them . Dear Lan. handouts IV.reviewing the present progressive (with a future meaning) and be going to II. other 2. Skills : Fluency in pronunciation / III. other 1.English 10 showing requests and confirmation . Mai Period 34: Class Teaching date Absentees 10A2 I. I will help you to prepare everything you need for the party.writing: (5') . earn. .2012 + Confirmation: certainly I will help you to prepare everything you need for the trip.Call on some students to explain their answers in front of the class . EXPERIENCE School year: 2011 . Love.Give some words: 1. Procedure: Teacher’s activities Warm-up :(4') . Firstly. .Ask students to choose the second situation to write a confirmation letter responding to each of them V.Give suggested answers . Certainly.distinguish the sounds /∂ / and /З:/ . Ss will be able to: .Check their writings in front of the class as a whole Homework: (2’) . from.30 pm on Saturday. of 2. nurse . I will go to the nearby market and get them on Saturday morning. let me congratulate you on your 15th birthday.Ask students to choose one word whose underlined part is pronounced differently Students’ activities 70 . nurse.

English 10
Pronunciation: (12') - Demonstrate the sound /∂/ and / З: / by pronouncing them clearly and slowly - help students to distinguish these two sounds / З: / is a long sound / ∂ / is a short sound - Play the tape and ask them to repeat - Call on some students to repeat the sounds clearly - Ask students to work in pairs and practice these sentences - Go around the class and provide help if necessary Grammar: (27') Simple Future: Will Form: S + will/shall + V Use: expresses an intention or decision made at the moment of speaking + “be going to”: expresses an intention or decision thought about before the moment of speaking. It expresses a plan Ex: We’re going to Hanoi this summer Practice: * Exercise 1: Choose the correct option in brackets - Ask students to do exercise 1 - Ask students to compare and discuss the answers with a friend - Call on some students to read and explain their answers in front of the class - Give correct answers * Exercise 2: Put the verbs in brackets in the present progressive or “be going to” - Ask students to do exercise 2 - Ask students to compare their answers with a friend - Call some students to explain their answers - Give correct answers * Exercise 3: Complete the exchanges, using the present progressive or “be going to” - Ask students to do the task in pairs - Call on some students to act out the exchange in front of the class - Make necessary corrections Homework: (2')

School year: 2011 - 2012

- Listen to the teacher

- Repeat in chorus - Work in pairs

- Listen to the teacher and copy down

* Exercise 1: 1. What are you doing this Saturday evening? 2. …is getting married… 3. … are you going… 4. …I’m going to be… 5. … is going to… * Exercise 2: 1. are going 2. are having 3. is going to catch 4. are you putting 5. is not going to give * Exercise 3: 1. Are you going to see it? I’m doing my homework. 2. We are visiting our grandparents. 3. What’s he going to do with it? 4. It’s going to rain soon. 5. I’m going to clean them later.

71

English 10
- Ask students to distinguish the present and “be going to”

School year: 2011 - 2012
- Write down on the notebooks

V. EXPERIENCE:

Period 35: Class 10A2 Teaching date TEST YOURSELF B Absentees

I. Objectives: After this lesson, students will be able to: - Check themselves their skills in reading, speaking, listening and writing. - Improve their knowledge through the test yourself. II. SKILLS: Listening, speaking, reading and writing III. TEACHING AIDS: Text book, the board and hand-outs IV. PROCEDURE: Teacher's activities Warm-up (5') - Greet students. - Ask students something about the test yourself A. Have you prepared it at home? Have you got any difficulties? Test yourself (10') I. Listening(2.5 points) - Present the task : Listen and complete the table below. - Tell students the topic of the table. - Get students to look through the table. - Explain the meaning of new words. - After that read the passage aloud twice. - Let students fill in the blanks with the words they have just heard. - Go round the class to control the work. - Then read the passage the last time for students to Students' activities - Greet teacher. - Answer teacher’s questions.

- Look at the book and listen to the task. - understand the task. - Listen to teacher’s reading carefully. - Fill in the blanks with the words they’ve just heard. - Correct mistakes. Keys: 1. 50 miles to the West of Lon don

72

English 10
check their results. - Correct mistakes.

School year: 2011 - 2012
2. 120,000 inhabitants/people 3. market town 4. biscuit factory 5. computer industry 6. in central England 7. 90,000 people 8. university 9. car factory 10. Cowley Road - Look at the textbook and listen to teacher. - Work in groups to discuss about the passage. - Finish the task. - Compare the result with the other groups. And then with the keys. Keys: 1. F 2. F 3.T 4. F 5.T - Listen to teacher. - Work in groups to complete the letter. - Compare the result with the other groups. - Correct mistakes. - Finish the letter. Key: 1. out by scientists 2. opportunities for other 3. there is 4. which attempts 5. all the 6. organizing the 7. inventions a/ per/ every 8. developed by 9. it is 10. it be wanted - Read the suggestions carefully. - In groups or in pairs, discuss about the letter. -Compare the result with the other groups. -Correct mistakes

II. Reading (2.5 points) 10' - Present the task: Read the passage and decide whether the following statements are true (T) or false (F). - Get students to work in groups, discuss about the passage. - Go round the class to control the discussion - State the best options. - Correct mistakes. III: Grammar. (8') - Present the task: Read the following paragraph. One word is missing from each line. Put a stroke (/) where the word has been omitted and write the missing word in the space provided. - Get students to discus the paragraph in groups or in pairs. - Go round class to control the students’ activities - State the keys. - Correct mistakes.

IV. Writing(10') - Present the task: Your class would like to visit your uncle’s computer factory which is located near your school. Write to him and ask for permission to visit. - Ask students to read the suggestions carefully. - Guide sts to write the letter. - Go round class to control the sts’ activities. - Correct mistakes Homework (2') - Ask students : *to study all the lessons again.

- Study all the lessons again. - Get the knowledge ready for the

73

English 10
*get ready for the 45- minute test in the next period. V. EXPERIENCE:

School year: 2011 - 2012
coming test.

Period 36 +37: WRITTEN TEST 45' + CORRECT THE TEST Class 10A2 Teaching date Absentees

WRITTEN TEST 45' Full name: ...............................................................................Class 10A2 Using the connector “WHICH” to combine the following sentences: 1. Mai arrived on time. It amazed everybody. ............................................................................................................................... 2.Her phone is out of order. It’s a real nuisance. .............................................................................................................................. Change into passive voice: 3. We have bought that house before. ................................................................................................................................ 4. Someone has repaired these chairs for months ................................................................................................................................. Choose the word/ phrases to complete the sentences below: 5.The street I live in is vey noisy at night, ……………makes it difficult to sleep. A. what B. this C. which D. that 6. A new bridge………….across the Tamky river recently. A. has built B.has been built C.was built D.is built 7.This box ……………..for a long time yet. A.hadn’t been opened B.hasn’t been opened C.hasn’t opened D.has been opened 8. Thien Mu…………….is on the left bank of the Huong river, 6 kilometres from Hue. A. church B.school C.pagoda D.site 9.I can’t operate this washing machine, Can you give me the………………… ? A. book B.computer C.instruction D.device 10. When the school year come to………..we’ll go on an excursion. A.a half B.an end C. a conclusion D.a stop 11.Most students…………….how to use computer fluently up to now. A.know B.has known C.have known D.has been kown. 12.What is the music …………….you are listening to ? A.that B.whom C.which D. A & C are correct. 13.Some children in the village are……………retarded. A.mental B.mentally C.mentality D.mentalism 14.The …………..in the war should be taken care of. A. injured B.injuring C.injures D.injured

74

disabled 21.a hotel opposite the station. Louis liked to help his father in the store even when he was very small.sport C.excursion C. 23.. A B C D 32. 75 . use to 25.time-consumed D. but it closed a long time ago.blind D.. A.injured B.. he was cutting some leather. Armies send messages in secret codes so no one else can read them.time-consuming C.deaf C. A. school D.pull 27. One thing in the exhibit was very interesting for Loius. Did you use to stay B. It showed message in code.top D. A. used to be B. A.which D.job Choose the word that needs correcting 30. look 29.far C. A.Who B.A………. cook B. Did you use to stay up D.late? A.We ………….pagoda 28. Suddenly the knife slipped and hit him in the eye. There …………….have B.will rain C. ………………. A. A. A.situation C.person cannot hear any kind of sound.blind D. teacher B.whose C. His father had a small business. He made shoes and other things from leather. mute B. would you like to come ? A.mute C.The teacher got angry because Jack went out of the class without getting her……………. Look at those black clouds! It will rain.condition D.a party next Sunday.rains B.2012 15.are having D. Is Helen used to live in a small flat ? A B C D 31.is raining D.dumb 17.The………….are those who do not have a job.lives next door is an English teacher.time-consumption B.A. foot C.whom 22.standby D. Our flight was delayed. A. When he was ten years old.I think it……………. Do you used to stay up C. A. remote B.unemployed C. he entered the national Institute for the blind in Paris.is going to have 20. the sky is so cloudy.persuasion Choose one word whose underlined part is pronounced differently from the that of the others: 26. used to is D.put C.is going to rain 19. He soon became completely blind.June D. A B C D Read the following passage and then the following exercises: Louis Braille was born in France in 1809. A.is used to C. The captain wrote this code in raised letters on very thick paper. Do you use to staying up 16.will have C.special 18. One day when Louis was 3 years old.full B.permission D.disabled B.deaf.boss B.The……………are those who are unable to use part of the body in the normal way.English 10 School year: 2011 . A.Be patient with……………………work.permission B.The man………….You can change the TV channels with this …………………control.time-consumable 24. One day his class went to visit a special exhibit by a captain in the army. that meant we had to wait for hours at the airport.retarded D.

...........codes 34...............................pull C........ A. Braille invented a system of reading for blind people B...... A.............. arrangements of dots C.....English 10 School year: 2011 ...... Louis Braille was an intelligent boy B.. raised letters D.... ....................... When Louis was ten years old...........Class 10A2 Choose one word whose underlined part is pronounced differently from the that of the others: 1.. cook B....... wool B.... Braille system is used for everyone D................ A. massages C....................mentality D.....sport Choose the word/ phrases to complete the sentences below: 5...... Choose the best answers: 33..2012 Louis thought a lot about this code......... It showed …………. 40. code massages B........ a system of raised dots 37............ exhibit D........in code.top D.... at a special school for the blind B... Instead of letters.permission D......mentalism 76 ................. Did he enter the national Institute for the blind in Paris in 1819? ......... A.. Braille visited an exhibit of codes C...job C.... Then he decided to write in the same way so the blind could “read’ with their fingers..... at a university C...... THE END WRITTEN TEST 45' Full name: ........... Louis Braille’s father made things from………… A........ So blind people can read and write even write music by Braille.........boss B.......................June D....excursion 4......... When & where was Louis Braille born? .... 39... .put 3......mentally C...... A....mental B. When was he blind? ........ teacher B...................................... A..... Answer the following questions: 38... look 2... leather C......... Which of these sentences is probably NOT TRUE? A................... foot C... A... He saw a special exhibit...... in the army D............ A..... he began to study………........ arrangements D.......... at a local school 35....... systems B.................. ....... A...........full B......Some children in the village are……………retarded.. computers 36.... He arranged the dots with two dots across and three down.... It is very difficult to feel the differences between raised letters...pagoda C............... Louis used a “cell” of six dots.......... It is difficult to feel the differences between………. school D................

deaf C.The……………are those who are unable to use part of the body in the normal way. has built B. that meant we had to wait for hours at the airport.rains B. but it closed a long time ago. church B. A.know B..computer C.lives next door is an English teacher. A new bridge………….has been kown. Did you use to stay up D.school C.. ……………makes it difficult to sleep.injures D. used to is D.have B.2012 6.Most students…………….in the war should be taken care of. that 12. would you like to come ? A.blind D.time-consumption B..disabled B.mute C.A………. what B.special 15.standby D. A. Do you use to staying up 14.The………….time-consumed D. this C. 24. a conclusion D.situation C.permission Choose the word that needs correcting 26.Thien Mu…………….whom 25.is raining D.The street I live in is vey noisy at night. There …………….has known C. When the school year come to……….hasn’t opened D.hadn’t been opened B.is built 18.is on the left bank of the Huong river. A.device 16. A. 19.The teacher got angry because Jack went out of the class without getting her…………….are those who do not have a job.This box …………….a half B. A. which D.which D.has been opened 17.a hotel opposite the station.late? A.far C.blind D. A.Who B.The ………….will have C.which D.unemployed C.whom C. 11.site 20.I can’t operate this washing machine. A. 77 . A.retarded D.pagoda D.time-consuming C. A.you are listening to ? A.disabled 8.You can change the TV channels with this …………………control.person cannot hear any kind of sound.. mute B. use to 13. 6 kilometres from Hue.was built D.Be patient with……………………work.is going to rain 22.condition D. remote B.. A.a stop 21.The man………….is used to C.hasn’t been opened C.has been built C.persuasion B.whose C.will rain C. Our flight was delayed.an end C. A & C are correct. A. ……………….injuring C.how to use computer fluently up to now.we’ll go on an excursion. A.for a long time yet.We ………….English 10 School year: 2011 .time-consumable 10.instruction D. Did you use to stay B.injured 9. A. Look at those black clouds! It will rain.I think it……………. Do you used to stay up C.deaf.that B. A. Is Helen used to live in a small flat ? A B C D 27.have known D. A.dumb 7. used to be B. injured B.a party next Sunday.are having D.What is the music ……………. book B. Can you give me the………………… ? A.injured B..across the Tamky river recently. A B C D 28.is going to have 23. the sky is so cloudy. A.

........................... Louis Braille was an intelligent boy B.. Which of these sentences is probably NOT TRUE? A.......... Choose the best answers: 29..... computers It is difficult to feel the differences between………... He made shoes and other things from leather... 36. One day when Louis was 3 years old..2012 A B C D Read the following passage and then the following exercises: Louis Braille was born in France in 1809............. It is very difficult to feel the differences between raised letters............codes 30.... One day his class went to visit a special exhibit by a captain in the army. Did he enter the national Institute for the blind in Paris in 1819? ........ Louis thought a lot about this code.... 78 .. Braille invented a system of reading for blind people B..... 35... It showed …………..... He soon became completely blind.................... at a local school B. A............. Change into passive voice: 37............. When he was ten years old........... Braille visited an exhibit of codes C... a system of raised dots D..... wool B.... It showed message in code. 38..................................................................... He saw a special exhibit. Someone has repaired these chairs for months ... Louis Braille’s father made things from………… A... Braille system is used for everyone D..... arrangements of dots C..... Instead of letters... He arranged the dots with two dots across and three down............ Louis used a “cell” of six dots........... he was cutting some leather............... They have bought that house before................... So blind people can read and write even write music by Braille.. he entered the national Institute for the blind in Paris....... massages B. Answer the following questions: 34. systems C.in code.................................... A... at a university C.... in the army D.....English 10 School year: 2011 ......... A........................ arrangements D... When was he blind? .. Suddenly the knife slipped and hit him in the eye.......... Armies send messages in secret codes so no one else can read them.............. When & where was Louis Braille born? ... leather D.. A......... at a special school for the blind 31............ One thing in the exhibit was very interesting for Loius..... Then he decided to write in the same way so the blind could “read’ with their fingers........... raised letters 33........ Louis liked to help his father in the store even when he was very small.............................. code massages B....... His father had a small business.. The captain wrote this code in raised letters on very thick paper..... he began to study………..... When Louis was ten years old..... exhibit C...

........The present simple tense. THE ANSWER KEY M· ®Ò 789 C©u §... General knowledge: .................... b........ It’s a real nuisance... ..........A C©u 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 §..... a.......Knowledge about TV programme schedules.....A 1 26 2 27 3 28 4 29 5 30 6 31 7 32 8 33 9 34 10 35 11 36 12 37 13 38 14 39 15 40 16 41 17 42 18 43 19 44 20 45 Unit 7 THE MASS MEDIA A .........Students read about TV programme schedules...............................A C©u §..... Education aims: 2.......A Period: 38 Class 10A 2 I..2012 Using the connector “WHICH” to combine the following sentences: 39.................... Knowledge: ...................... OBJECTIVES: 1........ 40.......English 10 School year: 2011 .My phone is out of order....... ... 79 .............................Reading Teaching date Absentees C©u 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 M· ®Ò 015 §.............................. Sarah arrived on time. It amazed everybody............. Language: .............

Listen to the teacher.Warm-up:( 3 mins) Aims: sts get used to the topic.Work in groups of 3-4 sts blackboard 1. 3-4 sts are required to answer orally in front of the class ( 1 st/ 1 time).Read each word/phrase twice and ask sts . Before you read: ( 10 mins) Aims: to prepare information and vocabularies for the topic. enslieisov 3.Vocabulary concerning TV programmes.evido . METHOD: Integrated. 2. TEACHING AIDS: Real objects and pictures of TV programs.Listen and copy down.Sts write the words individually on the Student’s Activities 80 . 2. . Skills: .4 representatives are required to write the words on the blackboard. II. newspaper 3. + Pairwork: .Check and give remarks. 1.. . 4. + VTV5: For the Ethnic minority groups .English 10 School year: 2011 . mainly communicative III.For each question. . idora 5. IV.Ask the sts to work in pairs to answer the question given in the part and some other questions.2012 .Gather the ideas and give some background information about TV channels in Vitetnam. + VTV4: For the overseas Vietnamese.Give 5 words about the forms of mass and ask sts to work in groups of 3-4 sts to rearrange them in good order to make the right words. .Do the work orally in front of the class. PROCEDURE: Teacher’s Activities 1.Work in pairs. 3. + VTV3: Sports and Entertainment. . .Speaking : talk in pairs and in groups. magazine 5. + VTV2: Science and Education.Reading comprehension: Read for general ideas and specific information. video media whose letters are in the wrong order . Economics and Entertainment. + VTV1: Combination of Politics. television 2. . + Jumbled words. agenmzia . rwepeapns 4. radio .

.Listen and help sts to read the words/phrases correctly.Ask sts to read the TV programme schedules and do task 1: Match the words in A aloud. Aims: Read the passage for information to .Listen and repeat. .Share their answers with their friends. .Work in pairs to read the programmes and do the task. .Provide the students with new words/phrases School year: 2011 .4 sts are required to do the task orally in front of the class (1 st/ 1 time). with their partners. Task 1: Matching.Self-correct.2012 Listen and copy down + Vocabulary: + channel (n) h×nh) + Mass media (n): public institutions that report news and other stories . .English 10 to repeat it and leave sts 1 minute to selfpractice. While you read:( 20 mins) do the tasks. + Population and Development (phr): D©n sè vµ ph¸t triÓn + TV Series (n): Phim truyÒn h×nh dµi tËp + Folk Songs (n): D©n ca nh¹c cæ + News Headlines (n): ®iÓm tin chÝnh + Weather Forecast (n): Dù b¸o thêi tiÕt + Quiz Show (n): trß ch¬i truyÒn h×nh + Portrait of Life (phr): Ch©n dung cuéc sèng + Documentary (n): Phim tµi liÖu + Wildlife World (n): ThÕ giíi thiªn nhiªn hoang d· + Around The World (phr): Vßng quanh thÕ giíi . 3. .Others listen. . .Some sts stand up and read these word : Kªnh ( truyÒn .Ask 4-5 st to read all the word/phrases aloud in front of the class .Sts are required to compare their results 81 . 1.

6 pairs are required to answer orally in front of the class ( 1 pair/ 1 time). Teacher walks around the class and offers ideas and comments when students need help.English 10 which appear in the reading passage with their definitions in B. . 11:00p.5 sts are required to give their answers orally.2012 . 3. 12:00 at noon.Work in pairs. School year: 2011 .Some sts present their answes: Suggested answers: 1 – c. F ( The Nature of Language is on VTV3. + Task 3: Answering questions. . individually in front of the class with the evidence in the reading passage. At 9:00 a. 1. The Quiz Show. . 7:00p. 82 . 2. 3 – d.Work in pairs. There are five films on. (You should watch) VTV1 6. Teacher has the class read the text again.Listen and check the answers orally in front of the class. . Then teacher selects some students at random to provide the answers in front of the class.m on VTV3. T 3. individually and decide whether the statements are true (T) or false (F). 4 – b + Task 2: True or false: . 2 – a. . this time more slowly.Listen and help sts to answer the question correctly. . Football . to scan the details and do the task. T 5.Ask sts to work in pairs and answer the questions in the book basing on the information in the reading passage. 5.m. T 4.m on VTV1 and 7:00p. The answers: 1.m. Gives feedback and corrects the answers T: Read the passage again and decide whether the statements are true or false as well as correct the false. 2. F (VTV1 starts at 5:35 and the last programme starts at 23:30 . .Listens and helps sts to do the task correctly.Others listen and check.) .Sts read the programmes carefully.Some pairs stand up and ask and answer: The answers: 1. VTV2 4.

Besides.Sts are required to work in pairs to tell their partners about one of the TV programmes they like watching best and explain why.Others listen.Students know about the differences and similarities of some popular types of the mass media. Homework:( 2 mins) School year: 2011 . OBJECTIVES 1. General knowledge: . .English 10 4. Education aims: .Listen and self-correct.2-3 sts are required to give short talks on the given topic.Students can talk about the different types of the mass media. Knowledge: a.The simple present .Prepare for the next lesson: SPEAKING V. .Vocabulary on the mass media. . the reward for the winner is valuable.Get feedback and help the students to give correct talks 5. b. .Some sts talk in front of the whole class.Write a paragraph about a programme you like best. Language: .2012 . 2. B. EXPERIENCE: UNIT 7 THE MASS MEDIA Period: 39 Class 10A 2 I. . . Suggested answers: What TV program do you like best? I like the show The price is right most because it is easy to play and very interesting. After you read:( 10 mins) Aims: to give the summary of the topic. .Speaking: Teaching date Absentees 83 .

easy to play .English 10 School year: 2011 . Aims: Sts distinguish the different types of the + 'orally ( adv ) : spoken by mouth + 'aurally ( adv ) : seen by eyes + 'visually ( adv ): heard by ears . mainly communicative III.Listen and take notes.Speaking about different types of the mass media. to talk about the TV . 1.2012 3.Write the new words and read them aloud. Besides . Skills: . 84 . the reward for the winner is valuable .One student talk about the TV programme they .Call on some sts to explain their .Ask sts to work in pairs and decide which items are types of the mass media.TEACHING AIDS: Pictures.PROCEDURE: Teacher’s Activities 1. cassette player. Before you speak(5 mins) . METHOD: Integrated.Discussing about the features the types of the mass media have in common and the main features each of them has.Work in pairs Student’s Activities . best. . textbook. The Internet media in general. . Luu Minh Vu is humorous and very intelligent . Another reason I like this game show is the MC. Newspapers 4.Ask one st.Introduce some new words: orally. . especially television. Eg: I like Game show The price is right most because it is very interesting . II.Ask sts to read the new words mass media from the others.all of the Suggested answers: communication media that reach a large audience.Ask sts about the definition of the mass media: Mass media ( take a singular or plural verb) : communication . Radio 3. IV. . .Some sts give their answer in front of the class. Television 2. Homework checking(5 mins) programme they like watching like best. + Task 1: 2. radio and newspapers. Mr.

.. . answer the following questions: the mass media? + Task 3: ...Provide information and entertainment .Some sts give the answers in front of the class.....Ask sts some more questions : +What are the different types of orally and visually while radio provides ....... S2: Provide/ deliver information and Aims: Talking about the different S1: Television. The common feature of the mass media is that Television provides information and entertainment orally and visually.Ask sts to work in pairs and carry ......... and we receive .........English 10 answers in front of the class.................Call on some pairs to explain they all provide information and entertainment.. + The mass media: + The radio: Aims: Sts compare the features of ..... + Task 2: School year: 2011 .... S3: TV presents information and entertainment .Receive information aurally(through ears) ......Go around the class and help sts if necessary...Give sts correct answers.... .Work in groups to answer the questions in the book............ eg.. 4. .. distinctive( own) features? .Some sts answer: I like TV most because I can watch films and + What features do they have in performance on it/ I prefer newspapers because I common? + What are can choose to read them whenever I have free time... their answer in front of the class. ..Ask sts to look at the information them through our eyes and ears....Present information and entertainment orally out the activity using the cues in (through mouth) the book. and I can also choose to read only what I’m their interested in............2012 ........ ............ While you speak( 18 mins) the types of the mass media.. 85 .... .. ... newspapers..... 3.. the Internet. radio.. .. After you speak( 15 minutes) types of the mass media..Ask sts to work in groups and entertainment.... above and talk about the different types of mass media..Work in pairs to discuss some popular types of the mass media.

.English 10 Which types of the mass media do you usually get information from? Which one do you like most? Why? .Prepare for the nex t lesson: LISTENING V. 5.Sts understand 2 news stories on the radio. . Homework:( 2 mins) School year: 2011 . C.Write a paragraph ( about 50 words) about the features of the types of mass media.Ask some sts to answer and give correct answers.LISTENING: Teaching date Absentees 86 . General knowledge: .2012 . OBJECTIVES: 1. EXPERIENCE: UNIT 7 THE MASS MEDIA Period: 40 Class 10A 2 I.Go around to help sts if necessary.

fill in the gaps. While you listen: + Task 1: (7 mins) they hear.Tells sts that they are going to listen to two other’s mistakes. . 87 .Asks some sts to give their answer. Student’s Activities Aims: Practise listening and tick the word . + New words + Mount (n): e. textbook.Reads the words asks sts to repeat. answer the questions .Speaking: Retell the stories II.Requires sts to work in pairs and asks each other the following questions.: Mount Everest + in spite of + N (phr): = despite + N = Although + Clause .English 10 2. cassette etc IV: PROCEDURE Teacher’s Activities 1.2012 . mainly communicative III.How often do you listen to the radio? . School year: 2011 . Skills: . . 3.Vocabulary on adjs to describe weather. METHOD: Integrated.Listen to the teacher.Some sts stand up and give their answer. . .Gives some examples .Asks sts to read the words in pairs.Listening: tick on the word they heard.g.Asks some sts to read the words again.Which program do you like listening to? . . TEACHING AIDS: Real objects and pictures of a flood.Listen and repeat.The simple present tense.Copy the words and phrases. . + Pairwork: .Work in pairs to ask and answer the questions . Language: .Do you like listening to strange stories? . 2. news stories and the words will appear in the stories . Before you listen:(10mins) Aims: focus sts on the topic and review/ introduce the words and phrases used in the listening text.Read the words in pairs and correct each .

young.Compare their answers.Checks sts’ answer. stop the tape floods 2. their answer in pairs. young and healthy Correct answers News Story 1 .third 2. 88 . California 4.Check ssts’ answer. wonderful 5. News story 1: strong. . look at the words given and guess what the news stories about.English 10 . and then correct their work if they have the wrong answer.Give their answer. say it aloud. sure they understand them. 4. . 1. School year: 2011 . wonderful . words/phrases. strong wind . home + Task 3 (7 mins) 3.Plays the tape once again. cloudy 7. stop the tape News story 2: healthy. .Check their answer.Listen to the tape and do the task right column to indicate which words appear in which stories . and then specific correct their work if they have the wrong answer. . highest. twenty. two meters Aims: Practice listening for specific 5.Give their answers.418 3.Work in pairs to read the passages and try textbook and read them in pairs and make to fill in the gaps. cloudy.Plays the tape twice and ask sts to compare .Plays the tape once again. . has caused .Asks sts to compare their answer in pairs. 6. .2012 . . T encourages sts to guess the words/ phrases to fill in the gaps.Asks sts to have a look at the stories in the . .Asks sts to listen to the news and tick the .Asks sts to listen to the tape once/twice and .Asks sts to work in pairs. has stopped information by answering given questions.Check their answer.Asks sts to listen to the tape once or twice again to fill in the gaps with the missing .Listen and do the task. where necessary and conduct the correction.Asks sts to read the questions in pairs and make sure they understand the questions and know what information they need to answer the questions. have risen 4. have left their where necessary and conduct the correction. News Story 2 1. + Task 2: (10 mins) Aims: Practise listening for information by filling in the gaps. say it aloud.

(The old lady has climbed Mount Whitney) 23 times.Some sts answer the questions: Suggested answers: 1. EXPERIENCE: 89 . .Moves round to check the activities and to make sure that sts are working effectively.English 10 take short notes to answer the questions. Homework:(1min) healthy. . Heavy rain has caused floods all over the country.Work in pairs to read the questions. 3. Because the rivers have risen.Check their answer. Two sts present. Because it has kept her young and 4.Check and give remarks.Asks two sts to present in front of the whole class. .2012 .Listen and do the task. .Asks sts to compare their answer in pairs. stop the tape where necessary and conduct the correction. Write a short paragraph about a news story they have just heard on the radio or TV Ss prepare for the next lesson Writing V.Plays the tape once again. and then correct their work if they have the wrong answer.Compare their notes. one news story. . . After you listen:(10 mins) School year: 2011 . 4. . .Asks sts to work in pairs and each retell . 3. 2.Listen and check. . .

2012 UNIT 7 THE MASS MEDIA Period: 41 Class 10A 2 I. Task 1: Student’s Activities D.English 10 School year: 2011 . 1) What TV programmes do you like seeing? Why? 2) What TV programmes do you think are useful? Pre-writing (8 mn) 1. 2.WRITING: Teaching date Absentees Shows TV programmes and ask Students work in pairs Students’ answers may vary 90 . 1. Textbook IV.New words: Words related to TV programs. . Skills: writing about the advantages and disadvantages of TV II. Educational aim: Students should know how to spend their time on mass media.TEACHING AIDS: TV programs.PROCEDURE: Teacher’s Activities Warm-up (4 mn) questions.METHOD: Integrated. mainly communicative III. OBJECTIVES By the end of the lesson . especially TV Knowledge: . SS will be able to write a paragraph about advantages and disadvantages of television and other types of mass media .General knowledge: Students know the advantages and disadvantages of TV.

Which sentence says good about TV? Which one says bad? the by meaning analyzing the School year: 2011 . While-writing (18 mn) Asks Ss to work in pairs and discuss 2.We convenient can’t watch films or information down in the columns.2012 of Students sit in pairs. TV makes us passive. and do task 1 Asks Ss to read about the advantages Read about the advantages and disadvantages of and disadvantages of TV each sentence Teacher walks around the class and offers help when necessary.It only provides updated It is news and aural information . Gives suggested answers Suggested answers: Radio: advantages disadvantages . Newspapers: advantages disadvantages 91 .. TV Has Ss underline the key words of Underline the key words of each sentence because you can listen sports programmes to it everywhere.English 10 Implicits dis-/advantage examples: TV helps us to learn more about the world. pairs. Asks Ss to share the ideas with other Ask Ss to share the ideas with other pairs.It gives you hourly. Task 2: the advantages and disadvantages of Work in pairs and discuss the advantages and the mass media and write them down disadvantages of the mass media and write them in the columns.It can be boring .

This is effects on children as contains as sex or our to and impossible for other it radio or TV. The news which is broadcast live prolonged damages due .It may bring bad we need. .It’s a rich source of -It makes us confused information. radio keeps us updated with the latest hourly help us understand current events around Introduces peer correction if time information.It’s a great tool of violence.The pictures are not them along exciting as other kinds of media newspaper costs only information until the approximately VND bring -very mobile. We can -It play games and listen health to music online. such types of media like “unhealthy” websites .We can moving so it is as not anywhere The Internet: advantages disadvantages .It is a very good way inappropriate use 92 . A -It’s less updated than daily other kinds. No more 2000 next edition.English 10 It is Vietnamese School year: 2011 . to study 3. convenience and stress Asks Ss to write a paragraph about relief are three major advantages that radio the advantages and disadvantages of brings us. Task 3: Ss work individually Suggested writing: Post-reading (13 mn) Updated information. entertainment.2012 cheap. get all the information . the mass media discussed in Task 2 allowed Pick up some writings to correct in Firstly. We can when there is too access to Internet and much information.

2012 the world.Prepare for the next lesson: LANGUAGE FOCUS Assigns homework. . Radio has a lot of advantages that makes our life easier and more enjoyable.Complete the writing. Unlike other type of mass media. radio help us to release the stress that we suffer from work and study. HOMEWORK: . Comments (2 mn) V.LANGUAGE FOCUS Teaching date Absentees 93 . radio is easy to use. In conclusion.Language skills: _ Distinguishing the sounds E. Music and entertainment programs on the radio are effective ways to make us feel happy and refreshed after a hard working day. OBJECTIVES: 1. EXPERIENCE: UNIT 7 THE MASS MEDIA Period: 42 Class 10A 2 I. We can listen to the radio almost anywhere with little cost and great convenience. Secondly.English 10 front of the clsass Give suggested writing School year: 2011 . Lastly.

Whole class listen to the tape. Work in pairs. METHOD: Integrated. . . .2012 _ pronounce the sounds /ei/.(5’) • GAME: CATEGORISING . 1. mainly communicative III. 2. two weeks. This is very short. Pronunciation: (10 mn) . this is very short eeeI. .Calls some Ss to repeat the sounds clearly in front of the class. .Goes around the class and provides help. First practice the sound o. This is very short.Asks Ss to work in pairs and practice the sentences. This is a long sound and then add I. - Whole class listen to the teacher and write down. . Others listen to.Instructs the way to pronounce: • /ei/ has two sounds: e and I. Then add I. . Then add I.Language knowledge: By the end of the lesson. /ai/ and / i / correctly _ use the present perfect correctly and use because of and in spite of appropriately II. Warm –up . .demonstrates the sound /ei/ /ai/ and /oi/ by pronouncing them clearly and slowly. First practice the sound a. First make the sound e. aaaI. Now make it longer eee. • /oi/ has two sounds: o and I.Gives some words: • 1990.Helps Ss to distinguish these two sounds.…. cassette IV.Asks Ss to work in pairs or groups and decide which words go with since or for. Ss will be able to: School year: 2011 . 94 . Ss listen and repeat . . • /ai/ has two sounds: a and I.English 10 2.PROCEDURE: Teacher’s activities Students’ activities Work in groups. Now make it longer ooo.Plays the tape and asks Ss to repeat.TEACHING AIDS: textbooks. oooI.Some Ss repeat the sounds. three months.Gives out 10 to 15 words.

for + a period (present perfect) .Asks Ss to present the form and the use of the present perfect tense.g: 1.Take notes. . . we kept the fire all day. since 5. .Whole class listen to the teacher and write down. since 6. In spite of his illness. • In spite of or Despite shows the confession. Exercise 2: .have met 4.a period + ago ( simple past) . . Since 10.Because of the cold weather .Asks Ss to do the exercise 1 independently.Some Ss present the form and the use of the present perfect tense.since + definite time/ simple past Asks Ss to do the exercise 2 in pairs. . ago 7.Work in pairs in orally. Suggested answers: 1.Asks Ss to make some examples basing 95 .have taken 7. we kept the fire all day. Complete the sentences using for. Grammar and vocabulary: (28mn) . he managed to Reminds Ss how to use: .Some Ss read and explain. 2. ( This is probably an easy exercise so Ss can do it orally) Calls some Ss to read and explain their answers in front of the class. Others listen to. School year: 2011 . for 9. • Because of or because shows the cause.English 10 2.have been 2.Work individually.Has Ss compare their answers with a friend. for 2.Explains the use and the difference of because of and in spite of. . ago 4. Others listen to.have done 5. . Others listen to.Calls some Ss to read the letter in front of the class.have had 6.Individual work. ago 3. for 8. since or ago Suggested answers: 1. Because the weather was cold. .2012 Exercise 1: .have watched .Some Ss read the letter. since Exercise 3: Listen and take notes * Because +S+V * Because of +v-ing / noun * Despite + v-ing/ noun * In spite of + v-ing/ noun E.has lived 3. .Gives Ss the structures: . . Review the form and the use of the present perfect tense.

Because of the meat shortage. everyone was living on beans.Calls on some Ss to read their answers aloud in front of the class. . . the council demolished it.2012 come to school. 3. we have managed to get some beef.Do more exercises in your text books .Redo exercise 3 . EXPERIENCE: 96 .English 10 the teacher’s suggestion . Because of the large crowd. In spite of the meat shortage. he had to cancel the appointment.Some read the answers.Individual work.Because of his illness. Others listen to. there were enough seats for everyone 4. Give correct answers.Has Ss do exercise 3. In spite of the large crowd. . Because of the bad condition of the house. .Prepare for the next lesson: Unit 8 READING V. they enjoyed living there. . we kept the fire burning all day In spite of the cold weather. School year: 2011 . Correct answers: 1. 5. we all wore shorts 2. .Review some tenses Consolidation (2mn) Reminds Ss about the main points Assigns homework HOMEWORK: .Compare the answers with a friend.Asks Ss to compare the answers and discuss them with a friend. In spite of the bad condition of the house.Because of the cold weather. we couldn’t see what was going on.

Knowledge General knowledge: Students learn about life in the country Language New words: Words related to country life 2.) T declares the winner Ss work in group of 3 or 4 97 .PROCEDURE Teacher’s Activities Warm-up (4 mn) Teacher shows pictures of the countryside Group work make a list of words related and ask Ss to make a list of words related to to the country the country.English 10 School year: 2011 .2012 UNIT 8: THE STORY OF MY VILLAGE Period: 43 Class 10A 2 I.Reading: Teaching date Absentees III.Skills: Reading for gist and for specific information II. TEACHING AIDS: Textbook and pictures Student’s Activities IV. METHOD: Integrated. mainly communicative A. OBJECTIVES 1. (The group with the longest list will be the winner.

people work hard. Asks Ss to match the words in A with Task1. Some simpler questions can be used: What do you see in the picture? Who are they? What are they doing? Presents new words 2.The farmers are harvesting the crop. front of the class.e( good crops) Match the words in A with their definitions in B.d( having to have many things that you do not have ) 3. Ss follow the teacher’s steps Ss take notes New words: -straw (n) rôm -mud(n) buøn -technical high school (n) tröôøng trung hoïc kó thuaät daïy ngheà .English 10 School year: 2011 .Vocabulary matching their definitions in B. Teacher has students sit in pairs and discuss Ss work in pairs the questions in the books. the following tasks. modern technology used. Makes necessary corrections 2. offers ideas and comments when Correct answers: students need help. Just read it and do Class organization: Students sit in pairs.a ( making one’s life better ) 4. 98 .2012 BEFORE YOU READ (10’) Students do the task. 4. Feedbacks and gives suggested answers. Encourages Ss to guess the meanings of the words in the context Teacher walks around the class and Students do the task in pairs.farming method (n) phöông phaùp canh taùc .thanks to ( prep) nhôø coù WHILE YOU READ: (20 mn) Set the scene You are going to read a passage about life Listen changes in the country . 3. Good farming methods.brick house (n) nhaø ngoùi .It’s a bumper/good crop.They are working very hard. Then teacher selects 1. good varieties. Suggested answers Calls some Ss to read their answer aloud in 1.b ( have just enough money to pay the some students at random to explain their things that you need) answers in front of the class.

Gives feedback.English 10 School year: 2011 . Checks the answers in front of the class as a whole. Calls some Ss to read their answers aloud in Correct answers: front of the class. not for use by the Teacher has students scan the text again and people who grow it ) get the information to complete the table.Table completion the text again and get the information to complete the table. Tells Ss to discuss the answer with a friend. necessary. Get the Ss to read Read the passage again and answer the the passage again and answer the questions questions in Task3 in Task3 Work in pairs then compare their answer Has Sts compare their answer with another with another pair. Correct answers: Areas houses Before Now Made of Made straw bricks and mud Few Many have families Farming methods crops travel had old poor new Good/bumper By motorbike of Lets Ss study the table carefully before doing scan Goes around the class and provide help when Individual work Task3-Answering questions Asks Ss to work in pairs. They also helped grow cash crops for export. 99 . 2 Because they hope that with an education of science and technology their children could find a way of bettering their lives. Radio/TV Task2. pair.2012 5. c ( crops to be sold . 1 It was poor and simple. 3 They introduced new farming methods which resulted in bumper crops. the task.

access to ways of entertainment awareness about food safety and environmental hygiene People with education refers to people with a Help Tells Ss to look back at the passage to get the Help community especially young people Goes to groups and provide help when Raise people’s V. local people apply modern technology in farming. necessary.2012 4 He said their lives had changed a lot thanks to the knowledge their children had brought home. Teacher suggests students’ homework: homework: Prepare the speakingComments (2 mn) U8 Introduce new farming methods. 5 He told his grandchildren ”Study harder so that you can do more for the village than your parents did. Students work in pairs.SPEAKING : Teaching date Absentees 100 . Post-reading (12 mn) Asks Ss to work in pairs and discuss the question: How can people with an education help Suggested answers make the life of their community better? Clarify some terms like university study idea for the questions. Teacher gives suggestions and comments. Grow crash crop s for export.English 10 School year: 2011 .OBJECTIVES B . Experience: UNIT 8: THE STORY OF MY VILLAGE Period: 44 Class 10A 2 I.

Students can talk about plans and results. Teaching aids: Textbook. Warm-up( 5 mins) Asks Ss to work in groups and make a list of ideas of their own that can be carried out to improve the village life.Discussing plans to improve life in the village.Listens and gives remarks and marks. + resurface (v ):put new surface on.Listen to the teacher. 2. General knowledge: . mainly communicative III.2012 1. . The village of Ha Xuyen are discussing plans to improve life in the village. Education aims: ."Should" and conditional sentences type 1 .Vocabulary on the plan to improve life of a village. b.Speaking about plan and results. 2. II.Listen to the teacher. Procedure: Teacher’s activities 1. METHOD: Integrated.Listen and take notes. Language: . IV.Students know about plan to improve life of a village and their possible results. Teacher walks around the class and offers ideas and comments when students need help… . . Skills: . 3. Students’ activities 101 . Match the plans with possible results. renew + Task 1: . board.Explains some new words: . .English 10 School year: 2011 .( 10 minutes) . chalk.Students work in pairs. Before you speak: (10 mins) Aims: Sts can match each of the plan to improve life in the village with its possible result. Knowledge: a.

Listen and take notes.Gives the correct answers. While you speak: ( 10 mins) improve the life in the village and the possible results.Asks sts to practise the conversation in the . . money . . 2.Work in pairs. g. cars and lorries can get to our village.2012 + widen (v ) + canal (n): man-made waterway for . 4.medical center . e + Task 2: + muddy(a ): full of mud . The villagers are discussing their plans. Should or shouldn’t: to give opinions about what is the best thing to do. and should: textbook. f 3. conversation in front of the class. S + ( to talk about something that will or is likely to happen in the future) E.Read the answers aloud in front of the class.Asks sts to do the task in pairs and give irrigation explanation for their answers of the class.Asks some groups to practice the will/can/may + V . Asks sts to work in groups using conditional . b 102 .Some groups practice the conversation + Task 3: . 3. .Asks sts to work in groups and continue . g 5. type 1 and "should". .Asks some sts to read the answers in front . Aims: Sts practice discussing the plans to 1.cash crops health export. c 4. Add some more possible if you like the conversation.Listen to the T If + S + V(present tense). Read and practice the conversation in .English 10 School year: 2011 . in front of the class.Read the conversation in the textbook. d 6. .Work in groups of three.: If the roads are widened.Explains Conditional sentence type 1 groups of three. using the ideas in table in Task 1. After you speak: ( 14 mins) Continue the conversation.

A: I think we should build a football ground.bridge . If a football ground is built.football ground exchange ideas. 5. B: Yes. People’s health will be looked after better. we won’t have to go to the provincial hospital for treatment. . And if we get sick. corrections. HOMEWORK: Comments and gives necessary Write a passage about plans to improve the life in the area where you live. B: I agree with you. sts to look at these phrases to practice their town School year: 2011 . C: Yes. Sts class.2012 . young people can play sports in the free time. A: What about a medical centre? I think it’s necessary to build a medical centre. EXPERIENCE: 103 .Some groups present in front of the shorter way to play sports. Homework: ( 1 min) Write a passage about plans to improve the life in the area where you live. C: A football ground is also a place where people can meet and exchange ideas. . may add their own ideas in the conversation.English 10 . .Writes the main phrases on board and ask conversation.Goes around to help sts if necessary. too. V. If a medical center is built.Work in groups and add some their own ideas.

tape IV.Textbook .2012 UNIT 8: THE STORY OF MY VILLAGE Period: 45 Class 10A2 I.The past tense: used to . Skills: . 3. mainly communicative III.Vocabulary on villages. fill in the gaps with one suitable word. METHOD: Integrated.The passive voice . 2. answer the questions . Warm up:(7 min) * GAME: Find someone who Students’ activities Did you use to…? Have a favourite toy name C. Objectives: 1.Sts know the changes in a small town on the South coast of England. Teaching aids: . Procedure: Teacher’s activities 1.English 10 School year: 2011 .Speaking: Discuss the changes in sts' hometown/ home village II.Listening: choose True/ False statements. ListenING: Teaching date Absentees 104 . General knowledge: . Language: .

g. .. While you listen:( 17 mins) Aims:Sts practise listening and marking True/ False statements.. textbook and asks sts to work in groups to Sts copy the words and phrases.Cows used to graze in the field .Listen and repeat.Listen to the T.Reads the words and ask sts to repeat. b....Some individuals read the words aloud.. . Lets Ss go around the class and ask other Ss what they used to do when they were small.... compare them to see the changes of the .Read the words in pairs and correct each other’s mistakes.. Before you listen:(10 mins) Aims:to focus sts on the topic and review/ introduce the words and phrases used in the listening text.... ... . (the winner is the first one who completes the name column) School year: 2011 ..atmosphere (n): kh«ng khÝ . If the answer is Yes....... ..Asks sts to read the words in pairs.resurface(v): tr¶i l¹i ( mÆt ®êng) .Compare their answer..2012 when you were a child? Have a nickname? Have a pet? Cry at night when you were a child? Hate school? Play hide-and-seek? .Work in pairs to guess if the statements are true or false.. .English 10 Prepares a two-column table with Yes/ No questions and Name. E.... write his/her name in the table. . Introduces some new words .There used to be small houses . 105 ..Asks some sts to give their answer. 2.turn into (v): trë thµnh + Task 1: ..Some sts stand up and give their answer... town following the model in the book.. .Listen to the tape and do the task 3...There didn't use to be any hotel in the town .... a.Asks some sts to read the words again.Work in groups to ask and compare the two pictures. ..: . Focus sts on the two pictures in the .

Check their answer and then correct their work if they have the wrong answer. car encourages sts guess the words to fill in 7.Plays the tape once again.Asks sts to have a look at the paragraph 1. right column to indicate their answer and 2. department the gaps. . .Tells sts that they are going to listen to a talk about the changes in a small town in England. . .Give their answer.Listen and do the task.2012 . look at the statements given and guess if they are true or false. T plays 3. + Task 2: .Check their answer and then correct their 106 . pairs. T the tape twice. .English 10 . underline the false information. F It's used to be a small quiet town. Aims:Sts practise listening for specific information by filling in the gaps with ONE word.Work in pairs to read the passages and try to fill in the gaps. F Some people don't like the changes . stop the tape where necessary and conduct the .Asks sts to listen to the tape once or .Asks sts to listen to the talk and tick the 1. 4.Asks sts to work in pairs. F It's on the south coast of England. School year: 2011 . F The big trees have been cut down.Checks sts’ answer. .Give their answer. T 5. cut 6. shop 8. . expensive . 2. correction. widened and make sure they understand them. houses in the textbook and to read them in pairs 3.Asks sts to compare their answer in 5. hotel 4.

.Plays the tape once again. .English 10 missing words.2012 twice again to fill in the gaps with the work if they have the wrong answer.Checks and gives remarks. -Two sts present.Moves round to check the activities and to make sure that sts are working effectively. stop the tape where necessary and conduct the correction. EXPERIENCE: UNIT 8: THE STORY OF MY VILLAGE 107 .Asks sts to work in pairs and tell each other about the changes in their village/ town. 4.Asks sts to compare their answer in pairs.Work in pairs.Asks two sts to present in front of the whole class. 5. . After you listen:(10 mins) . .Checks sts’ answer. School year: 2011 . . Homework:(1min) Write a short paragraph about the changes in their village/town V. . .

English 10
Period: 46 Class 10A 2 I. Objectives: D. writING : Teaching date

School year: 2011 - 2012
Absentees

1. Education Aims: - Students can write a letter giving directions to a certain place. 2. Knowledge: a. General knowledge: - Giving directions. b. Language: - Language used to give directions. - Imperative sentences. 3. Skills: - Reading: read the sample letter. - Speaking: work in pairs to find Ann's house on the map as well as the words and phrases used to give directions . - Writing: write a letter to tell Jim the way to house A on the map. II. METHOD: Integrated, mainly communicative III. Teaching Aids: - board, textbook, chalk. IV. Procedures: Teacher's activities 1. Homework checking :( 5 mins) - Asks one st to talk about the changes in our hometown or his/her home village. - Asks other sts to listen to their friend and give remarks. - Checks and give remarks. 2. Before you write:( 20 mins) - Aims:to get sts to read the sample letter and to help them to prepare vocabulary and information before they write. - Introduces the situation. - Explains some new words: - Asks sts to listen to the teacher and repeat , then write these words into their notebooks. + Task 1: - Listen to the teacher carefully. and take notes + direction (n) : the way that a person - Listen to their friend and give remarks. Students' activities

108

English 10

School year: 2011 - 2012
or thing moves along + enclose (v): put something in a letter or a parcel - Listen to the teacher and then read these words in chorus and individually. - Read the letter in pairs.

- Asks sts to work in pairs to read about the letter and to look at the map to find Ann's house. - Moves round to help if necessary. - Asks sts to compare their ideas with other pairs. - Asks some sts to tell the whole class where Ann's house is. T may ask them to explain more - Listen to the teacher. about their answer. - Listens and give remarks. - Asks sts to work in pairs to read the letter again and underline the words and phrases used to give directions. - Moves round to help if necessary. board. - Checks and gives remarks. - Asks sts to make some examples with these words. - Two sts write the words and phrases on the board go over ( a bridge) turn right/left walk past ( a medical centre) keep walking take the first/second..... + Task 2: - Work in pairs to read the letter and undreline the words/phrases. - Present their ideas. Answer: H - Share their answer with their friends.

- Asks 2 sts to write these words/ phrases on the get out of

3. While you write:( 10 mins) - Aims: Sts practise writing a letter to Jim, telling him the way to house A from Roston Railway Station. - Do the writing task. - Read their writing: ( a sample

109

English 10
- Asks sts to write a letter to Jim, telling him the way to house A from Roston Railway Station. - Lets sts write in 8 minutes. - Moves around to conduct the activity. 4. After you write:( 9 mins) Aims: to get feedback and check sts' work. work aloud. - Asks some other sts to give remarks. - Checks and give the correct answer. - If there is enough time, T can have sts exchange their writing among sts within a group so that they can check their friend's work and give remarks 5. Homework: ( 1min) - Write a letter to tell their friends the way from our school to Border Gate. V. EXPERIENCE:

School year: 2011 - 2012
paragraph) "Dear Jim, I'm very glad that you will come here for the summer holiday ............. from Roston Raiway Station. Now when you come out of the station, turn right. Keep walking for about 5 minutes, you will see a small bridge the street, walk past a medical centre and the car park then take the second turning on the left. Walk past the Souvenir shop and you will see my house. It's on the right, next to the shop.............. "

- Gets feedback by asking some sts to read their ahead. Go over the bridge, go along

UNIT 8: THE STORY OF MY VILLAGE Period: 47 Class 10A 2 I. Objectives: 1. Education Aims: - Students know how to pronounce the sound /aʊ/ and /əʊ/ correctly. - Students revise reported speech and conditional sentence type 1. 2. Knowledge: E. Language focus: Teaching date Absentees

110

English 10
+ Language: - Pronunciation: /aʊ/ and/əʊ/ . - Reported speech . - Conditional sentence type 1.

School year: 2011 - 2012

3. Skills: + Speaking: - Work in pairs to discuss the exercises. + Reading: - Read words and sentences aloud. - Read the sentences silently to do the exercises. II. METHOD: Integrated, mainly communicative III. Teaching aids: board, chalk, textbook, cassette player. IV. Procedures: Teacher's activities 1. Homework checking: ( 5mins) our school to Border Gate. - Asks another st to give remarks. - Checks and give a mark. 2. Pronunciation:( 10 mins) - Aims: to introduce three sounds /aʊ/ and /əʊ/ and help sts to practise these sounds. a. Writes two sounds on the board and pronounce them clearly twice, then ask sts to repeat. - Tells sts how to pronounce these sounds accurately. - Asks them to look at the textbook, listen and repeat. - Then asks sts to work in pairs to read the words again so that they can check for each other. - Moves around to help . - Asks two sts to read again and give remarks. b. Asks sts to look at sentences in page 89 in the book. - Asks them to work in pairs to read the sentences - Write down two sounds. - Listen to the teacher and repeat. - Look at the book , listen and repeat. /aʊ/ cow town how /əʊ/ coat phone bone ........................... - Read these words in pairs and check for their partners. Students' activities

- Asks one st to tell the whole class the way from - One st speaks aloud in front of the whole class. - Give remarks. - Listen to the teacher.

111

eg: "I worked late yesterday.2012 . 1.Read the example and think about the changes. Grammar: ( 29 mins) Aims: to revise the reported speech and conditional sentence type 1 and have sts do Ex1.Asks sts to complete the table below: Direct speech Reported speech do (1) will do (2) (3) might me/you (4) last night (5) (6) there .Asks sts to work in pairs and complete the table and then ask some sts to report and give remarks... .Makes clear the difference between say...Asks one st to report and other sts to give remarks.. No quotation marks are used and some parts of speech have to be changed...Look at the book and work in pairs..Asks them to work in 2 minutes.Asks sts to read the example and think about the changes when we turn a sentence into reported speech. ..Checks and give the correct answers.Moves around to conduct the activity..Work in pairs to complete the table.Read the examples. Susan said she had worked late .. EX3and EX4.. ....English 10 and then find out the words containing sound /aʊ/ and sound /əʊ/ . /əʊ/ rose snow over ... may/ might 112 ...Some sts report.Listens and give remarks. a.." said Susan.. EX 2..Copy down the example. the previous day.. . would do . 3. . did 2. .. ... .Gives an example: .. School year: 2011 . . . .Answers: /aʊ/ shout loudly ours .. .. . Reported speech: Statements . tell and 3.Asks some sts to read these sentences aloud.Listen to the teacher..Recalls the use of reported speech: to report what someone has said.

I won't go there. him/her 5.clause S + V( P.Asks sts to look at Ex1 and to do the task. children had . An old farmer said their lives had changed a lot. I will . the night before 6.F) + Use: something that may happen at present or in the future.Reviews the form and the use of conditional sentence type 1 by giving some examples: .Asks some sts to give examples.Do the task individually and then share their ideas with their friends.Asks sts to read the examples and point out the form as well as the use of conditional sentence type 1.Listen and give remarks...Read the examples and point out the form and the use of conditional sentence type 1: eg: If I have enough money. + Exercise 1: .Asks sts to do the exercise individually and then . Say + clause Tell + O + clause Talk (to sb) about sth . (something that will certainly happen in the future).Listen and copy down. + Form: If. School year: 2011 . S + V( S.Checks the exercise sentence by sentence. Conditional sentence type 1: . .2012 4. go to Hue for holiday.When-clause: . If it rains. Eg: When summer comes.English 10 talk: b.Distinguish when-clause and if-clause: . compare their answers in pairs. he will go to Hue for holiday.Listen to their friends and their teacher.. here .S) . . brought home 2.. . .Asks sts to compare this example with the first example. She said she was going to Ho 113 .Moves round to conduct the activity. . EX 1: 1. main clause .

..... . .told 4. I'll go to medical college.and unit 8. V. 5.. talked 3... said 5. .... I'll study medicine.. .. told 2..Moves round to help if necessary. .... EXPERIENCE: TEST YOURSELF C Class 10A 2 I. Objectives: 1...Asks one st to give remarks....Listens and give remarks.Listen and correct their work if necessary. I will pass my exam.Goes round to conduct the activity.Checks and give remarks... If I do more homework.Ex 4 ( page 90..Language: pronunciation and grammar in the above units... . ... Knowledge: ..... I thought the film would be interesting....Asks sts to read the requirement of Ex3 and then do the task in pairs.. EX 2: 1.Do the Ex individually.English 10 + Exercise 2: .Read the requirement carefully..Asks sts to do Ex 2 individually and then share the answers with their friends...Do Ex 3. .sts' book) School year: 2011 . . . 3. If I pass my exam.. Teaching date Absentees 114 . .. Homework ( 1 min) . If I go to medical colege.Asks two sts to do this exercise on the board. Aims: . said .Asks some pairs to read sentence by sentence.Sts revise what they have learned in unit 7.. .... . + Exercise 3: . .Listen to the teacher.... 2.General knowledge in unit 7 and unit 8.2012 Chi Minh City soon.

.Give remarks and marks. . if 4. Students' activities .Listen carefully and complete the paragraph. speaking and writing. .Introduce new words: + queue (v) : xÕp hµng + traffic (n) : cars.Play the tape twice and ask sts to do the task. . Procedures: Teacher's activities 1.Ask 2 sts to write their answers on the .Listen and read after the teacher. . . If when . heavy traffic . T 115 ..2012 II. . .One st gives remarks. School year: 2011 .Ask sts to share their ideas with their partners.Try to focus on the important words.Play the tape again .F 5.Read the paragraph. part III: 10 minutes. If 5. .Look at the textbook and read the statements. traffic lights. EX 4: 1. .F 3. cassette player.Get feedback and play the tape again so that 1. 2. .Copy down these words into their notebooks. . Teaching aids: textbook.Ask sts to do listening in class. 2.English 10 3. part IV: 15 minutes. T 4.Listen carefully and do the task. sts can check their answers.. board.Ask one st to do Ex 4 in the workbook on the board. . When 3. . . . The new lesson:( 39 minutes) .Work in pairs to discuss their answers.. Homework checking:( 5 mins) . motorbikes.Ask sts to read the requirement of the task. III. part III and part IV at home in advance to save time.Ask sts to do part II. Skills: listening. F 2. .Ask sts to read the paragraph in part B and try to guess what will be filled in each blank.1.Give sts the time duration for each part : part II: 10 minutes.Ask one st to give remarks. 2. chalk. Listening: .

..... walk along this street in about 10 minutes... political discussions and the latest exciting football matches... evening 3.Some sts stand up to report.. because people can sit comfortable at home... told. aren't 4.. .. . . . haven't given . . .. ¤n thi häc kú I m«n TiÕNG ANH (2010-2011) UNIT 1: A DAY IN THE LIFE OF… A...Part D ( Page 52 .English 10 board.. Turn left to Redham .... cinemas 5..work in groups to share their ideas.." .Ask some sts to read their writing aloud. . The Indian Restaurant is the pink building on the left after the Beach 3.Ask some sts to give remarks...Discuss in groups. Writing: . haven't had 2. knows .. Road.. Reading: . 5. EXPERIENCE: Parade....PRONUNCIATION: /i/ and /I:/ 116 . 1.. Go straight ahead until you see the traffic lights...Check and give the correct answers.. theatres 2.. People can see films.. School year: 2011 . turn right. plays of every kind.4.. It is very easy to find.. have got . said 4. thought ... Grammar: .Ask two other sts to give remarks. THEORY I. 2. they don't have to pay for expensive seats at the theatres or in the cinemas..2012 1.2.3. Homework: ( 1 min) .Read their writing aloud " When you come out of the bus station. 2... have been.. 2.Ask sts to work in groups to compare their answers........Ask some sts to report his/ her answers aloud. ...... 2.Check and give feedback..Answers: 1...Ask 2 sts to write their answers on the board.Ask other sts to give remarks..... would come 6. had taken ..Listen to the teacher's remarks..... have paid 3.Ask sts to discuss their answers in groups...workbook) V. . ..Listen and check.

. often. Signal words: Yesterday.Yes/no question: Were/ Was + S ? Did + S + V? Ex: Were you at the party last Sunday evening? Did she go to the party yesterday? b. Ex: He often gets up at 7a.2012 1. rarely. never + Position :(Vò trí ) .Yes/no question: Is/ am / are + S? Do/Does + S + V? 2. .Ñöùng giöõa trôï ñoäng töø vaø ñoäng töø.Negative: S + isn’t/ aren’t/ am not S + don’t/ doesn’t +V . The simple past (Thì quaù khöù ñôn): a. Form .Negative: S+ weren't/wasn't S+ didn’t +V Ex: Mai wasn't in her room at 9. Adverbs of frequency (Traïng ngöõ chæ taàn soá) Always.00 pm yesterday.“ Usually” va “sometimes coù theå ñöùng ñaàu caâu hoaëc cuoái caâu Ex: Sometimes I go to the cinema 117 .Affirmative: S + were / was S+V2/Ved Ex: We were at home last night. ago. seldom.Ñöùng sau ñoäng từ To Be. Ex: He is always free on Sunday. Form: .The simple present ( Thì hieän taïi ñôn) a. usually. She went to the party yesterday . last month.m in the morning.Ñöùng tröôùc ñoäng töø thöôøng. . She didn’t go to the party yesterday . last week. Ex: He doesn’t often read newspaper after dinner.English 10 School year: 2011 . last year 2. sometimes.Affirmative: S + is / am / are S+ V (s/es) .

VOCABULARY 1.dalayed d.have come d.associates c.WRITNG: Write a narrative within 100-120 words using suggested cues and a frame.SPEAKING: talk about one’s daily activities IV. offices d.continued c.to be submitted nextweek so we all feel worried a.land 8. a.repeat d. II. they went on working a.left b.During his break.history c.cheese b..fit 3/ a.was leaving c.banks 3.Water and oil…….decorations d.here only threed ays ago a.keen on d.wastes 7. a.appearance b.interested in b.seats c.heat b.I made some good purchases of clothes when I was in town a.click d. I was late for school this morning because my alarm clock didn’t …….He always get up c.please b. go off c.the report a.dog d.Linh always has a very busy timetable for the whole week a.go up 2.read c.go away d.kitchen b.completed 6.schedule 9.came b.Pike is used to drinking tea with his fellow peasants a.farmers 5..Peter does not feel satisfied his new job……… about it 118 . We are contented with what we do a. of the Red River a.eaten c.After a short break for tea.plough c.school a.had come c.had left d. Mr.mechanics d.began b.sit d.pea c.meeting.to complete c.satisfied 4.completing d.routine c. shops b.though c..Always he gets up late b.excited about c. I was born and grew up on the ……. on Sundays a. B.hoped 10.life b.was left 5. restaurants c. go on b.heat 5/ a.The homework is ……. do not mix does not mix has not mixed is not mix 2…….It takes me about three hours …….holiday d. car b. PRONUNCIATION: Choose the word which has the underlined part pronounced differently from the rest 1/ a.made d.interest 4/ a.We use a…….due b.Did you say that you ……. PRACTISES I.come 4.little b.workers b.Does he get up always late d..He gets always up 3.English 10 School year: 2011 .GRAMMAR: EXERCISE1:Choose the best answer 1.finish 2/ a. to break up the earth and plant the seeds a.time d..2012 Ex: I go to the cinema sometimes III.hit d.buys c.complete b.I haven’t met him since he…….harrowed III.

We never have holidays and we don’t watch TV. Iam a postman.was buying/fed 8. I’m 60 years old and I have thirteen jobs.takes b.his hotel 119 .took c.Kerry…….Alice…….He ……. a taxidriver.We …….He has always complained b. Only 20 people live there but in summer 150 tourists come by boat everyday.. our life isn’t very exciting but we like it.English 10 School year: 2011 . At 10 p.had bought/fed b.played/played b.m we have a glass of wine and then we go to bed.It …….m I drive the island’s children to school.Scientists …….rung EXERCISE2: Complete the sentences. football in the field every evening but yesterday they…….m I collect the post from the boat and deliver it to all the houses on the islands. twentycalves lastweek. Mr.He has complained always 6.. have a shop and a small hotel. Also.READING Read the passage below and choose one correct anser for each question My name is Seumas Mc Sporran and I’m a very busy man. I also deliver the beer to the island’s only pub. and an undertaker. Margaret. me fifteen minutes to get to school every morning a.too.Perhaps. Couldn’t you come an hour later? (usually/get up) 3. At 9 a. hard on the violine lastweek a. apolitician.practised c. an accountant. Put the verb into the correct form 1.The boys……. Trees ……. a boatman. Every weekday I get up at 6a.at six o’clock every morning and I jump out of bed to get ready for school a.2012 a.has taken had taken 7. At 8a.play/play d.an ambulance man.played/play c. a barman.a firefighter b.. basketball instead a.is ringing c.a farmer d.a driver c.Always he has complained d. apetrol attendant. now he them up to sell a. Then I help Margaret in the shop.Mcsporran does all the following jobs EXCEPT a.buys/feeds c.He always has complained c.rang d. In the eveningsMargaret makes super and I do the accounts. 1.Gigha is the name of a. My wife likes being busy.m and make breakfast for the hotel guests. at about 7:00.is practising 9. In 1788 he …… his last great work in Vienna (write) 4.a mailman 2. I and my wife.rings b.play/played 10.has practised d.My alarm clock ……. I live and work on the island of Gigha in the west of Scotland. a fireman.bought/is feeding d.practisesb.her mother in London most weekends (see) 5.his wife b. more quickly in summer than in winter (grow) 2. a school bus driver.some fundamental discoveries in the 18th century III.

I watch TV a lot 5. WRITING 1.He does the accounts in the evening d. a.Oh. a.drive 4.sail b. I often do c.Tourists……. I’m a real cough potato b.Very often 3.Everyday from 5 to 6 b. are/they/happy. I do c.About three times a week d.Yeah.good for you V. is/although/farming/hardwork/a/. a.2012 c. 1.salary/his/isn’t/contened/John/with/present → 3.I always go to the YWCA c. 2. → 2.Are you c. so/hurry/we/up/should → UNIT 2: SCHOOL TALKS 120 .beer b. A: Do you get much exercise? B: (2)…………………………….money/little/although/they/have/.He goes to bed very late IV. SPEAKING Choose the sentence or phrase that best completes the dialogue A: What do you usually do on your days off? B: (1)…………………………….I usually go by motorbike 6.a. I never do c.No.He and his wife go on holiday every year c. enjoy/life/country/I → 5. A: You’re really in good shape.The word “it” in paragraph 3 refer to a.the shop where they work d. I usually go swimming and play badminton b.I go straight home after work d.boat d.Sporran a.He likes the job as a postman b.Yes. to the island a.swim d. A: Where do you go swimming? B: (4)………………………….Yes.fly c.No.No..I usually do not much d.Often I don’t do 4.10 o’clock/due to/ plane/at/ the/ is/ leave/.How about you d.I usually drive to work b.I usually do b.the island where they live 3. a.a.pub 5.According to the pasage which is true about Seumas Mc.household/every/nowadays/has/computer/a/almost → 4.post c.I will sleep all day c. I play tennis d. I sometimes do b.Nothing much I always sleep until noon.Thanks a lot d..English 10 School year: 2011 . A: How often do you get exercise? B: (3)…………………………….

profession d. To-infinitive to decide to want to plan to expect to fail to hope to agree to tend tomanage to refuse Ex: I hope to see you soon.mark b. a lot of subjects this semester a.THEORY I.doing d.What is your job? a.a.funny II.marvellous b.It’s good to …….card c.getting b.warm 5.a.study b.WRITING: Fill completely some common forms B..come up d.target 3.student b.all are correct 3. PRACTICES I. of.He’s …….GRAMMAR 1. to.SPEAKING: Start.subject d.a. Anyone who wants to apply for the job have to …… this form a.take c.father c.VOCABULARY 1.a.a.catch b.climb 4.much b.wonderful d. off.fill in 121 .English 10 School year: 2011 .occupation b. continue and close a conversation IV. in.month d. from.take in c.Wh-questions * Form • Wh-word + be +S + C (complement)? Ex: What are you interested in? •Wh-word + do/does/did + S +V ? Ex: Where do you live? 2.setting 2.) Ex: I’m interested in teaching children b.guitar c. a.lunch c.2012 A. Gerund (Danh doäng töø) and To-Infinitive (Ñoäng töø nguyeân maãu) a.PRONUNCIATION: /^ / and /a:/ II.career c.taking c.hard d. up early for school.take up b.garden 4.get d.love 2. for.Gerund: + Theo sau moät soá ñoäng töø) to like to love to keep to miss to avoid to suggest to enjoy tofinish to consider to risk to understand to continue Ex: I finish reading th book and went to bed + Theo sau moät soá cuïm töø(common expression) don’t mind It’s no good Can’t stand can’t help (khoâng theå khoâng) Ex: I don’t mind helping you washing-up if you are tired.study c. III. + Preposition (giới từ: on. PRONUNCIATION: Choose the word which has the underlined part pronounced differently from the rest 1.subject d.

helped d. in outdoor activities a.making b.objectiveb.catch up with d.putting b.2012 5.how often 4.English 10 School year: 2011 . You will find it very exciting a.be bored up with c.Sometimes. a.what time d. do you take a holiday? a.My glasses are in my book.He began to studying English three years ago A B C D 3.spending 5.I enjoy to talk with my classmates about their future plans A B C D 2.to be taught c.to take d. for a walk a.middle name 6. because she loves working with children a.He insisted in ……. to the party a.to help 8. …….gone 9. a.note c.She is interested in teaching ……. you to do the washing-up a.firstname c.surname b.given name d..to teach b..what time d.advantage 7. it’s difficult to avoid to drink when we enjoy an informal party A B C D 4. but I don’t remember …….work d.Could you please stop ……. them there a.to make 7.In 1945 a.how long 6.to have b.purpose 9.teaching d.learnt c.schools b.having done 3.to put c.… his classmate a.learing d. lose sight of 10.doing d. because she loves working with children a.put up with b.to go c.part b.Dad allowed Done …….The …… is the family name a.subject d.put d.teach 2.classes c.when b.go d..subjects 8.profession III.semester b. English.how longc.She was disappointed to fail in two of her four …….Ms Lan enjoys …….I put EXERCISE 2 1. so much noise? a.Alma doesn’t like cities and want to live somewhere quiet A B C D 122 . …… did the Second World War end?.I don’t mind …….He misssed the last semester because of his serious illness.We hope the students themseves will enjoy taking …….helping c. so we decided …….learn 10.You should try …….notice d.to learn b.lessons d.to go c.taking d.help b.It was a nice day.requirement c. the job himself a.GRAMMAR * EXERCISE 1: Choose the best answer 1.to do b.when c.Mathematics is my favourite …….going b.doing c. Now he has to work hard to ….communication c.do c.where b.

About one kilometre c.Spain and Turkey b. they argue that most teachers do not properly plan the homework tasks they give to pupils .What’s your new address? a.In all schools in Britain children can do their homework at school and help one another IV.Go straight on c. many parents would like their children to a.The word “repeat” in paragraph 1 means a. Kowloon 2. parents wanted to stop homework d.do again b.In Greek.Thirty five minutes 123 .How far is it from here? a.Germany and Brutain d.Denmark and Holland c. SPEAKING: Put a circle round the letter of the best reply to each question 1.English 10 School year: 2011 .In Denmark.2012 5. it isn’t c. Spain and Turkey are two countries which stopped homework recently.Flat 42B.Germany and Denmark 4.Greece b.Greek parents thought their children’s homework was not easy c. teachers allow students to stay at school to do their homework. Germany and several countries in Europe.Germany 3. Moreover. many parents complained about the difficult homework which teachers gave to their children.225 Nathan Road.In which of the following countries children don’t have homework now? a.reuse d. a lot of homework has not been planned properly b. The result is that pupils have to repeat tasks which they have already done at school. In Holland.Holland d.Turkey c.Yes. The parents said that most of the homework was a waste of time.It’s a long way b.Two kilometres. it’s rather far 3.It’s the old one b.How long does it take to get to Dave’s place from your flat? a.have less homework b. Recently in Greece. READING Many people now think that teachers give pupils too much homework.According to the passage.Do you mind to stay up tonight to help me finish the homework? A B C D IV.No. The children are free to help one another.According may parents.In which countries can’t teacher set homework at weekends? a.do more homework d. They say that it’s unnecessary for children to work at home in their free time.state again c.Have more homework c.remake 5.do their homework at school 2. 1.According to the passage. teachers cannot set homework at weekends. which of the following sentences is NOT TRUE a. at least b.Similar arrangements aslo exist in some British schools. and they wanted to stop it.

.................................................Cross the road and turn left b... 4..... Grammar 1.............................................. .................................................................................................. ..............................The past perfect *Form: ........ she had worked in the central bank for three years................................ the playground/full/big boys/and/some of them/look/like men/to me.......................... 8.................................................... ... ............................. THEORY I........ V............. they hadn’t come to an agreement UNIT 3: PEOPLE’S GROUND 124 .......I/soon/make friends/and/begin/enjoy/some of/lessons.....Afirmative: S + had + V3/Ved rd Ex: By May 3 last year.. ........ ....I/remember/first day/secondary school/well/at/eleven/old ..... 6...............................................Five hundred metres. ........................... I suppose c........It’s five minutes by bus............................................I/miserable .......... ......those/first/days/terrible...I/frighten .When/I/arrived/at the school/..................................................................................But.................................... A.. ....................... 3................... ................. WRITING: Write completed sentences with prompts below 1................... 7................ .I/want/go/home .. ............................................................... Pronunciation: /e/ and / / II.I think I’ll go by bus where’s the nearest bus stop? a........................... ...........................................................................................................................................I/ask/some boys/where to go/but/no one/anwer/me .... 5..........................................When/I/find/classroom/teacher/angry/because/I/late........................... 9.2012 4..Negative: S + hadn’t + V3/Ved Ex: By midnight.... 2................. ..............English 10 School year: 2011 .............................................

.. science/scientist c.bad II.pan d.mature c. the film. liked b.a. receive III.passed d. we could not ……. PRONUNCIATION: Choose the word which has the underlined part pronounced differently from the rest 1. PRACTISES I. She is a ……. Two days ago I (meet) ……. keep in mind b.education c. a. weightlessness 8.. awarded c.a. take up c.happen b. 125 . the book back to the library when I (read) ……… it. received c.career 4. Without the pull of the Earth. before III. determine d. ease d.. in Africa. a. so I (go) ……… straight to bed 2.sand b. determined c. Karen (not want)……. the weight of the chemical element a. delicated d. Family……. weight c. He was a ……. fed d. cost 3. name b.men d. degree 10. is very important for a child to form his personality a.. man who was determined to be rich by any means a. Speaking: Talk about somebody’s background IV. brilliant d. She is interested in ……. specialization d. to come to the cinema with us because she (already/see) …….see) ……. when. he came back to his hometown a. anything a.. for years. 4.. scientist/science b. background c.background d. 3. me while I was speaking a. interrupt c. The purpose of the test is to ……. VOCABULARY : Choose the best answer 1. determine d. ambitious b. I (take) ……. weightless d. won b.English 10 School year: 2011 ..father b.send c..harboured 4. Mary…….tragic b.man c.many c.. work b. romantic 6. She harboured the thought of being a member in the Parliament to struggle for women’s right a. I felt very tired when I got home.devoted 2. Writing: Write about people’s background B. weigh b. scientist/scientific 7. He was impolite to……. Being unfamiliar with the living……. GRAMMAR EXERCISE 1: Put the verbs in the past perfect or past simple 1.example d. the Nobel Prize in chemistry. as soon as.another 3.follow 5.2012 -Yes/no question: Had + S + V3/Ved? Ex: Had it begun to rain before you left the house this morning? *Signal words: by.husband d.family 2.mat b. an old friend who (not. conditions c. mature c. after. took change of 9.a.a. interrupt b. scientific/science d. the dream of becoming an actress as she was a child a.sad 5. Marie Curie was …….a. lifed.

at the hall. would be 2. has taken c. was a courageous and determined woman. had marked d.is c. had come/ went d. lively 4. had marked b. How old was Marie Curie when she won the first Nobel Prize? a.was b. brave d. Pierre and Marie formed the most famous husband-and-wife partnership in science history. had come/ had gone 3. a. was taken d. poor c. prize d. To study d. B: I work in a bank A: (5)………………………………… B: I doesn’t earn much. Living in poverty. 30 years old b. country b.. When I ……. IV. B: In a house near Brighton A: (2)…………………………………… B: For three years A: (3)…………………………………… B: The house we had before was too small. all our books by the time we arrived a. 1867.English 10 School year: 2011 . came/ gone b. resolute b. To find a job b. have marked c.. came/had gone c.Miss Kim ……. were taken 4. READING: Read the passage below and choose one correct answer for each question Marie Curie. They discovered the radioactive elements. my lunch time a. The word “determined” in line 1 means most nearly a. Polonium and Radium. To earn her living c. Kenny…….. rich d. he……. 67 years old 5. found out c. his driving test before he bought a car a.2012 5. What did Marie Curie go to France for? a. After it ……. Just about USD 15. bored b. They were awarded the Nobel prize for Physics in 1903 1. EXERCISE 2: Choose the best answer 1. she still managed to graduate at the top of the class. Polonium is a a. it rained heavily lastnight. 44 years old d. to visit him.. Together. To take up a new hobby 3. 36years old c. science history c. radioactive elements V. being d.When you phoned me. dry for two months. will have marked. were 5. was c. She was born on November 7th. it ……. She left her home for Paris to pursue her interest in science. We need somewhere bigger A: (4)…………………………………. SPEAKING: Choose the sentence or phrase that best completes the dialogue A: (1)……………………………………. By the time we (arrive) ……..000 a year 126 . has been d. half of his speech. the Poloish-born chemist. honest 2. How was Marie Curie when she first lived in Paris? a. She met Pierre Curie shortly after graduation and married him a year later. had been b. had taken b. the lecturer (make) ……. to work a.

now: taxi driver. How much do you earn b. our.Mina. door. walk. long. the rich: ngöôøi giaøu. VI.now: sales representative →Example: Mai Linh was born in Tien Giang. You have lived there for how long? b. How long do you live there? 3. a. more Alk.English 10 1. Where you live? b. wash. 127 . Malaysia .2012 a. a. …………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………… Unit 4: SPECIAL EDUCATION Pronunciation: / / and / / Nhaän daïng: Aâm / / : o + phuï aâm + (phuï aâm) : cost. Do you earn how much money. cloth. got A+ phuï aâm : want.ar : talk. Where are you? b. How about money do you earn? d. a.…. What do you work? b.How long have you lived there? c. …………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………… 2. a. School year: 2011 . small. Where do you live? 2. Kuala Lumper. all.. or.Mailinh. wall. What you do? d. mother: teacher .father: engineer. watch Aâm / /: aw. What your job is? c. Why you moved? c.local school: 12 years . morning. oor : saw. warm. the disabled: ngöôøi taøn taät the young: ngöôøi treû. Can you tell me the reason why did you move? 4. the deaf: ngöôøi ñieác. What’s your address? b. Why did you move? b. Ex: The young has the future in their hand.mother: dressmaker . . How many years have you lived there? d. war. the old: ngöôøi giaø. WRITING: Use the facts from the box to write a short paragraph 1/ . lawn. squash.local schools: 10 years . Why did you moved? d. ward Grammar: 1/ THE + ADJ  NOUN (collective noun: danh töø taäp hôïp ) ñoäng töø ñi sau danh töø taäp hôïp luoân ñöôïc chia ôû soá nhieàu ex: the blind: ngöôøi muø. the poor: ngöôøi ngheøo. What do you do? 5. law. How much do you take? c. all. squat. swarm.college: 4 years . Vietnam . Tien Giang. pawn.

Circle the word that has the underlined sound pronounced differently from the others: 1. duøng ñeå dieãn taû moät thoùi quen trong quaù khöù maø hieän taïi khoâng coøn nöõa Ex: I used to play volley ball ( now I don’t play anymore) Didn’t use to + V laø theå phuû ñònh cuûa used to + V Did + S + use to + V laø daïng caâu hoûi Ex: Our parents didn’t use to use mobile phones as we do now 3/ Ñaïi töø quan heä WHICH: WHICH trong baøi naøy ñöôïc duøng ñeå thay theá cho yù cuûa toøan boä phaàn ñöùng tröôùc noù cuûa caâu vaø giöõa boä phaän caâu tröôùc Which vôùi boä phaän sau Which luoân coù daáu phaåy. that 2. B. Now I don’t go to school on foot as I ___________ a. which b.2012 2/ USED TO + V / DIDN’T USE TO + V Used to + V: ñaõ töøng. a.English 10 School year: 2011 . children 4. the deaf c. did c. a. father 3. come 2. Rewrite the sentences. use USED TO + V or DIDN’T USE TO + V 1. They/ not/ travel by plane 3. Trips/ take much longer 3. a. 128 . five b. how c. Without the Braille Alphabet it would be very difficult for _______ a. a. C or D that best completes each sentence: 1. deaf c. was 3. class d. 2. Name ( ngöôøi vieát) Exercise: 1. a. ________ annoys the teacher. write c. Peolple/ travel on horseback  Peolple used to travel on horseback. teach b. Choose the best answer among A. ( neâu lí do vieát thö baét ñaàu baèng nhöõng töø naøy ) Phaøn naøn chung veà vaán ñeà saép noùi Noäi dung phaøn naøn ( chi tieát) Keát thuùc vôùi gôïi yù giaûi quyeát vaán ñeà Yours faithfully. afternoon c. reason d. the mute d. parent b. used to d. this c. child d. Ex: Neil has passed the examinations. some b. realize 2.. I am writing ti complain about …………. had been b. Which thay cho toøan boä yù Neil ñaõ thi ñoã (Neil has passed the examinations) vaø ñoù laø 1 tin vui. John is always late for class. Women / wear long dresses 4. the disabled b. Writing: A letter of complaint ( 1 laù thö phaøn naøn) Ñòa chæ ( ngöôøi vieát) Ñòa chæ + teân ( ngöôøi nhaän) Ngaøy thaùng vieát thö Dear + name. Thuy’s class is different _______ other classes because the children are disabled. the blind 4. which is a good news Trong caâu treân. other d. what d.

a.a. organise b.a. children c. for 10. had left b. talked d. What kind of student was she? ________________________________________________________________ 7. head 4.a. taking care c. worried c. year 9. class d. deaf c. beat b. for 9.2012 a. looking b. force d. 1. They spent a lot of time ________ about what they would do. bad 6. real d.demonstrating 7. blind d. a. send b. talking Unit 3+4 I. the young 8. demonstrative c. realize 7. Where do Thuy’s student come from? 129 . said b. talk b. When did Marie Curie get married? ________________________________________________________________ 5.a. mature b. famous d. Answer the question. the blind d. the poor b. Why is Thuy’s class different from other classes? _________________________________________________________________ 10.a. Her job is ______ of mentally retarded children in the area. Pick out the word whose underlined part is pronounced differently from the rest. eaten c. For what service was she awarded a Nobel Prize in chemistry? _________________________________________________________________ 8. had left c.a. dream b. bench d. at 5. he 5. death c. was left d. concentrate 3. teach b. 1. reason d. parent b. tent c. What dream did Marie Curie harbour ? ________________________________________________________________ 3. Why did Marie Curie work as a private tutor? _______________________________________________________________ 4. harboure d. in b. man d. with d.a. What was Marie Curie’s real joy? ________________________________________________________________ 6. married b. sad c. from c. They gave a clear _________ of their intentions a. demonatrate b. his classmates _______ a. What do you do _____ a living? I work as a fashion model.a. interested 2. By the time he arrived. Does Thuy enjoy her teaching job? _________________________________________________________________ 9. on b. afternoon c. When and where was Marie Curie born? ______________________________________________________________ 2. demonstration d. watching 6. a. in d. The little buy is helping ______ cross the street. money c.English 10 School year: 2011 . education c. to talk c. finger II. father 8. a. repeat d.a. of c.pity b. left 10. the rich c. taking notice d. a.

disabled b. she became a University professor b. a. interesting c.of a young teacher. What did Marie Curie do in 1914? a. she received Nobel Prize in chemistry 6.2012 _________________________________________________________________ 11. romantic books b. in Warsaw 2. Where did Marie Curie go to school? a. The time of the day they enjoy most …………. she received Ph. picture books 8. sports teacher d. to find work for her living c. children books c.English 10 School year: 2011 . to meet Pierre Curie. time consuming c. a.. farmer 7. athlete 9. to get University education b. Many disabled children attended the class thanks to …………. belief c. Why did Marie Curie go to Paris? a. in Paris c. Why did many disabled children attend the class? _________________________________________________________________ 12. opposition b.lesson a. The writer feel ……………toward Thuy’s work a. the parents were ……………the idea of sending their children to the special class a. photograph c. worried about 12. satisfied with c. adventure books d.D c. she had to live in financial difficulty c. 1. How do Thuy’s students feel? _________________________________________________________________ III. she earned a lot of money. olympic champion c.. a. she took up the possition of her husband b. cyclo driver c. at the Sorbonne b. opposed to d. she worked as a private tutor 4. photogenic d. At first. admiring b. humorous 10. effort d. teacher’s diploma b. she was awarded a Nobel Prize in chemistry c . The children in Thuy’s class is……………. Pham Thu Thuy. interested 13. photographer 130 .she found the Radium Institute 5. angry d. blind d. photography b. How is the teaching job in Thuy’s class? a. What does Sally want to be in the future ? a. interested in b. What kinds of books does Sally like? a. Choose the best answer . teacher d. deaf c. olympic champion b. 3. admired d. interesting b. What did Marie Curie do in 1906 a. b. Sally is a ……………………. While she was studying at the Sorbonne a. dumb 11. attitude 14.

Later he worked on train and continued to experiment there. Tom has finished his homework before he went downtown . who comprises 19 members. I once took a photographer of my girlfriend. in one of his experiments. A B C D 2. She told me to shut the door but I don’t lock it.2012 15. A B C D 14. chemistry. Hellen said she went to the supermarket before coming to my house. Tom said that he would borrow me his car if I wanted to use it. A B C D 15. A B C D 8.where pleased her boss. and mathematics are different types of scientist. surroundings d. A B C D 11. he sold his bicycle. A B C D 7. How many photos are in a display of Vang Trang Khuyet club a. People are interesting in the quality of the products they buy A B C D 5. The six –month – old photographic club. Biology. A B C D 10. A B C D 6. he asked a lot of question . Edison’s mother taught her son at home and he began to carry out a lot of experiments. He wants to be a photography in the future.The teacher thought he was stupid and she sent him home.50 b.20 16. a. A B C D 9. he set fire to the train. Find the mistakes in these sentences 1. Read the passage and answer the questions. He always goes to work on time . 16. sorrow c.19 d. the beauty of daily life IV. V.30 c. Tom stopped studying when he was a junior in college because he does A B C D not like school. A B C D 12. When Edison was a boy at school. A B C D 4. While George was reading in bed. 1. He didn’t used to visit HA NOI capital. He earned money for his experiments by gardening . After my uncle has bought a new car. What did Edison do when he was a boy at school? 131 . The disabled children’s passion for taking a photograph helped them escape their…………. two thieves had climbed into his A B C D Kitchen. The time of the day they enjoy most is photograph lesson A B C D 3. Unfortunately.English 10 School year: 2011 . He used to travelling on horseback when he was a child. disability b. A B C D 13..

I/ not / happy /study / English centre. _________________________________________________________________ 10. was quiet d. made a lot of experiments c. I /write /complain /poor quality /service /your centre. by driving a car c. studied very hard 2. foolish c. I/ dinner /before/go out/last night. I/ watch /TV /after /finish /homework. Deaf/and/dumb/can/communicate/each other/by/system/sign language. ____________________________________________________________ 2. ____________________________________________________________ 6. 3) ex: I have learnt English for 12 years. She /used/ eat /ice cream /when /be /a /child. What did the teacher think about Edison at the time? a. Thì hieän taïi hoøan taøhnh duøng ñeå: . It /said/Robin Hood/rob/rich/and/give/money /poor. so far. clever b. __________________________________________________________________ Grammar: 1/ The present perfect tense: Hieän taïi hoøan thaønh HAVE/ HAS + V( ED.English 10 School year: 2011 . Who taught Edison when he was sent out of school? a. asked a lot of questions b. since lunch. his mother 4. .Dieãn taû 1 haønh ñoäng vöøa môùi xaûy ra. Complete the sentences 1. by delivering newspaper VI. by gardening d. Vôùi caùch duøng naøy thì hieän taïi hoøan thaønh thöôøng ñi vôùi : recently. I /wish /apply /post/manager /company. his tutor c. in the lasat few days/ years. I /difficulty /speak/and/write /English. by selling stamps b. How did he earn money for his experiments? a. ___________________________________________________________ 3. ___________________________________________________________ 4. timid d. …. ______________________________________________________________ 8. When /I / holiday /I /not/ enjoy/ get/ early.. thöôøng duøng vôùi Just: UNIT 5: TECHNOLOGY AND YOU 132 . ___________________________________________________________ 7.2012 a. ________________________________________________________________ 9. ___________________________________________________________ 5. intelligent 3. his father d.Dieãn taû 1 haønh ñoäng baét ñaàu töø trong quaù khöù vaø vaãn coøn tieáp tuïc ôû hieän taïi: Ex: I have known him for 8 years. for ten days. his brother b.

foot.Dieãn taû 1 haønh ñoäng ñaõ xaûy ra nhöng khoâng roõ thôøi ñieåm cuï theå. ui : sue. Tuesday. Ex: We have already watch this film Ñi vôùi Yet trong caâu hoûi ñaõ laøm hay chöa vaø ñöôïc duøng trong caâu phuû ñònh ñeå nhaán maïnh yù chöa laøm gì Ex: I haven’t done my homework yet Have your friends come yet? Duøng vôùi caùc cuïm töø nhö this morning/ afternoon/ evening.2012 Ex: They have just finished their lunch. The ______________________________________________ A building was destroyed in the fire. this week/ month/ year. butcher. bullet. . The ______________________________________________ A waitress served us. anybody -Khoâng ñöôïc duøng THAT ñeå thay theá cho Who. 3/ Meänh ñeà quan heä vôùi WHO/ WHICH / THAT ÑAÏI TÖØ Chuû ngöõ Taân ngöõ Chæ ngöôøi Who. .khi caùc khoûang thôøi gian naøy chöa keát thuùc. Write complete sentences. Ex: Sydney. bull.Baét buoäc duøng That khi danh töø ñöùng tröôùc coù tính töø chia ôû so saùnh nhaát hoaëc danh töø laø: someone. everyone. using WHO/ WHICH / THAT and begin with the given words: 1. full. suet.Duøng vôùi For + a period of time. room Ue. bush OO: good. that Which . anyone. Ex: I have read 20 pages today. loïai meänh ñeà naøy ñöôïc ñeå trong 2 daáu phaåy. Writing: imperative form of the verb : V + O Ex: lift the receiver and listen to the dial tone Insert your phone card in the slot Press the number you require Pronunciation: / u/ and /u:/ Nhaän daïng: Aâm / u/: u + phuï aâm + ( phuï aâm) : put. fullfil. booty. suit. book. A girl was injured in the accident. 133 . that Chæ vaät Which.restrictive clause). Which trong meänh ñeà khoâng giôùi haïn ( non. that Whom. 20 trees have been planted by my father this week. everybody. thöôøng duøng vôùi Already ñeå nhaán maïnh trong caâu khaúng ñònh. Since + a point of time 2/ Present perfect passive: HAVE/ HAS BEEN + BEEN + V(3/ED) Ex: My father has planted 20 trees this week. somebody. today ………. where you came last month.English 10 School year: 2011 . blue Exercise: I. boom. that . food. She is now in hospital. is a wonderful place to visit. shoot. football Aâm /u:/ : oo + phuï aâm: bamboo. She was impolite and impatient. juice. loot. It has now been rebuilt.

agree. have finished b. worker. computers-playing 4.English 10 School year: 2011 . B. Change these sentences into passive voice: 1. Here’s the computer program about that I told you. will have finished c. What makes a computer such a ________ device? a. that c. of d. wasn’t opened c. miraculuosly d. a. Quoc Hoc high school. miraculous c. It runs every half hour.2012 The ______________________________________________ Some people were arrested. This box ________ for a long time yet. liar). with 3. which b. was being built c. agony. They have now been released. wasn’t being opened 6. C or D that best completes each sentence: 1. A b c d Unit 6: AN EXCURSION Pronunciation: aâm / / and / / Nhaän daïng Aâm / /: a ñaàu chöõ ( ago. ____________ we are studying. at c. ahead). popular. You can relax with the computer games or by listening to ________ music a. in where 5. computer-playing d. Computers are capable ____ doing almost anything you ask. was built b. where d. miracle b. a. a. is a famous school in Vietnam. apart. They have postponed the class meeting __________________________________________________ 3. A b c d 9. would have finished d. will have been finishing 8. in b. hadn’t been opened d. ar and er cuoái chöõ ( regular. hasn’t been opened b. o ( balcony. Choose the best answer among A. a. computers-played c. By the end of this month. A new hospital _______ in the area lately. A new hospital for children has built in our city. They haven’t finished their assignments _______________________________________________________ III. catastrophy) 134 . we ________ the training course.Somebody has stolen my bike _________________________________________________ 2. The ______________________________________________ A bus goes to the airport. a. A b c d 10. They have built a school near our house ___________________________________________________ 4. ______________________________________________ II. has been built 7. has built d. I haven’t met him since a long time. wonder 2. walker. Has somebody informed Lan of the change? _____________________________________________________ 5. alcohol. computer-played b.

It’s going to raining. There are a lot of black clouds in the shy. A b c d 4. cook c. wood b. ir. working days b. earn . Neâu caûm nghó khi nhaän ñöôïc lôøi ñeà nghò giuùp ñôõ Xaùc nhaän laø seõ giuùp Heïn thôøi gian hoaëc dôøi laïi luùc khaùc ( neâu lí do) Heïn luùc khaùc( neáu luùc ñoù khoâng raûnh) Heïn gaëp laïi Love/ Yours Name ( writer) Ex: Dear Lan. blood d. early Choose the word or phrase that best completes the sentence for the underlined word or phrase 1. See you later. early d. gloomy 3. term c. ordinary b. breaks d. city d. picture 3.English 10 School year: 2011 . and Sunday and Monday are my ______ a. a. So I will be at your house at 5 p.m. fur. a. beautiful d. There would be a lecture by Mr. days off 2. The cottage is surrounded by the most glorious countryside. ur ( stern. push 2. sunburnt c. It is going to rain 3/ Will + V : dieãn taû 1 quyeát ñònh ngay luùc noùi hoaëc 1 söï phoûng ñoaùn veà töông lai writing: a confirmation letter Dear + name. Tell me your plan Lan. early. this Sunday because I have to help my mom prepare the dinner. ready c. instead 4.2012 Aâm / / : ear. turn.m. a. A b c d 5. coù thôøi ñieåm xaùc ñònh ex: I am visiting Dalat this Friday 2/ Be going to + V: dieãn taû 1 döï ñònh trong töông lai vaø 1 hieän töôïng coù daáu hieäu ex: I am going to London this year. honourablec. I work from Tuesday to Saturday. Brown next week. blur ) Grammar: 1/ The present propgressive with the future meaning S + am/ is/ are + V-ing dieãn taû 1 keá hoaïch trong töông lai. a. site b. other d. What _________ this Saturday evening” 135 . a. er. Love Hoa Exercise: Choose the word that has the underlined letter(s) pronounced differently from the rest: 1. weather b. days out c. Take an umbrella with you. excursion b. I’m glad to hear that you are going to hace a party this Sunday. girl. trip c. I will buy a bunch of flowers for you. I’m sorry that I will be busy at 4 p. invention 5. nurse d. a. work b.

Magazine 4. In spite of We went out in spite of the heavy rain. Noise 6. Bill still arrived late fore the concert. Time 3. will go c. have you done c. a. am cooking c. Buy d. i Phát âm (Pronunation): /ei/ play. I can’t talk now. Height c.a. would you do d. Enjoy d. Because of. For. will you be doing 6. are you doing b. Although ………………………………………………………………………… Although he had a good salary. will be cooking d. In spite of ………………………………………………………………………… Ba was punished because he was lazy.was calling c. Town c. Type 2. have we? I ________ and get some. Voice b. Although.a. a. Televition b. shopped. a. Although) Ex: In spite of the cold weather.at d.English 10 School year: 2011 . 1. 136 . Because of ………………………………………………………………………… Rice grows well here because of the warm and wet cimate Because …………………………………………………………………………… Although he didn’t speak English. Bài tập (Exercise) I/ Pronunciation: Circle the word with the underlined letters pronounced differently from those of the others. Oh. We are going on a _____ to Vung Tau next week. / / enjoy. TV. Noise c. was shopping. in c. They are going _____ a boat trip on the Thames. Newspapers.a. twoday trip 10. I ___________ the dinner. Ago) Phân biệt cách sử dụng: Because of và In spite of (mở rộng Because. Play b. have cooked Review Unit 7 Lý thuyết/Ngữ pháp (Grammar) So sánh thì hiện tại hoàn thành và thì quá khứ đơn (Since. Although he took a taxi. Boil b. was cooking b.a. We’ve run out of milk. a. Noise c. he was unhappy in his life. two-days trip c. william still want to school. Going d. Spite. using Because of and In spite of. They c. Ex: Because of the cold weather.called d. / ∂ / type. we kept the fire burning all day. was shopping. Close b. Climb c Listen d. Today d. The internet. will be going d. Voice 5.called b. Because.a.2012 a. two-day trip d.a. would go b. Noise II/ Rewrite the following sentences. Mouse d. on 7. shopped. Although …………………………………………………………………………… She didn’t go to school because She was seriously ill. I _________ when I heard my name _____________ a. two day trip b. In spite of …………………………………………………………………………… In spite of his suffering from a bad cold. Play b. was going 9. for b. Bob decided to settle in England.was calling 8. we wore shorts. Viết (writing): Viết một đoạn văn về những thuận lợi và không thuận lợi: Radio.

I…………….six months 2. visit) many palces when you were in paris? Last night I…………..we had planned everything carefully. a. …………….(arrive) home at haft past twelve.. IV/ Write Since or For: 1. VI/ Some of these sentences contain a mistake with a verb tense.……………………………………………………………………… III/ Complete the sentences with Although / In spite of / Because/ Because of.(you enjoy) most this week? What ………..I was still feeling sick. I arrived on time.it rained a lot. I couldn’t sleep………………I was really tired.. ………………. I went to work the next day………………. I’ve seen a really good paly on televition last night.last months 3.all our careful plan. ………………. I went home early…………………. Lan and I……….(go) to bed. …………………. IV.I was feeling sick. 3. That boring series began over a year ago but it didn’t finish yet. ……………….2000 4………………. I couldn’t get to sleep ………………. 4. We didn’t have televition at school when I’ve been a boy. a lot thing went wrong. In spite of .there was a lot of noise. 8. 6.. What……………………(He. The cooker ……………(go) up at leat three time already.(have) a bath and then I…………. Complete the sentences with the present perfect or past simple tense. we anjoyed our vacation a.English 10 School year: 2011 .. Review Unit 8 Lý thuyết / Ngữ pháp: Câu điều kiện If loại 1 (Condition senrence type 1 ) Câu tường thuật gián tiếp với câu khẳng định ( Reported speech ) Phát âm (Pronunciation): /aʊ/ and/əʊ/ Writing : Hướng dẫn đi đường từ bản đồ (Giving directions) Bài tập: Exereice: I/ Pronunciation: 137 . nothing like that happened. ………………. ………………last summer 6.. Because of ……………………………………………………………………… They are always happy although they have very little money..twenly years 5. I didn’t get the job…………………being extremely qualified. b. ……………….(be) the best programmer so far this year. Recently there were several incidents like that.. She first went to see a play when She ………(be) a schoolgirl. 5. ………………Monday. In modern time.(you. b. The flight may be cancelled.(not/ see) thos movie yet. see) on TV since last week? Which programmer …………………. a lot of thing went wrong. ………………. everybody they have very little money. I sew him go into the theatre just a second age.2012 Because of………………………………………………………………………… Because he is kind.the traffic was bad. 7.. Did you ever see any paintings by Goya.

We’ll be late for school. although or in spite of. rose b. (bear) …………. He and his wife (live)……………next to me since their son. go inside the store 3.friend since we (be)………………at college together. voice b. 4. Complete the sentences with because.. Make me some coffee and I’ll give you one of my biscuits.a. If you ……………………………………………………………………………… STOP AND CHECK (Units 7 – 8) I.. If she has to work late e. close d.. II. hope 5..shopping this afternoon? B No. go)………………………………………this morning. John” Peter told John……………………………………………………………………… “ I left my umbrella here two days ago” Susan told them……………………………………………………………………… 8.a. roar c. destroy d. “I won’t have enough time to finish this job” He said……………………………………………………………………………… “ It is been a long time since I had such a good meal” She said…………………………………………………………………………… “ The weather may get much worse tomorrow” He told us…………………………………………………………………………… “ I think you should cut down on your smoking” The doctor told me………………………………………………………………… “ It’s time to go to bed.a. soap II/ Rewrite each sentence as reported speech. She’ll call you from the radio 5. If you (take)…………………. “ I gave you this yesterday” John said…………………………………………………………………………… “ Your letter arrived yesterday” David told me……………………………………………………………………. A (you. 2. 5. III.a. more c. Hefty died…………………………………………………she had a stroke. Tom. 1. Match a line in A with a line in B to make meaningful sentences. toy b. noise d. 6. phone c. host d. beginning as shown 1. note 3.weight. type 2. you must go to the top of the Eiffel Tower. If you go to Paris a. tell him I never want to see him 4. I (never.these tablets every day. We (be)……………………. If you……………………………………………………………………………… You press this button to stop the machine. children” She told……………………………………………………………………………… “ I’ll see you tomorrow. It’s quite simple really. 2. go)………………………………………………. coat d. 138 . enjoyc.English 10 School year: 2011 .2012 1. be)………………………………to Autrslia.a. 1. Put the verbs in brackets in the correct tense form. couch b. If we don’t leave soon d. then You (lose)…………………………. destroy 4. road b. I (already. hot c. but I’d like to go. 1. 3. because of. I (not see)…………………………………Keith for a while. If the music is too loud c. If I don’t hear from you today b.

Join. ……………………….. Make me some coffee. …………………………………………. and I’ll give you one of my biscuits. 6.. 3. If you see Tom. so that the meaning stays the same. 8.... 4. If you………………………………………………………………………. You press this button to stop the machine If you………………………………………………………………………… THE SECOND TERM UNIT 9: UNDERSEA WORLD A.2012 2. tell him he should be here at 8. 5. Rewrite cach sentence.she was rich. “ I left my umbrella here two days ago” Sunsan told them……………………………………………………………. 4. beginning as shown.00 If you should………………………………………………………………..English 10 School year: 2011 .. 6. “I’ll see you tomorrow.. she didn’t own a house.. She could not sleep …………….. “ I like this hotel very much” David said…………………………………………………………………. she is not happy. 3... “ I gave you this yesterday” John said…………………………………………………………………… 5.READING Teaching date Absentees Period: 55 Class 10A 2 139 .. IV.her wealth.his love for her. 2... James never say a hard word to Ruth…………………………. 1.. “ Your letter arrived yesterday” If you…………………………………………………………………………. The workers on strike …………………the working conditions were bad.” Peter told John………………………………………………………………...the noise. 7.

Allows sts to discuss in pairs in 2 minutes. 3. Anticipated problems: . . jellyfish. textbook. Before you read( 12 mins) .Some sts report.The group with the longest list will be the winner. General knowledge: . Teaching aids: board. IV. Objectives: 1. a. Knowledge: School year: 2011 .. 2. cassette player.Sts are required to work in groups of 3 or 4 to make a list of words related to the names of the animals in the sea in written form. .2012 .Aim: -Prepare information and vocabularies for the topic.Work in pairs and do the work orally. + Work with a partner 1: .Asks sts to look at the map and give Vietnamese names for the oceans on the map.Aim: Sts get used to the topic. tape.Students may lack vocabulary on undersea world.Students read about the undersea world.Vocabulary concerning undersea world like: whale. .Knowledge about the oceans and the undersea world. shark.English 10 I. . Skills: .Give the lists to the teacher . Procedures: Teacher’s activities 1.. Education aims: 2. II. Warm-up:( 3 mins) .Speaking : talk in pairs and in groups. Language: .The present simple tense. b. III. chalk. . .. + Networks: . .Reading comprehension: better sts' reading skill through vocabulary Matching and Table completion exercises..Work in groups of 3-4 students Students’ activities 140 . + Pa'cific ocean: Th¸i b×nh d¬ng + At'lantic ocean: §¹i t©y d¬ng + 'Indian ocean: Ên ®é d¬ng + 'Arctic ocean: B¾c b¨ng d¬ng + An'tarctic ocean ( southern .

. . . 3.2012 ocean): BiÓn nam cùc.Listens and help the sts to read the words/phrases correctly.Do as they have done in the previous part .Listen and then copy down + Vocabulary: . .Read these words silently.Aims: Read the passage for information to do the tasks. School year: 2011 .Leaves the sts 1 minute to self-practise reading the words. While you read:( 20 mins) .Soms sts read these words aloud and others listen.Self-correct.Listen and repeat.Reads each word/phrase 3 times and ask the sts to repeat it.Self.Sts are required to do in the same way as in “ work with a partner 1” to name the sea animal in each picture.Listens and give remarks.Provide the sts with new words/phrases: + Gulf(n): VÞnh + challenge(v): th¸chthøc + Subma'rine(n): Tµu ngÇm + 'organism(n): c¸ thÓ + Biodi'versity(n): sù ®a d¹ng sinh häc .correct .Listen and copy down. .Gets feedback and give remarks. + Picture1: Seal + Picture2: Jellyfish + Picture3: Turtle + Picture4: Shark .English 10 .Asks some sts to report. 141 . . .Some sts report.Asks 4-5 sts to read all the word/phrases aloud in front of the class . . .You are going to read a passage about + at stake(phr) : Cã nguy c¬ tuyÖt chñng = in danger . + Work with a partner 2: . + Set the scene: .

Aims: Give the summary of the passage. . They are : + the bottom depending + current independing 4. .Some pairs report.Gives correct answers. and the marine population 5. 1. to study 4. They bring samples to the scientists . 75% 2. . They do that by using modern devices 3.Asks sts to work in pairs to read the passage again and answer the questions in task 2. . School year: 2011 . samples 2.English 10 undersea world.2012 .Sts are required to compare their answers with another pair.Requires sts to underline the information that supports the answers. . biodiversity . depth. . . + Task 1:Fill in each space with a suitable from the box.Work in pairs to do the task. 1. . tiny 3.Some sts report.Share their answer with their partners.Sts are required to work in pairs to fill in each numbered space with a word/phrase in + tiny organism .Listens and helps sts to do the task correctly. Read it and then do the tasks that follow.Read the passage and then do the task. gulf 5. We can learn about the temperature. After you read:( 9 mins) .5 sts are required to do the task orally in front of the class (1 st/ 1 time).Sts are required to compare their results with their partners. . . .Listen to the teacher. 142 . .Compare their answer with other pairs.Work in pairs to ask and answer. investigate 4.Asks sts to read the passage and do task 1. + Task 2: Answering Questions: . .Asks 5-6 sts to read their answers aloud in front of the class (1 st / 1 time).

Listens and helps sts to do their task well. three-quarters 2. Objectives: B . . Homework:( 1 min) .Vocabulary on undersea world. biodiversity 5.SPEAKING Teaching date Absentees 1.Learn the summary of the reading passage.8 sts report. . School year: 2011 . huge 7. mysterious 3. 143 .2012 . 1.English 10 the box. General knowledge: . 2. 8. modern 4."Should" and the simple present. Education aims: . Knowledge: a. closely connected . b. EXPERIENCE: Period: 56 Class 10A 2 I.Students know about some actions to protect the oceans.8 sts represent by reading aloud the answers.Students can talk about the protection of the oceans. . plants and animals 6.Others listen V. discovery 5. Language: .

. II.Listen to the T.rubbish (n): r¸c rëi .One student write the new words on .Asks others to answer the questions of the board. Teaching aids: Textbook. Put the actions in .Write down the new words and practise reading them.Asks sts to look at the task and give sts some new words: .'pesticide (n): thuèc trõ s©u .English 10 3. reading passage.dispose (v) of sth: vøt bá . may give sts some suggested phrases: Students’ activities . Skills: .pollute (v): g©y « nhiÔm .Goes around to help sts if necessary.Asks sts to read the new words aloud.Reading and ordering the importance to protect the oceans.'herbicides (n): thuèc diÖt cá . 2.Others answer the questions. Procedures: Teacher’s activities 1.Students may not know many new words on the topic. order of importance and say what we should or shouldn’t do. . chalk.T. shouldn’t to put the actions in order of importance and talk about these actions.checking: (7 mins) . School year: 2011 . .Work in pairs to do the task.Speaking about undersea world. Homework . using should or . . . IV. Before you speak: (13 mins) Aims:to focus sts on the topic and introduce the new words and phrases used to talk about the protection of the oceans.2012 . 144 .Asks sts to write the new words on the board.Asks sts to work in pairs. . Anticipated problems: . III. + Task 1: There are some actions that should be taken to protect our oceans. board.

Work in groups of three or four.After you speak: ( 9 mins) Aims: Sts report what they have discussed.a lot of fish . 4. 3. In my opinion we should.Whales are -extinct/ hunted for disappear food. hunt (v ) explosive ( n) spill ( v ) tanker ( n ) .Sts may answer: I think that action( f ) is the most important because if we learn all we can know about the oceans we will understand their values and try to protect them.. I think.ing School year: 2011 .2012 .. ..Goes around to help sts if necessary.Gives sts some suggestions: Threats Consequences 1. . Oil is filled -polluted from tanks water -clean sea water/punish captain..Listen and take notes.not hunt or sell whale + V. 4. are used to died catch fish.Asks sts to work in groups of three or four to discuss the consequences of the threat to our oceans listed in Task 2 and offer some solutions. . products . the 145 . 3. 2..be banned.Asks sts to skim the sentences in Task 2 and find the new words.Explains some new words: .English 10 What do you think of How do you feel about What’s your opinion of Well.read the sentences and find the new words.. . .Asks some sts to give their opinions.Explosives Solutions place plastic bags in proper dustbins . While you speak( 15 mins) Aims: Sts practise discussing the consequences of the threats to the oceans and some solutions. . Beaches -polluted are filled with water plastic bags. .

EXPERIENCE: Period: 57 Class 10A 2 I.English 10 Task 3: Report to the class what your group has discussed.Others listen and give remarks. Objectives: C . Homework: (1min) .Listens and asks others to listen to give their opinions. 5.Write a passage about the threats to our oceans and the solutions.Some sts report their opinions in front of the class. . .2012 . V.Asks some representatives to report their group’s opinions in front of the class. . General knowledge: 146 . School year: 2011 .LISTENING Teaching date Absentees 1.

English 10
and if they are in danger. 2. Language: - Parts of the world - Vocabulary on sea animals.

School year: 2011 - 2012

- Sts know about the whales: how large they are, what they eat, where they live,

3. Skills: - Listening: choose True/ False statements, answer the questions - Speaking: - Talk about whales II. Anticipated problems: - There are too many new words. - The tape's quality is not very good. III. Teaching aids: - Textbook , tape, pictures of whales and other sea animals. IV. Procedures: Teacher’s activities 1. Homework checking:(7 mins) One sts talks about what people should do to protect the oceans. 2. Before you listen:(10 mins) Aims: to focus sts on the topic and review/ introduce the words and phrases used in the listening text. sts to answer the following questions: - What animal is the largest in the world? - What do you know about whales? - Why do people think whales are not fish? - Why do people keep hunting whales? - Ask some sts to give their answer. b. Introduces some new words - Discuss in groups. Suggestive answers: 1.The whale is a mammal because it raises its young on milk. 2. Because they want to catch whales for food, oil, leather and other products. Sts copy the words and phrases. - 'mammal (n): the animal that raise the young on milk - whaling (n): hunting whales - krill(n): tiny shellfish found in the seas (whales feed on krill) - mig'rate(v): to move from one place a. Focus sts on the picture of a whale and ask Some sts stand up and give their answer. remarks. Students’ activities One st presents. Others listen and give

147

English 10

School year: 2011 - 2012
to another according to season - conser'vation (n): taking care of st, the prevention of loss, damage..... - feeding / bearing ground (n): the place where a species of animal find food/ give birth. -an/a/the increase/ decrease in st(phr): - International whaling Commission: an

- Reads the words and ask sts to repeat. - Asks sts to read the words in pairs. - Asks some sts to read the words again. textbook (p. 94) and revise parts of the world, the oceans and discuss where there are cold waters.

organization responsible for the number of whales hunted. - measure(n): an action taken to achieve a - Listen and repeat. - Read the words in pairs and correct each other’s mistakes. - Some individuals read the words aloud. - Look at the map, recall parts of the world, the oceans and discuss where there are cold waters. - Listen to the T. - Work in pairs to guess if the statements

- Asks sts to refer to the map of the world in the purpose

3. While you listen:( 17 mins) + Task 1: Aims: Sts practise listening and marking True/ False statements. about whales.

are true or false. - Listen to the tape and do the task - Compare their answer. 1. F. It's the largest animal on earth.

- Tells sts that they are going to listen to a talk - Give their answer. - Asks sts to work in pairs, look at the 2. T statements given and guess if they are true or 3. T false. column to indicate their answer and underline the false information. T plays the tape twice. 4. F. They are in danger because some 5. T - Check their answer and then correct - Asks sts to listen to the talk and tick the right people are still killing them for food

148

English 10
- Asks sts to compare their answer in pairs. - Checks sts’ answer.

School year: 2011 - 2012
their work if they have the wrong answer.

- Plays the tape once again, stop the tape where - Work in pairs to read the questions and necessary and conduct the correction. + Task 2: Aims:Sts practise listening for information by answering given questions. textbook and read them in pairs and make sure the answer to the questions. try to answer them. - Listen and do the task. specific - Gives their answer. 1. It is about 30 metres in length and over 2. It is because there is a lot of krill 3. They are the cold waters in the North

- Asks sts to have a look at the questions in the 200 tons in weight. they understand them. T encourages sts guess their favourite food - Asks sts to listen to the tape once or twice and the South of the Pacific Ocean and again to answer the questions. Sts can note the Atlantic Ocean. down important information - Asks sts to compare their answer in pairs. - Checks sts’ answer. 4. Heavy hunting. 5. They have asked the International Waling Commission to stop most whaling. 6. If we didn't take any measures to protect whales, this kind of animal would disappear forever - Check their answer, and then correct their work if they have the wrong answer.

- Plays the tape once again, stop the tape where - Work in pairs to talk about whales. necessary and conduct the correction. 4. After you listen:(10 mins) - Asks sts to work in pairs and tell each other about the whales using the following information: largest- 30 -200 -most intelligent - cold water North - South- Pacific - Atlantic - krill - in - Two sts present. danger - hunting - The Eskimo - not protect disappear.

149

English 10
- Moves round to check the activities and to make sure that sts are working effectively. - Asks two sts to present in front of the whole class. - Checks and gives remarks. 5. Homework:(1 min) Write a short paragraph about the whale V. EXPERIENCE:

School year: 2011 - 2012

Period: 58 Class 10A 2 I. Objectives:

D - WRITING Teaching date Absentees

1. Education Aims: - Students can write a paragraph to describe information from a table. 2. Knowledge: a. General knowledge: - Information about the sperm whale and the dolphin. b. Language: - Language used to describe animals. - The present simple tense. 3. Skills: - Reading: read the sample paragraph. - Speaking: work in pairs to find information to complete the table .

150

.Students may have difficulty in using the information to write a full paragraph. II.Copy these words into theit notebooks.Checks and gives remarks. . Homework checking :( 5 mins) . Anticipated problems: School year: 2011 . . + Task 1: . Before you write:( 20 mins) .Explains some new words: . chalk. + life span (n): the period from birth to death + en'trapment (n): sù m¾c bÉy + 'offspring (n): con c¸i . . Teaching Aids: board. + 'carnivore (n): an animal that eats meat + squid (n): mùc èng + ges'tation period (n): the process of carrying the young baby inside the mother's body. IV.Introduces the situation.2012 .Asks other sts to listen to their friend and give remarks.Aims:to get sts to read the sample paragraph and to help them to prepare vocabulary and information before they write. . Procedures: Teacher's activities 1.Listen to their friend and give remarks.Asks one st to talk about whales. textbook.Writing: write a paragraph to describe the facts and figures provided in . + sperm whale (n): a kind of whale that is hunted for an oily substance in its head. 2. Students' activities 151 .Listen to the teacher carefully.Listen to the teacher. III.English 10 the table.

Asks sts to compare their ideas with other pairs. .2012 .000 kg in weight.Asks sts to work in pairs in 3 minutes to read the second table with some information about the dolphin.Asks sts to work in pairs to read the paragraph . then write these words into their notebooks. task.Listen to the teacher and then read these words in chorus and individually. .Work in pairs to read the table and try + Task 2: . + Conservation concerns: At risk due to hunting and accidental fishing net entrapment.Draws a table on the board and ask some sts to go to the board and complete the table. +Feeding habits: Carnivores: Eat mainly squid.Looks at the board and gives remarks.Read the paragraph in pairs and do the . Gestation period: 14 – 19 months + Life span: Up to 60 – 70 years + Special features: Biggest animals that have teeth on earth. . 152 . School year: 2011 . and then complete the table that follows. . Female: 12 m in length. Eat up to 1. 17. to understand the information. . Have the largest brain of all mammals. + Size: Male: 18 m in length.500kg of food .English 10 .Moves round to help if necessary.Listen to the teacher.Moves round to help if necessary.Share their answer with their friends. .Asks sts to listen to the teacher and repeat . 54.Present their ideas. daily + Offspring: Give birth to one calf every 5-7 years. + Range and habitat: all oceans. . . Prefer the waters with high squid populations.000 kg in weight.

Dolphins among 5..Gets feedback by asking some sts to read their that live in the water.2 metres in length while the largest one can weigh up to 8. While you write:( 10 mins) .Asks some other sts to give remarks.Lets sts write in 10 minutes. 4.Asks sts to use the information in the table and write a paragraph about the dolphin basing on the information in the table. Although they can be found in all oceans in the world.Aims: Sts practise writing a paragraph that describes the facts and figures about the dolphin. .Do the writing task.2012 . School year: 2011 . .Read their writing: ( a sample paragraph) Dolphins are not fish. . work aloud. The size of dolphins varies greatly. .200 kg and is 10 metres long.Moves around to conduct the activity. They are mamals the most intelligent on Earth. Dolphin populations at risk due to the population of their habitat and accidental entrapment in fishing nets. .English 10 3. dolphins prefer coastal waters and bays. Dolphins are carnivores and they eat mostly fish. . . T can have sts exchange their writing among sts within a group so that they can check their friend's work and give remarks. A dophin can normally live from twenty-five to sixty-five years and some species of dolphins can even live longer. . Homework: ( 1min) 153 . A female dolphin gives birth to one calf every two years after a gestation period of eleven to twelve months. After you write:( 9 mins) Aims: to get feedback and check sts' work. The smallest dolphin is just about 50kg in weight and 1.If there is enough time.Checks and give the correct answer.

Asks another st to give remarks. IV. Teaching aids: . chalk.Should.2012 V.Students know how to pronounce the sound /ɪə/. .English 10 . Knowledge: + Language: . III. Skills: + Speaking: . Procedures: Teacher's activities 1. . 2. 154 .Students revise the use of "should" and conditional sentence type 2. Anticipated problems: .workbook) School year: 2011 . Objectives: E – LANGUAGE EOCUS Teaching date Absentees 1.Asks one st to read the text about the blue whale. .Work in pairs to discuss the exercises. . Homework checking: ( 5mins) .Read words and sentences aloud. textbook.Students may confuse these sounds with some sounds in Vietnamese. Education Aims:.Give remarks.Part D ( page 67. II. 3. Students' activities . EXPERIENCE: Period: 59 Class 10A 2 I. + Reading: .Read the sentences silently to do the exercises. /əʊ/ and /ʊə/ correctly. .One st read the text aloud in front of the whole class.Pronunciation: /ɪə/.board. /əʊ/ and /ʊə/ .Conditional sentence type 2. .

English 10
- Checks and gives a mark. 2. Pronunciation:( 10 mins) - Aims: to introduce three sounds /ɪə/,/eə/ and /ʊə/ and help sts to practise these sounds. a. Writes three sounds on the board and pronounces them clearly twice, then asks sts to repeat. - Tells sts how to pronounce these sounds accurately. - Asks them to look at the textbook, listen and repeat. - Then asks sts to work in pairs to read the words again so that they can check for each other. - Moves around to help . - Asks two sts to read again and give remarks. book. and then find out the words containing sound /ɪə/, sound /eə/ and sound /ʊə/ . - Asks them to work in 2 minutes. - Moves around to conduct the activity. - Asks one st to report and other sts to give remarks. - Checks and gives the correct answers. - Asks some sts to read these sentences aloud. - Listens and gives remarks. 3. Grammar: ( 29 mins) Aims: to revise the use of " should" and conditional sentence type 2 and have sts do Ex1, EX 2 and EX3. a. Should:

School year: 2011 - 2012
- Listen to the teacher.

- Write down three sounds. - Listen to the teacher and repeat. - Look at the book , listen and repeat. /ɪə/ here dear clear /eə/ pair chair square ........................... - Read these words in pairs and check for their partners. - Look at the book and work in pairs. /ɪə/ dear /eə/ where wear /ʊə/ sure poor /ʊə/ poor sure tour

b. Asks sts to look at sentences in page 101 in the - Answers: - Asks them to work in pairs to read the sentences beer

...............................

- Read the sentences.

155

English 10
- Asks sts to tell the T the use of "should" - Asks sts to give examples with "should" and "shouldn't". - Asks sts to do EX1. + Exercise 1: - Asks sts to look at Ex1 and to do the task. compare their answers in pairs. - Moves round to conduct the activity. - Checks the exercise sentence by sentence. - Listens and gives remarks. - Introduces the use of " I think/ I don't think ...... should ..."by using some examples: eg: Joana and Andrew are planning to go skiing this weekend. You think it's a bad idea. You; I think you should stay at home. I don't think you should go skiing thid weekend. - Explains why " I don't think ....... should...." is preferred to " I think ....... shouldn't.........". - Asks sts to do EX2. + Exercise 2: - Asks sts to do Ex 2 individually and then share the answers with their friends. - Moves round to help if necessary. - Asks two sts to do this exercise on the board. - Asks one st to give remarks. - Checks and gives remarks. b. Conditional sentence type 2: - Reviews the form and the use of conditional sentence type 2 by giving some examples: eg: If my grandfather were still alive, he would

School year: 2011 - 2012

- " Should " is a modal verb that is used to give advice. - Some sts give examples: eg: You should get up early in the People shouldn't hunt whales. - Do Ex 1. - Some sts sts report their work sentence by sentence. 2. You should look for another job. 3. He shouldn't go to bed so late. 4. You should take a photograph. 5. She shouldn't use her car so much. 6. He should put some pictures on the wall.

- Asks sts to do the exercise individually and then morning.

- Look at the examples and listen to the teacher.

- Listen to the teacher.

- Do this EX individually. - Some sts report. 2. I think smoking should be banned, especially in restaurants. 3. I don't think you should go out this evening.

156

English 10
be 100 today. If I had a lot of money, I would lend you some. - Asks sts to read the examples and point out the form as well as the use of conditional sentence type 2. + Note: " were" is used with all persons. - Asks some sts to give examples. - Asks sts to do EX3. + Exercise 3: - Asks sts to do the task in pairs. - Goes round to conduct the activity. - Asks some pairs to read sentence by sentence. - Listens and gives remarks. 5. Homework ( 1 min) - Part B ( page 54 - workbook)

School year: 2011 - 2012
4. I think he should resign. - Listen to their friends and their teacher. - Read the examples and point out the form and the use of conditional sentence type 2: + Form: If- clause S + V( P.S) in the future. , , main clause S + would + V

+ Use: an unreal situation at present or

- Do Ex 3 in pairs. - Some sts report. 3. would take 4. refused 5. wouldn't get 6. closed down 7. pressed 8. wouldn't be 9. didn't come 10. borrowed

............................ V. EXPERIENCE:

UNIT 10: CONSERVATION Period: 60 Class 10A 2 I. Objectives: 1. Education aims: - Students improve their knowledge about conservation. A – READING Teaching date Absentees

157

English 10
2. Knowledge:

School year: 2011 - 2012

a. General knowledge: - Knowledge about conservation. b. Language: - The present simple tense. - Vocabulary concerning conservation. 3. Skills: - Speaking : talk in pairs and in groups. - Reading comprehension: better sts' reading skill through Matching and True or False, identifying the main idea exercise. II. Anticipated problems: - Students may not have enough words, and knowledge about conservation. III. Teaching aids: board, textbook, chalk. IV. Procedures: Teacher’s activities 1. Warm-up:( 3 mins) + Network.. - Ask sts to work in groups of 3 or 4. - Ask sts to give a list of the animals which are in danger of extinction. - After 3 minutes, the group which has the longest list will be the winner. 2. Before you read:( 10 mins) - Sts are required to answer the questions given in the part: 1. Have you ever visited a zoo or a forest? 2. What animals are you interested in? Why? 3. Do we need to protect animals and forests? + For each question, 2-3 sts are required to answer orally. + Vocabulary: - Provide the students with some new words/phrases +Variety(n): a large number of different kinds. + Species(n): = kind, type. - Students give answers orally. - others listen - Think of the answers. - Some sts report the list in front of the class. - Work in groups to discuss. Students’ activities

158

+ Circulation(n): Sù chuyÓn ®éng. F( two last sentences of paragraph 159 .Ask some sts to report.2012 . While you read:( 20 mins) + Task 1: Matching. T 4. Correct the false information.Read each word/phrase 3 times and ask sts to repeat it. 1. . 3.Call on some sts to read and explain their answers aloud in front of the class. .Some sts read these words again aloud (1 student/ 1 time) . School year: 2011 . . . .Listen and repeat . + Task 2: True or False.6-7 students do orally while others watch 1. circulate(v) + Overnight(Adv): in a very short period of time . . remove + Destruction(n) destroy(v) destructive(Adj): sù ph¸ huû. .Ask sts to read the passage independently and match the words or phrases in A with their meaning in B. .d 4. T 5.Leave sts 1 minute to self-practise.Tell sts to refer to Vocabulary for help and encourage them try to guess the meanings of the words in the context of the reading. . .Listen and help sts to read the words/phrases correctly.Copy down these words into their notebooks.Work individually.Ask 4-5 sts to read all the word/phrases aloud in front of the class .Get feedback and give correct answers.a 3. . + Hydroelectric dam(n): ®Ëp thuû ®iÖn.Ask sts to highlight or underline the information in the passage that help sts to find the correct answers.Highlight or underline the important information.Practise reading these words by themselves.Sts do the work individually .Try their best to do the task. T 2.Ask sts to read the passage more carefully and decide whether the statements are true(T) or false(F). .c 2.b -Listen and self-correct the exercise.English 10 + Eliminate(v): = disappear. . . T 3.

Call on some representatives to read their choice for each paragraph in front of the class..Work in pairs orally. EXPERIENCE: orally .Some sts report. 5. A.Ask sts to work in pairs to give answers to the questions. . and what we should do for the future of our planet.Work in groups of 3-4 students .Ask sts to work in groups of 3-4 to choose the most suitable idea for each paragraph.. V.Go round to help the students with their work. .6 . . 3.2012 B) 6. . We should stop polluting the environment and destroying plants and animals . how important water is.3-4 sts are required to give answers to one question orally in front of the class( 1 st/1 time) .. We wouldn't be able to use many plants to treat various dangerous diseases. After you read:( 9 mins) Questions .Self-correct the work ..Get feedback and give correct answers.SPEAKING Teaching date Absentees 160 .Listen and help sts to give correct answers.Listen and help sts to do the exercise correctly + Task 3: Main ideas. 2.Answers .3 2 . Animals wouldn't have a place to live in. F(last sentence of paragraph C) . ..Self-correct B.Ask sts to write a paragraph of about 60 words on the sequence of losing forest.. ..7 sts are required to give answers in front of the class(1 st/ 1answer).. Mankind and most plants and animals can't survive without water. Homework:( 1 min) .. 4. Period: 61 Class 10A B . 4 C.English 10 . School year: 2011 . 1.

Education aims: . influences: nhËy c¶m . Teaching aids: Textbook. chalk. b. Anticipated problems: .The passive voice. 2.Showing agreement or disagreement about the new kind of zoo.Students can talk about the advantages and disadvantages of the new kind of zoo. 3. board.Before you speak:( 10 minutes) Aims: Sts can discuss the questions about the features of the new kind of zoo. + Task 1: Read the paragraph and answer the questions .Read two paragraphs silently. Skills: .2012 1.Students may not know some new words in this topic. 161 . . II. IV. Procedures: Teacher’s activities 1. General knowledge: .Ask sts to read through the two paragraphs.Ask sts some questions: Have you ever visited the zoo? What did you see there? Where are all the animals in the zoo? .Give sts some new words: + sensitive (adj): be affected by slight changes.Introduce the new lesson: We are going to discuss the new kind of zoo where wild animals can live in their natural habitat. . Language: .Students know about the new kind of zoo. .Reporting on discussion results.Asking and answering about the new kind of zoo. Students’ activities -Sts answer: Yes.Listen and take notes. never I saw many animals there They are in the cages. I have/ No. Objectives: School year: 2011 . 2. Warm-up ( 5 minutes ) . .English 10 2 I. III. Knowledge: a.

. Yes . of . . 2....Ask sts to work individually to do the task .? Do you think. asking opinions and giving the opinions .. They can live in their natural environment. . Exactly. Yes.Work in pairs to share the ideas .Practise reading the new words .Get feedback and give remarks.Listen to the T. School year: 2011 .. . While you speak: ( 18 mins) Aims: Sts can show their agreement or disagreement about the new kind of zoo and discuss the advantages and disadvantages of the new kind of zoo.. I don’t think .. I would doubt that .. nh©n gièng...but.Ask sts to work in pairs to discuss the questions class..... Asking for opinions Giving opinions What do you think I think . ... 3.. I think you are right. In my opinion .Say their opinions aloud.Ask sts to read the new words orally in two paragraphs. The animals are not kept in cages.Some sts present in front of the 1.. .Go around to help sts . . .. + Task 2: Put a tick in the right box and share your ideas with a partner.English 10 + imprison (v): put or keep in prison: bá tï + reconstruct (v): build again + breed (v) : g©y gièng . .? Do you agree Showing disagreement I don’t really think so.? Showing agreement I agree with .2012 + reintroduce (v): put a species of animal or plant . 162 . They are opened to help . . .Work in pairs. back into a former habitat: ®a trë vÒ m«i trêng sèng tù nhiªn .Before sts do the task T elicits some structures for .Ask some sts to present their answers.. . I think it would be better for animals with .. endangered species develop...Work individually.Ask sts to work in pairs to share their ideas.

English 10 .the conditions the ..Listen to the teacher. ...... sharing your views with the rest of the class. ." ... 5.the money spent on animals are in rescontructions of the animals . V... Advantages Disadvantages .2012 if they live in the zoo of new kind because they may have better food. School year: 2011 .. natural zoo... 4. ...Listen to their friends as well as to the teacher. Firstly...the animals that environment people can visit the dangers that keepers may have . .......Ask some sts to talk about their ideas.. the animals can live in a better environment and are safer than when they are in nature.Go around to observe and help sts ....... . ....Ask other sts to take notes and compare with their groups’ ideas......Call on one representative from each group to report what his/her group have discussed..Listen and give feedback + Task 3:Discuss the advantages disadvantages of the new kind of zoo using the cues below....Ask sts to work in group to discuss the discuss zoo.Work in groups of three of four to the advantages and ..Take notes of Ss’ mistakes for later correction... and . EXPERIENCE: 163 . Homework ( 2 minutes ) Write a paragraph of the report that they have discussed in the class...Some sts present in front of the class: "There are some advantages of the new kind of zoo. . advantages and disadvantages of the new kind of disadvantages of the new kind of .. After you speak:( 10 minutes ) Aims: Sts can report on their discussion results + Task 4: Make group report.Give remarks on Ss’ answers...Go around to help sts if necessary...

Anticipated problems: . .Textbook .2012 Period: 62 Class 10A 2 I. General knowledge: .T may be short of time.The quality of the tape is not very good III. Skills: .Some set expressions .Speaking: . tape. . pictures of whales and other sea animals. 2. Objectives: C. Homework checking:(5 mins) Students’ activities . Before you listen:(10 mins) Aims: to focus sts on the topic and review/ introduce the words and phrases used in the 164 .Listening: order events .English 10 School year: 2011 .Sts know how a forest fire starts and what campers have to remember to do to protect the forests.mark True/False. II. detect sentences. . 2. Teaching aids: . Language: .Discuss how a forest fire may start and what every camper ought to remember.LISTENING Teaching date Absentees 1. Procedures: Teacher’s activities 1.Vocabulary on forest 3.One st tell the whole class about the Other sts listen to their friend and advantages and disadvantages of a zoo of the give remarks new kind.Listen and give remarks. IV.

.Ask some sts to read the words again and give remarks 3. . What can cause a forest fire? c.Ask sts to read the words in pairs. Do you know any famous forest fire? School year: 2011 .Read the words in pairs and correct . and gives their answer.Ask sts to read the statements in pairs and do the task . . cares of the forest. .One st from each group stands up countries have many forest fires every year? . Introduce the topic of the listening text . .Listen to the T.leave sb/ st doing: leave sb/st when it/he is each other’s mistakes.Read the statements in pairs and try tape about forest fires and they have to number to guess the order of the events. 165 .Copy down the words and phrases . the given statements in the order they hear. .Some individuals read the words aloud. Divide sts into 3 groups and ask each to discuss one of the following questions: a.English 10 listening text.Ask some sts to give their answer. . How destructive can a forest fire be? b.Listen and repeat.Introduce sts that they are going to listen to the . .a heap of (n): a lot of thing on top of one another.Work in groups and discuss the questions. . b.2012 .spread (v): to move to other places very . a.campfire (n): the fire made on at camping trip.Listen to the tape / the teacher and .forester (n): the person whose job is to take into their notebooks.Introduce some new words/ expressions . Are there any forest fires in Vietnam? Which . While you listen:( 26 mins) + Task 1: Aims: Sts practise listening and numbering the event in the correct order. quickly] Ving .Read the words again and ask sts to repeat.

Give their answer.4 the events .Listen to the tape / the teacher and .Ask sts to listen to the tape again and decide .Give their answer. stop the tape where necessary and conduct the correction. .Give their answer. do the task .Compare their answer. the box to indicate the sentences they hear.1 . F 3. Key: 1.Check sts’ answer.Ask sts to compare their answer in pairs. T Aims: Sts practise listening and marking True/ .Check their answer say it aloud. number in the right box to indicate the order of Key: 3 . . to do the task.Check sts’ answer.2 . .Ask sts to read the statements to see if they . T 4.Ask sts to compare their answer in pairs.Play the tape once again. F 2. .Play the tape once again.Play the tape once and ask sts to tick to the false information .Listen to the tape and do the task. 1. . School year: 2011 .Check their answer. stop the tape where necessary and conduct the correction. 166 . F . between them.2012 .Read the sentences and find out the sentences they hear. . box to indicate T/ F statement and underline the 5.5 . .Ask sts lo listen to the tape again and tick in . . to see if they understand them and compare the sentences in each pair to see the difference .Check sts’ answer. and then correct their work if they have the wrong answer. A . . + Task 2: false.Play the tape once. and then correct their work if they have the wrong answer.Ask sts to have a look at the sentences given pair. + Task 3: Aims: Sts practise listening and ticking the . whether the given statements are true or false. understand them.Compare their answer. B 2. A 3.English 10 make sure that they understand them.Listen to the T.Play the tape twice and ask sts to put the .Check their answer and then correct their work if they have the wrong difference between sentences in each . . .Read the statements in pairs and try .

. . etc . 4.WRITING Teaching date Absentees 1. Objectives: D . Language: . General knowledge: . Education Aims: . ". Homework:(1 min) Write a short paragraph about what people can do to protect forest from fires. b.Check and give remarks.English 10 necessary and conduct the correction..Work in groups to discuss. Knowledge: a. 167 ..2012 . 3. stop the tape where answer..Ask sts to work in groups and use the information in Task 1 and 2 to discuss the following questions: ... 2.Language used to write an informal letter. Period: 63 Class 10A 2 I.Students can write a letter of invitation.Move round to check the activities and to make sure that sts are working effectively.Reading: read the sentences in task 1 and the incomplete letters in task 2. EXPERIENCE: School year: 2011 . .. 5. After you listen:(8 mins) .One/ two sts present.A letter of invitation. V.Structures: "Let's .Ask one or two sts to retell the story in front of the whole class.?". Skills: .. .." Shall we. .Play the tape once again.How can a forest fire start? .What does every camper have to remember not to cause a forest fire? ..

III. ...?". . .? Let's + V-inf..Introduce some new words/phrases: + for a while: for a period of time + 'disco (n): a club or party where people dance with pop music Students' activities . 168 . Anticipated problems: . textbook. ... . . + Task 2: .Listen to the teacher.Aims:to get sts to write out the sentences by matching the first half in A with the most suitable half in B and then to use these sentences to fill the blanks in the invitation letters.Share their answer with their friends.. IV. School year: 2011 .c 2..Listen to the teacher carefully.Writing: write an invitation letter basing on the cues.. d/g 7.. Procedures: Teacher's activities 1. .board..Ask one st to talk about how a forest fire may start and what every camper ought to remember..English 10 to fill each blank in these invitation letters. Homework checking :( 5 mins) .. a 4.... Would you like/ Are you free + to-V.. + Task 1: . Shall we/ Can you/ Why don't you + V.b . 1.Listen to their friend and give remarks.Get feedback and give remarks..Ask other sts to listen to their friend and give remarks.inf. Before you write:( 20 mins) .. chalk.Ask sts to do in 4 minutes and move around to help if necessary.? Do you feel like/ How about + V-ing..Do the task in pairs.Speaking: work in pairs to match the halves of the sentences in task 1 and .Students may not be able to distinguish some structures such as " Let's.."..Ask sts to pay attention to the meaning as well as the structure of the two halves. II.. " Would you like. "How about.? . e 8. . f/h 3..Present their ideas.Recall some structures so that sts can do the task more easily. Teaching Aids: .. h/f 6.2012 .Work in pairs to read the letters and try to understand the content of the letters... 2. .Ask sts to read the requirement of task 1 carefully and then work in pairs to do the task. . . etc. .. .Check and give remarks.?"....Listen to the teacher. g/d 5.Ask sts to work in pairs to read the letters in pairs and to use the above expression to fill each blank.Copy the structures into theit notebooks.

5.Move around to conduct the activity. Please give my love to your parents.Listen to the teacher.Ask some other sts to give remarks. . And I miss you a lot.Ask sts to listen to the teacher and repeat .Get feedback by asking some sts to read their work aloud.Get sts to do the task in 5 minutes and then get feedback letter by letter. So if you haven't made any other plans why don't we spend a weekend together? Do you feel like visiting the forest near my grandparents' home again?It looks quite different now because very many young trees have been planted at the Trees Planting Festivals. . 4.off between the two terms soon.3/8 . After you write:( 9 mins) Aims: to get feedback and check sts' work. EXPERIENCE: .If there is enough time. . .Aims: Sts practise writing an invitation letter.2012 .LANGUAGE FOCUS Teaching date Absentees 169 . .Listen and give remarks 3. .Listen and repeat. We haven't met since oyu moved.4/6 . While you write:( 10 mins) .Copy the words/ phrases . 3. then write these words into their notebooks.English 10 + 'afterwards (adv): at a later time .workbook).Read their writing: ( a sample paragraph) "Dear Lam. Your friend.Report their answer: 1. . We are both having some days.Check and give the correct answer. . Do come if you find it possible and I'll make all the preparations then.Part D (page 63. .7 . inviting him to spend a weekend with him. 2/5. Homework: ( 1min) .Ask sts to play the role of Nam's and to write a letter to Lam. T can have sts exchange their writing among sts within a group so that they can check their friend's work and give remarks School year: 2011 .3/8 2.Do the writing task. . Objectives: E . Period: 64 Class 10A 2 I.Let sts write in 8 minutes. V.

Students may confuse sound / p / in English with sound / p / in Vietnamese. 170 .. Skills: + Speaking: . accurately. Ask sts to look at sentences in page 110 in the . chalk.One st reads his/her letter aloud aloud aloud.... Write two sounds on the board and pronounce . . /b/ /p/ . .. IV. them clearly twice.... Teaching aids: ... Knowledge: + Language: ...Ask another st to give remarks. again so that they can check for each other.Answers: book.Check and give the correct answers.Look at the book ...Read the sentences.Move around to help .Tell sts how to pronounce these sounds ..Ask one st to report and other sts to give remarks... . Education Aims:. .... .. 3. 2..Ask one st to read the letter they wrote at home .. /b/ /p/ / b / : a voiced sound bee pea / p / : a voiceless sound ban pan . Pronunciation:( 10 mins) .. Procedures: Teacher's activities Students' activities 1.. 2.Work in pairs to discuss the exercises. . .. . Homework checking: ( 5mins) . .Ask two sts to read again and give remarks. textbook.Listen and give remarks.2012 1...board. listen and repeat.Students know how to pronounce the sound /b/ and /p/ correctly. . ... then ask sts to repeat.... . Anticipated problems: .Read these words in pairs and check . ..English 10 School year: 2011 ...Look at the book and work in pairs.. .Ask some sts to read these sentences aloud... + Reading: .. .. .. .Pronunciation: /b/ and/p/ .Ask them to work in pairs to read the sentences and then find out the words containing sound / b Bill Pat big pan / and sound / p / . . in front of the whole class. b.Aims: to introduce two sounds / b / and / p / and help sts to practise these sounds.. black paper .Then ask sts to work in pairs to read the words for their partners..Ask them to look at the textbook.Students revise the passive voice.The passive voice...Listen to the teacher and repeat..Ask them to work in 2 minutes.Write down two sounds. . . III. II. listen and bad Paul repeat...Read words and sentences aloud..Read the sentences silently to do the exercises.Give remarks..Listen to the teacher.. a..Check and give a mark... ..Move around to conduct the activity.

. be spoken 4.Ask sts to pay attention to the sentence elements and to tell the T the difference between the active sentence and the passive sentence. .Recall the form of the passive by giving an example: eg: Active: We clean this window every day.Ask sts to look at Ex1 and to do the task.Listen to the teacher. + Exercise 3: .Read the requirement carefully.Listen to the teacher and take note.workbook) V.. was organized 2. feel ( intensive verbs) in the passive. will . EX 2: 1... .2012 . + The passive voice: .. made 10. + Exercise 1: .. . arrived 3. .. were 2. . had been cleaned 6..Ask two sts to do this exercise on the board. It is impossible to use verbs such as happen...Ask sts to do the exercise individually and then compare their answers in pairs.. had ( been) started . the object of an active verb becomes the subject of the passive verb..Listen and correct their work if necessary. EXPERIENCE: School year: 2011 .Listen and give remarks.Move round to conduct the activity.. sleep.Move round to help if necessary.p ) .Go round to conduct the activity. .. + Form: S + V ( be + p. were served 171 . was being laid . stand ( intransitive verbs) or seem.Check the exercise sentence by sentence. + In the passive... Grammar: ( 29 mins) Aims: to revise the passive voice and have sts do Ex1. . EX3: 1. was excellent 8.English 10 3. Have the students been told 4. . + Note: Only transitive verbs are used in the passive..Ask sts to do Ex 2 individually and then share the answers with their friends.Listen to the teacher . had been put 7.. Passive: This window is cleaned every day. taken 5.. are grown 3.Ask one st to give remarks. were met 4. .... ... 5.Part B ( page 60...Ask sts to read the requirement of Ex3 and then do the task in pairs.Do Ex 3.... .Ask sts to tell the T the form of the passive. came. .Listen and give remarks. be planted . ..Give examples. . . . am not invited 5.Do the Ex individually..Ask some pairs to read the dialouge.Check and give remarks. were reported 2.. is being photographed 3.. Homework ( 1 min) . is standing. . read the example and tell the whole class their ideas.. are being built . .Some sts report... + Exercise 2: . EX 2 and EX3.Ask sts to give some examples.. .. decided 5. prepared 9. 1..

............ People have used ballpoint pens for many years...Knowledge about national parks..... 5...... General knowledge: ..................Vocabulary concerning national parks...... .....Reading comprehension: better sts' reading skill through finding the word in the passage that best suits each of the definitions and answering questions..................... They are going to build more schools for disabled children.......... Teaching aids: board.............. Did Wright brothers build the first plane in 1903? => Was ..... Skills: .....Speaking : talk in pairs and in groups.....? 8.................................................... Knowledge: a................ 2................... Objectives: UNIT 11: NATIONAL PARKS A........ => More schools............2012 Period: 65 Class 10A 2 I.... Answers 172 .. 7. Somebody will meet you at Noi Bai Airport................... III.............................. => Ballpoint pens ............................. => More and more ....... Procedures: WRITTEN TEST Time allowed: 15 minutes Complete the second sentence so that it it has a similar meaning to the first one..... II..... Anticipated problems: ......... => We .......... ........ The factory is producing more and more pollution..... IV..... 3...The present simple tense............................... 6... 1........READING Teaching date Absentees 1..English 10 School year: 2011 ..... b....Students may not have much knowledge about national parks.................. He asked us many difficult questions.......................................... Language: ................ => These rooms ............................... Education aims:Students improve their knowledge about national parks ..... => You ..... 2...... textbook.................... => These rooms ..................... Viet is going to repaint these rooms tomorrow. 3.... My sister cleans these rooms every day... 4......................................................... chalk..

Before you read:( 9 mins) Aims: to repare information and vocabularies for the topic. You will be met at Noi Bai Airport. .Some sts read these words aloud and others listen. . 5. More schools will be built for disabled children.Listen and help sts to read the words/phrases correctly.2012 1.Listen and repeat. + lo'cate(v): = to place + 'butterfly(n): an insect with very big wings that can fly(con bím) + e'stablish(v): = to make/ build) + hike(v): to walk for health +sur'vive(v): to be alive after accident). Nairobi National Park. + Set the scene: .Leave sts 1 minute to self-practise reading the words. 2.You are going to read the passages about The Students’ activities .. Viet's house is going to be repainted tomorrow. .Ask sts to answer the question: Can you name some national parks in Vietnam and in the world? . While you read:(15 mins) Aims: Read the passage for information to do the tasks. 2. .Listen and think of the question.Listen and give remarks.Ask 4-5 sts to read all the word/phrases aloud in front of the class .Read each word/phrase 3 times and ask sts to repeat it..Ask some sts to answer the question.Some sts answer: Cuc Phuong National Park Bach Ma national Park.. . 6. . . . 173 .English 10 School year: 2011 .Introduce the reading text and provide sts with new words/phrases.Read silently to self-practise. Alaska National Park.  survival(n) + 'orphan(v): to be made parentless(må c«i) orphanage(n) + Sub-tropical(Adj): + 'wilderness(n): = wild place + contami'nation(n)  contaminate(v): to make something dirty/ polluted. .Ballpoint pens have been used for many years 7. . These rooms are cleaned every day. 3. 4. More and more pollution is being produced by the factory. We were asked many difficult questions. Was the first plane built in 1903? 8.Listen and then copy down ..Self-correct. . Teacher’s activities 1.

contain 3.Compare their results with their parners. contamination .Ask sts to work in pairs to read the passages again . . 2. Homework:( 1 min) .Complete the talk in written form.Share their answer with other sts. . sub-tropical 6. .Underline the information from and answer the questions in task 2.Required sts to compare their answers with another 1. .Listen to the T and correct if necessary. orphaned and/ or abandoned animals are taken care of. plans and animals will die/ be killed/ destroyed.One representative is required to give their talk orally in front of the class . .2012 .Work in pairs to read the passages + Task 2: Answering Questions: again and to ask and answer.Sts are required to compare their results with their partners.Listen and help sts to do the task correctly. . They can learn about the habits the class (1 st/1 time). . . of animals and how one species is dependent upon another for survival.5sts are required to do the task orally in front of the class (1 st/ 1 time).Others listen .Require sts to underline the information from the . .Present their answer: 2. .7 sts to read their answers aloud in front of 3.Listen and help the students to do their task well. . If more chemicals are released .Sts are required to work in groups to give reasons choice.English 10 School year: 2011 .Present his/her ideas. . National Parks. V. 4. the passages. 3. into the water. 4. passages that supports the answers.Listen and give remarks.Ask sts to read the passages and do task 1. survival 5.Explain more about the definitions if necessary. Because the rainy season is over.200 square km: pair. + Task 1:Fill in each space with a suitable from the passages. Read them and then do the tasks that follow.Read the passages and do the task.Ask 6 . EXPERIENCE: 174 . . species 4. . Everglades National Park is endangered because of the toxic levels of chemicals in the water 5. After you read:( 5 min) Aims: to give the summary of the passage. for their choice from one of the three national parks in the reading passages.Work in groups to talk about their . .Some pairs report: . In the orphanage.

Language: . 2. on the topic and introduce the words and phrases used in the task.Students can talk about an excursion and express their regrets. b.Conditional sentences types 3. . Unfortunately. 3.SPEAKING Teaching date School year: 2011 .Ask sts to read the new words orally and individualy. Skills: ..Read the sentences and find some columns. drinks. new words.Give sts some new words or expressions: + food poisoning: + fine (n ): cash paid as punishment .Students may not have sufficient vocabulary to talk about an excursion.Ask sts to work in pairs to do the task.Expressing the regrets. Warm-up:( 3 mins) . General knowledge: . . 2. .Ask one or two sts. cameras …. IV.Listen and copy down these words + get lost: unable to find way + carsick( adj ): feeling sick because of a into their notebooks. II. Procedures: Teacher’s activities Students’ activities 1. You are required to match the .Read the new words.Talking about an excursion. to answer. .English 10 Period: 66 Class 10A B .Have you have ever had a camping trip? Yes. Teaching aids: Textbook. car’s movement . ew have. Knowledge: a. thing in column A with the coresponding consequences in column B .Vocabulary on an excursion.2012 Absentees 2 I. .Matching sentences in column A with the coresponding consequences in column B. + Task 1: Matching Last week Nga’s class went on an excursion to Huong Pagoda. Before you speak:( 12 mins) Aims:tofocus sts. 175 .Tell me what you prepared for that trip? We prepared food. Education aims: . Most of the things they did went wrong. tents. Anticipated problems: . board. .Ask sts the questions: . . .Listen to the T. III. .Some sts answer: .Ask sts to read through the sentences in the two .Students know about an excursion to Huong Pagoda. chalk. the excursion turned out to be a disaster. Objectives: 1.

If some of us hadn’t left our luggage on the coach when we arrived.f 2.a 8. If we hadn’t thrown wast in the forest.Ask sts to work in groups. . +Use: The third conditional is used to .Work in pairs. School year: 2011 .Look at the example and tell the whole class the form and the use: +Form: If + S + past perfect. If we had brought enough food and drinks we wouldn’t have spent a lot of front of the class. Huong Pagoda and expressing the regrets. . I would have bought this car. . .Before sts do the task.Listen and give remarks. ( But I didn’t have money and so I didn’t buy it. 4.Go around to help sts. If we had been careful when .Listen to the T.d . After you speak:( 15 mins) Aims: Sts practise telling about an excursion to 7. Now you are talking with some friends about what you wish you had or hadn’t done.English 10 . walking in Huong Pagoda. we wouldn’t have got a fine. 6. 176 .Listen to sts and give remarks.e 3. .h 4.Read the answers aloud. + Task 2: Imagine that you are Nga’s classmates and you are not happy with the excursion to Huong Pagoda.) . 3.Work in groups. If we had had rain coats.b 6. . 5.Ask sts to look at the example and tell the T the form as well as the form of the conditional sentence type 3.c 7.Compare the answers with others. While you speak:( 14 mins) Aims: Sts can talk about their excursion to Huong Pagoda and express their regrets. S + would/ could +have + P II. . T asks sts to read the examples in the textbook and recall what grammatical structure is used in the example. we wouldn’t have got wet and have got a cold. . . If some of us hadn’t had food poisoning we could have enjoyed our visit. .Go around to observe sts working. we wouldn’t have got lost. we could have had clothes and money with us. 3. group. 4.Check sts ‘s answers by calling on some sts to read out things in A and some others to read out the corresponding consequences in B. 1.Revise the conditional sentence type 3 by giving an example: + Eg: If I had had money. talk unreal situations in the past.Ask sts to compare their answers with another .2012 .Read the examples and listen to the T. . money eating in expensive restaurants.g 5.Call on some sts to speak out their answers in 2.

Listening: fill in the gaps. offering help and collecting mistakes.Write down what they have discussed in task 3.English 10 + Task 3: You are Nga. board. Skills: . General knowledge: .Sts get more information about Cuc Phuong National Park.Some set expressions .Listen to their friend and give his/her regrets about what he/she did or did not remarks do during the excursion. Homework checking:(5 mins) . . Before you listen:(10 mins) 177 . 2.Speaking: .Sts may do not know some new words. III. Homework:( 1 min) .Listen to the T. .Discuss the special features of Cuc Phuong National Park. If we had stayed there more than one day.Work in pairs. IV. answer questions .Ask one st to tell the whole class about his/her class excursion to Huong Pagoda and express . Anticipated problems: . . You are going to work in pairs. Teaching aids: .The quality of the tape is not very good. . cassette.LISTENING Teaching date Absentees 2 I. School year: 2011 . Procedures: Teacher’s activities Students’ activities 1. . chalk. .Vocabulary on nature 3. we could have visited all the pagodas.Ask one or more sts to tell about their excursion in front of the class and give remarks.Go around to observe. textbook. .Listen and give remarks 2. Tell your partner about your class’s excursion to Huong Pagoda and express your regrets about what you did or didn’t do during the excursion. II. V. Language: .2012 8.Tape.Ask sts to work in pairs using the third conditional to do the task. Objectives: 1. 5. . EXPERIENCE: Period: 67 Class 10A C.Some sts tell about their excursion in front of the class.

. 3..de'feat(v): win sb .Introduce sts that they are going to listen to the tape about Cuc Phuong National Park and they have to fill in the gaps in each sentence given . . What is the area of the rainforest in Cuc Phuong National Park? c.span (v): connect.f'lora (v): all the plants of a particular area . stop the tape where .Play the tape twice and ask sts to fill in the gaps. Introduce the topic of the listening text.Some individuals read the words aloud.Copy down the words and phrases into their notebooks.Give their answer. then correct their work if they have the wrong answer.'ethnic mi'nority (n): The Tay. . . .Compare their answer.Listen to the T. .a'ttack(n): a violent attempt to hurt sb . Nung. 1.000.Ask sts to read the sentences in pairs and make sure that they understand them.Read the words again and asks sts to repeat. . 1960 2.'fauna (n): all the animals of an area. What can be seen in Cuc Phuong National Park? . Divide sts into small groups and ask them to discuss the following questions: a. .. Quen Voi . and necessary and conduct the correction.in'vader: (n) The French and Americans were invaders. 2.Read the words in pairs and correct each other’s mistakes..English 10 Aims:to focus sts on the topic and review/ introduce the words and phrases used in the listening text.Play the tape once again. + Task 2 178 . west of 3. . School year: 2011 .Ask some sts to read the words again.Read the statements in pairs and try to guess the missing information. .Introduce some new words/ expressions .Ask sts to compare their answer in pairs. When is the best time to visit Cuc Phuong National Park? d.Ask some sts to give their answer.2012 .Check their answer say it aloud. . 450 5. .o'fficially (adv): formally . 160 km south .Ask sts to read the words in pairs. 100. .Work in groups and discuss the questions. . . a.000 visitors 4.Checks sts’ answer. .Listen and repeat. b. ... Sts try to guess the missing information. One st from each group stands up and gives their answer. While you listen:(20 mins) + Task 1: Aims: Practise listening and filling in the gaps.Listen to the tape and do the task . Dao . . Where is Cuc Phuong National Park? b.

. 5. . . .Time founded . . location -Work in groups to discuss. . National Park V. Objectives: 1. They live mainly on bee keeping and 4. . b.Area. . and information in Task 1 and 2 and the reading text then correct their work if they have the to disscus the following problems: wrong answer.Compare their answer. 2.Play the tape once and ask sts note down the neccessary information. . 4. Hoa Binh.Ask sts to work in groups and use the .Read the questions in pairs and try to do the task. Education Aims: . It is about 160 km. They come to see the work being done to protect endanger species. School year: 2011 .Language used to write an informal letter. Language: . . Nguyen Hue defeated the Qing invaders in the spring of 1789 5.A letter of acceptance or refusal. 1.Check and give remarks. EXPERIENCE: Period: 68 Class 10A D .Ask sts to read the questions to see if they understand them.Ask sts to compare their answer in pairs.Ask one or two sts to present in front of the whole class.2012 . It covers 3 provinces: Ninh Binh. Knowledge: a.WRITING Teaching date Absentees 2 I.Students can write a letter of acceptance or refusal. General knowledge: . . After you listen:(8 mins) farming. Homework:(1 min) Write a short paragraph about Cuc Phuong .Listen to the T. .Local people.English 10 Aims: Practise listening and Answering questions.Check sts’ answer. and Thanh Hoa.One/ two sts present. -Move round to check the activities and to make sure that sts are working effectively. . .Ask sts to listen to the tape again and answer the given questions.Give their answer. stop the tape where necessary and conduct the correction.Listen to the tape and do the task. 3.Numbers of visitors .Check their answer say it aloud.Play the tape once again. 2.Historical event . 179 . .

Work in pairs to rearrange the .Move round to help if necessary. I'd like/love to.Remind sts of three invitation letters that they have already read in Unit 10 and ask them to . . .Do the task in pairs. etc ..Speaking: work in pairs to rearrange the sentences to make a letter of acceptance.Ask sts to work in pairs to rearrange the sentences into a letter. e 3. Homework checking :( 5 mins) . textbook. ." I'm afraid I can't come because. .Listen to their friend and give remarks.Ask sts to listen and repeat and then copy . . Skills: . Before you write:( 15 mins) .Introduce some new words: + a'cceptance (n): the noun of "accept" +re'fusal (n) : the noun of " refuse" + dec'line (v) : refuse sth offered ( politely) .Copy down the words into theit down these words into their notebooks. .Aims: to get sts to read the expressions in the table and to do task 1 and task 2. Refusing: I'm afraid I can't come . Teaching Aids: . f 180 . Anticipated problems: . While you write:( 15 mins) 1.Introduce the topic of the lesson: Write a . Accepting: Yes.2012 .". . .Listen to the teacher. 2. 2.Present their ideas.Remind sts of the letter Nam wrote to Lam to .English 10 School year: 2011 . chalk. . help if necessary. using the expressions in the table. letter of acceptance or refusal.Listen to the teacher carefully.Writing: write a letter of acceptance or refusal. . Procedures: Teacher's activities Students' activities 1. Accepting: I'd be delighted to.Ask one st to talk about the special features of Cuc Phuong National Park.Students may find it difficult to get ideas as well as to choose suitable expressions to write a letter of their own.Get feedback and give remarks. I'd like/love to. . . c 4. invite Lam to spend a weekend with him. work in pairs to complete three reply letters by . sentences into a letter. IV.d 2. .Share their answer with their friends.Present their ideas: 3. . And now Lam write a letter accepting Nam's invitation.. II.. .Reading: read the expressions in task 1 to fill the blanks of the incomplete letters. + Task 1: .Listen to the teacher. III. 3. a 5.Ask sts to do in 3 minutes and move around to 1.Check and give remarks.board. remarks..Get feedback and give remarks.Ask sts to read the expressions in the table in 2 minutes .Expressions: "Yes. . notebooks. because + Task 2: 3.?".Ask other sts to listen to their friend and give .Listen to the teacher.

. 181 . Thank you for inviting me to join you but I'm afraid I can't come.Read the requirement.. My English friend..Suggest that they use letters in task 1 and task 2 as sample letters. organisation ( introduction.Get feedback by asking some sts to read their work aloud.Aims: Sts practise writing a letter of acceptance or refusal. . is coming to Vietnam next weekend and I have promised to cook her some of our traditional dishes on Saturday morning. .Read their writing: ( a sample paragraph) "Dear Binh. I'm going to take her to some famous places in Hai Duong. . . . T can have sts exchange their writing among sts within a group so that they can check their friend's work and give remarks School year: 2011 .LANGUAGE FOCUS Teaching date Absentees 2 I.Students revise conditional sentence type 3. . V.2012 6. EXPERIENCE: Period: 69 Class 10A E .Students know how to pronounce the sound /t/ and /d/ correctly.Listen to the teacher. . Objectives: 1. 5.workbook).) .Ask some other sts to give remarks. b . Education Aims:. Homework: ( 1min) . .Ask them to pay attention to the structure of a letter: greeting.Move around to conduct the activity.Part D (page 68. .If there is enough time. Remember to show me the photos you take in Cuc Phuong whem you get home. body. After that. I hope that you will have a wonderful day in Cuc Phuong. It's lovely to hear that you are going for a picnic to Cuc Phuong National Park next weekend.Ask them to write a letter accepting or declining his/her friend's invitation. .English 10 .Do the writing task. Maria.Check and give the correct answer. After you write:( 9 mins) Aims: to get feedback and check sts' work.Ask sts to read the requirement of task 3. . . 4. . Your friend.Let sts write in 13 minutes.Listen to the teacher.

. Homework checking: ( 5mins) ... 3.. them clearly twice. ..Ask one st to report and other sts to give remarks... ....Tell sts how to pronounce these sounds .. Procedures: Teacher's activities Students' activities 1. .. counter stayed . Write two sounds on the board and pronounce .Look at the book ...Read the sentences. III......2012 2. in front of the whole class.... listen and repeat. 3..Pronunciation: /t/ and/d/ .Listen to the teacher and repeat. ..Conditional sentence type 3.Move around to conduct the activity... Ask sts to look at sentences in page 119 in the .Ask them to work in pairs to read the sentences and then find out the words containing sound / t next to third restaurant dear / and sound / d / . Anticipated problems: . + Reading: . a. /t/ /d/ . . b.Give remarks.Read the example and tell the whole have sts do Ex1 and EX2.Ask some sts to read these sentences aloud.Ask them to work in 2 minutes.. 2. II.Read the sentences silently to do the exercises.Look at the book and work in pairs.Students may confuse sound /t/ and /d/ in English with sound / t / and / d / in Vietnamese. .Aims: to introduce two sounds /t/ and /d / and help sts to practise these sounds.Ask them to look at the textbook....Ask two sts to read again and give remarks. .Work in pairs to discuss the exercises.Listen and give remarks...... textbook. .Ask one st to read the letter they wrote at home ... . .. Skills: + Speaking: .board. IV.Write down two sounds. . Pronunciation:( 10 mins) .Answers: book. . . listen and plant spend repeat. again so that they can check for each other. .Listen to the teacher. /t/ /d/ / d / : a voiced sound topic difficulty / t / : a voiceless sound contain invader . .. .English 10 School year: 2011 .Check and give a mark......Then ask sts to work in pairs to read the words for their partners. chalk. accurately.Ask another st to give remarks.. Grammar: ( 29 mins) Aims: to revise conditional sentence type 3 and .Read these words in pairs and check .Read words and sentences aloud..... Teaching aids: ..Move around to help ...One st reads his/her letter aloud aloud aloud.Listen to the teacher . Knowledge: + Language: ... . .Check and give the correct answers.. 182 . . then ask sts to repeat. ..

had known 2..Revise conditional sentence type 3 by giving an example. . had had 3.EX 3 ( page 120 .2012 class their ideas.Move round to help if necessary. .Ask sts to give some examples.Ask two sts to write the sentences on the board. that Lam had to get up early. . had known 7.Some sts report.Recall conditional sentence type 1 and type 2. had stopped 8. he would have passed the exam. had braekfast. . .st's book) been able to buy the car... would have passed 5. been wearing a seat belt. 2.. you wouldn't behungry now.clause . could have enjoyed 6. would have gone 4... + Form: If .. EX 2: Each st writes three sentences 1. main clause If + S + V( past perfect).. + Exercise 1: . I would have woken him up.Check the exercise sentence by sentence. . 5. 4.Do the Ex individually. .Check and give remarks. ... . 5. . .. lent me the money. hadn't stopped so suddenly. . . I would have . . had called . 1.We can use could/might/should instead of would in main clause. .Listen to the teacher. . she would have been injured.Listen and correct their work if necessary. => I can say: " If Tom had studied hard.Ask sts to tell the T the form and the use of conditional sentence type 3. .Ask two sts to give remarks. . + Exercise 2: ..Listen and give remarks. the accidents wouldn't have happened..We can also use the past perfect continuous in If . School year: 2011 . 6.Ask sts to look at Ex1 and to do the task. 3. 183 . had some money on me.Give examples.to talk about something that might have happened in the past but didn't. .Ask sts to do the exercise individually and then compare their answers in pairs. eg: Tom didn't study hard so he fail the exam. Homework ( 1 min) .Ask sts to do Ex 2 individually and then share the answers with their friends. .clause. I would have got a taxi..Listen to the teacher and take note. Note: .English 10 + Conditional sentence type 3: .. .Move round to conduct the activity." . S + would +have + V( PII) + Use: ..

Teaching aids: textbook. chalk. EXPERIENCE: School year: 2011 . . I would have waited on your table. 2.1.Sts revise what they have learned in unit 9.English 10 V. If they had been paying attention. Students' activities EX 3: 1. 3. Procedures: Teacher's activities 1..2012 Period 70: Class 10A 2 I.Introduce new words: + campground (n) : a place for camping + trail (n) : a path + geyser (n): m¹ch níc phun .General knowledge in unit 9.Ask sts to do part II. .Ask one st to do Ex 3 in the workbook on the board. 2. . The new lesson:( 39 minutes) .. .Ask one st to give remarks. Skills: listening..Give sts the time duration for each part : part II: 10 minutes. Homework checking:( 5 mins) . 5. . part III: 10 minutes. unit 10 and unit 11. 2. . .Copy down these words into their 184 . Objectives: TEST YOURSELF D Teaching date Absentees 1. Knowledge: .Ask sts to read the requirement of the task. I would have heard . they would have seen the sign marking . If I had been working at the restaurant last night. If the music hadn't been playing loudly at the restaurant. If Carol hadn't been studying.Try to focus on the important words.Ask sts to do listening in class. 2. II. If the sun hadn't been shining.Give remarks and marks.. speaking and writing. 3. Listening: . Aims: . 4. unit 10 and unit 11. we wouldn't have gone to the beach yesterday. . she would have answered the phone. part IV: 15 minutes.. board. .Look at the textbook and read the statements.Language: pronunciation and grammar in the above units.One st gives remarks. part III and part IV at home in advance to save time. III.

it isn't.work in groups to share their ideas.Ask some sts to read their writing aloud.Listen and check.Listen to the teacher's remarks. healthy.. T b.English 10 . to stay. .... 4. have been turned on. 2. 2... .Part B ( Page 65 . has been cleaned.Listen carefully and do the task.. knows c.. .Ask some sts to give remarks... a...Get feedback and play the tape again so that sts can check their answers.Ask sts to discuss their answers in groups.2. .Answers: a.Check and give feedback. are waiting b..3. F e.. Your sister.. He has invited some of our relatives and his friends to make the party a success. they go to a national park to enjoy the nature. 2. Writing: . . Grammar: . 1. 1.3. 5. I too have invited a number of my friends in the neighbourhood.3. .2. Mother has asked me to tell you to come home for the New Year celebration.Ask other sts to give remarks. a. . landscape d. decided . F d.Discuss in groups.2.. .Ask two other sts to give remarks.Some sts stand up to report.Ask 2 sts to write their answers on the board.2012 notebooks. I'm sure you will be here in time to share the fun with us on that day.. You will be delighted to know Father is giving a party to celebrate the New Year.Work in pairs to discuss their answers. feed or hunt the animals. .4. junk and litter c. 3.3.. Helen .. highway b. would help... It has about 70 geysers... T c..Read their writing aloud " Dear Alex.. . School year: 2011 . 2. . 3.Ask sts to work in groups to compare their answers. . . Homework: ( 1 min) .Check and give the correct answers. No. They mustn't pick the flowers.4.2. . It became a national park in 1872.. 1.Ask some sts to report his/ her answers aloud.. knew .Play the tape twice and ask sts to do the task. 2. T f. 1.workbook) V. . would have gone out . T . ... Reading: .. EXPERIENCE: 185 .. hadn't been ..Ask sts to share their ideas with their partners...Listen and read after the teacher. It's the world's largest park.. 1..

.. psychology C..) 1.. cool B... hadn’t driven 4. 5.. There are many flowers in spring..your address. will D. night D....B.. would have had A. She told me I . provide II.C. If he………………more carefully. He . summer. B.. good C. we……………….. III.. become B..... wouldn't have gone A. If it was sunny..... wouldn't be 2...... had know D. book 2....2012 Period: 71 + 72: WRITTEN TEST 45' AND CORRECT THE TEST Class 10A 2 I... cup 3. would go C.... an accident if I hadn’t taken more care..Read the passage and answer the following questions ( Đọc đoạn văn và trả lời những câu hỏi phía dưới). shall A. It's always sunny. the weather 186 .. 1.... drives D.. had driven D.. hoặc D). hadn't been 6.English 10 School year: 2011 .... outside B...Choose the the best answer by circling the letter A. wouldn't be C. A...... have C. protect B.. would have gone B........... would B. If the wind .. so strong... cook D. out with you if you hadn'tcome A. or D (Chọn đáp án đúng bằng cách khoanh tròn chữ cái A. wouldn't go D.. consider D.B. hadn't be B. There are four seasons in a year in Viet Nam. would have C. autumn and winter.Choose the word whose underlined part is pronounced differently (Chọn từ có phần gạch chân được phát âm khác với những từ còn lại. people D.. A. had D. When autumn comes. In summer the weather is hot.. had known C. The weather in spring is usually warm and fine. I would have sent you a postcard if I………….. must C. 3. he wouldn’t have had so many accidents.. drive A.... city C..C. B....go out for a walk. idea Teaching date Absentees 4. have known A.. know B..... They are spring... bridge C. the bridge wouldn't have collapsed. A. A.

......... life (be) .... What's the weather like in winter? ................................ Why do peple call autumn the season of umbrellas ................ ( Cho dạng đúng của những động từ trong ngoặc). How many seasons are there in Viet Nam? .......... => Tuan will ......... The manager will interview Tuan tomorrow. => If Minh ......2012 becomes cool.................... They got wet because they didn't take an umbrella............. IV............................................ What's the weather like in spring? ...................... 2............................... There are many flowers in spring....... After autumn comes winter............ 3............ It's the season of umbrellas..... Rewrite the following sentences into passive voice (viết lại các câu phía dưới sang câu bị động)............................... 1....................... => The windows……………………………………………………………… b. III................. 1........................... Complete the following sentences with the correct form of the verbs in brackets.................. Minh didn't work hard...................................... 5................ B....... We have much rain in autumn.......................... she'll lose her job......... The weather is cold in the dry season....... But it never snows in winter in Viet Nam....................... we (go) ............. so he failed the exams........................................... late again..................................................... to the concert........ The weather is cool in autumn....... It usually snows in winter in Viet Nam.............................. C..... Hoa saw that film last night.. 187 ...... Lan has cleaned the windows last Sunday.............. => If they ............ easier............................... If we had had enough money.. If she (come) .......... 2............. 2.................. 3............ Rewrite the following sentences in conditional type III ( viết lại các câu phía dưới dạng câu điều kiện loại III)..... 6....... 1............. It's a dry season.................... When is the dry season? ........ If we lived in a town...................................... time.................................. 4.... 2.English 10 School year: 2011 ... => That film ……..........………………………………………….......................... D........... Rewrite the following sentences so that they give the same meaning(viết lại các câu phía dưới sao cho nghĩa cuả câu không thay đổi) a.......……………………………………………………………........... Michael will phone you if he (have)............... 1.................. 3... The weather is cold and it doesn't rain very often................ 4..................... Which of the following sentence is not true? A................

tape.Vocabulary concerning music: rock 'n 'roll. .b 2.a 5.. . Knowledge: a. b..Speaking : talk in pairs and in groups.Knowledge about music.Write down these words into their + Convey(v):= Show. Language: ..The present simple tense. + Integral part(n): = necessary part A . ..Listen to the tape and guess.English 10 THE END School year: 2011 .Get feedback and check. Matching: . Procedures: Teacher’s activities Students’ activities 1.Play the tape with 5 pieces of music and ask sts to guess what types of music they are.. 2.…. . III. IV. chalk.Stand up and say aloud the names of the types of music.. Warm-up:(5 mins) ..Reading comprehension: better sts' reading skill through sentence completing and answering questions... . 2 sts from 2 pairs are 1.Listen and read after the T. Objectives: 1.Give answers orally..Others listen .Work in pairs to match. Anticipated problems: . Teaching aids: board. textbook. solemn.Students know more about the role of music in our life. .g.Listen and help sts to give correct match...Reading Teaching date Absentees 188 . and knowledge about some kinds of music. 3. II.2012 UNIT 12: MUSIC Period 73 : Class 10A 2 I. Education aims: .... Before you read:( 12 mins) .. mournful.Ask sts to work in pairs to match the .: hate.. General knowledge: .c required to give their match orally.Provide sts with the new words/phrases: + Emotion(n): a strong feeling e.Vocabulary. b. a. .….e 3.d 4. descriptions to the types of music given in the part: . .… Aims: To provide sts with words/phrases about music. love. 2.Students may not have enough words. . express notebooks.For each type of music. Skills: . .

4. feelings. others watch. not happy + Mournful(adj): sad . + Delight(v): To make somebody happy. integral part 5. .Ask sts to read the passage indepently then use the words/ phrases in the box to complete the sentences. .Listen to the T.Listen and repeat. It can express ideas. . Language and music. . . mournful .Read these words and check for their partner. solemn and mournful. It adds joyfulness to the atmosphere information in the passage that helps them to find of a festival and make a funeral more the correct answers. 1answer).5-6 sts from 5-6 groups are required to give 4. While you read:( 18 min) Aims: Read for information to do the sentence completing. . + Solemn(adj): serious. .Work individually. Lull 3. and answering excercises + Task 1: Sentence completing. Communicate 2.Some pairs report while others listen. more carefully and find the answers to the 2.English 10 + Lull sb (v): >< wake somebody up. . . . delights 4. 3.Read the words aloud. thoughts and questions given.Listen to the T . 1. .Listen and help the students to give correct answers. .Feedback and give remarks. After you read:( 9 mins) + Questions – Answers Aims: Students' summary about the roles of 189 . .Some pairs report their answers while + Task 2: Questions answering. .2012 .Read each word/phrase 3 times and ask sts to repeat it.Report their answers sentence by sentence. 2.Ask sts to work in pairs to read the passage 1.Ask sts to highlight or underline the 3. .Call on 7-8 sts to read and explain their answers aloud in front of the class(1 st/ 1 time/ 1 sentence).Listen to the T.Tell sts to refer to Vocabulary for help and encourage them try to guess the meanings of the words in the context of the reading. solemn 6. 5. emotion 7. . It makes people happy and excited. . 1.Leave sts 1 minute to self-practice.Work in pairs orally. answers in front of the class(1 st/ 1 time/ It delights the senses.Self-correct the work .Students do the work in pairs .Ask 4-5 sts to read all the word/phrases aloud in front of the class( 1 st/ 1 time) . School year: 2011 . Students tell 5 roles. .Listen and help sts to read the words/phrases correctly. + Funeral(n): a funaral is celebrated when someone dies. It is a billion-dollar industry. Students give their own ideas.

Skills: . IV. Knowledge: a. .Vocabulary about music.Listen and help sts to give correct answers. Language: . .The simple present tense. Education aims: .Ask sts to work in pairs to give answers to the questions given in the part.Talk about these singers. . EXPERIENCE: School year: 2011 . 2. . 3.Introduce the situation: You are going to read what . V. about their names.Talking about favourite kinds of music II. III. chalk. .Asking and answering questions about music. board.Students can talk about their favourite kinds of music. Objectives: 1.Students know about some favourite kind of music.Take notes . Homework:( 1 min) . Procedures: Teacher’s activities Students’ activities 1.Give sts some pictures of singers and ask sts . Anticipated problems: Sts may not have enough vocabulary to talk about the topic. Before you speak: ( 10 mins) Aims: : focus sts on the topic and introduce the words and phrases used in the task.2-3 pairs are required to give answers to one question orally in front of the class.Speaking Teaching date Absentees 2 I. b. pictures. name some of their songs.Write about the roles of music and which role is the most important.Go round to help sts with their work. + Task 1: Answering questions based on the reading text. . Ha Anh says about music. Teaching aids: Textbook. 2.up: ( 5 mins) Aims : get used to the topic. 5.English 10 music.Give sts some new words: + keep sb happy: make sb happy 190 . .Listen to the T.2012 Period 74: Class 10A B . . Warm. General knowledge: . .Ask sts what they know about these singers and . .Look at the pitures and give the names of some foreign singers.

Ask sts to form groups of 3.Listen and read the text . 2. The Backstreet Boys. + Task 3: Reporting on the information . reasons for listening to music.Before sts report T asks sts to look at the example and elicits some structures they can use: + Both A and B like …. .T.Listen and take notes. and so does B. The journalist has to ask two sts some questions and complete the table.. 4.Ask sts to report what they have got from their friends to the whole class. One of them will be a journalist who will interview their friends about their music taste. After you speak: (15 mins) Aims: Sts make group report.Listen to the T and take notes if necessary.Listen to the T. .Ask one st to read the passage aloud. 1..Ask sts what questions they can ask if they want to know about their friend’s favourite kind of music . too. but B prefers…. .Ask sts to look at the first column of the table which includes 5 items they should ask their friend about.Ask sts to prepare in one minute. School year: 2011 .Work in pairs to ask and answer the questions. . . . + A likes….. 3.English 10 + cheer sb up: make sb happier/more cheerful . . . .. She listens to music all the time . .Tell sts that they are going to ask your partners questions to get information to complete the table below. She likes pop music. E.Some sts present.Work in groups of 3: one will be a journalist and others will be students in the class.Go around to observe sts working. and expressions to talk about music: + make sb excited/relaxed. + A likes …and B does .While you speak: ( 13 minutes ) Aims: Sts can talk about their favourite kind of music. .. + help sb forget troubles and worries + relaxing/ peaceful. . + A likes…. . .. . may introduce some adj. .2012 . favourite band…….g: " Both Hoa and Binh like pop 191 . . 4.Some sts report in front of the class. . .Go around to help sts and collect the mistakes. Because it keeps her happy.Think of the questions and say aloud: + What kind of music do you like? + Why do you like it? + Who is your favourite singer/ musician? + What is your favourite song/piece of music? + When do you listen to music? ..Get feedback and give correct answers: 3. Sts can change their roles if time permits.Listen to the T.Listen to the T and read the information in the table. . + Task 2: Asking and answering about music taste.Ask some sts to present their answers in front of the class.Ask sts to work in pairs to ask and answer the questions.

.Some sts rarely listen to Van Cao's songs. EXPERIENCE: Period 75 : Class 10A C. 2. .. . III. give remarks." 5. Hoa likes it because it makes about their patners in front of the class.Where and when was he born? .Listening: choose True/ False statements and answer questions. Procedures: Teacher’s activities Students’ activities 1.Write a short paragraph about their friends' music taste... a.Ask one st to talk about what kind of music he One st presents.Can you name some of his famous songs? 192 .. Before you listen:(12 mins) Aims: focus sts on the topic and review/ introduce the words and phrases used in the listening text. 2. .Work in groups to say about the sts if they know the person in it. Skills: . cassette player. her relaxed while Binh likes it . ..Ask some pairs to ask and answer. Objectives: 1.Listening Teaching date Absentees 2 I. chalk.. board.Possible questions: . works..Sts know more about Van Cao and his music. V. IV.Introduce Van Cao.2012 .Listen to the teacher and then work the history of Vietnamese music then ask sts to in groups to discuss Van Cao's life and work in groups and ask about Van Cao's life and career.Tape. . Homework: (2 mins) . Hoa's favourite band is Westlife but Binh like Lam Truong very much.English 10 School year: 2011 . person in the picture. Others listen and likes best. Home work checking:(7 mins) . Teaching aids: . II. Anticipated problems: .Correct the Ss’ mistakes. Language: . 3. textbook..Speaking: discuss the one's ideas about Van Cao's music..Vocabulary on music..When did he start writing songs? . because it is easy to listen to.Ask some sts to report what they have found out music. the most famous musician in ..Was he born in a rich or poor family? . General knowledge: .Focus sts on the picture in the textbook and ask .

+ Task 2: Aims: Practise listening for specific information by answering given questions. 4. 2.Play the tape once again. T 4. .Work in pairs to read the questions. F The guess is Quang Hung.Trêng ca S«ng L« .Listen to the T.Ask sts to read the words in pairs.Work in pairs to guess if the statements are true or false.Ask sts to listen to the talk and tick the right column to indicate their answer and underline the false information.lyrical(adj): tr÷ t×nh .Read the words in pairs and correct each other’s mistakes. . After you listen:(8 mins) 193 .Ask sts to listen to the tape once/twice and take 1. F ( He always .g. . . F It was written in 1944. most. . stop the tape where 5. . .Tell sts that they are going to listen to a conversation between Lan Huong and Quang Hung about Quang Hung's opinion towards Van Cao's music.Compare their notes. . 3. b. and then correct their work if they have the wrong answer. correct their work if they have the wrong answer.. stop the tape where 3. . 128.Play the tape once again. ) .Compare their answer.Read the words and ask sts to repeat.English 10 What is his most famous one? .Suèi m¬ .Listen to the tape and do the task .. . his country. sure they understand the questions and know what . 1.Copy down the words and phrases into their notebooks. . look at the statements given and guess if they are true or false. .Lµng t«i .Ask sts to give their answer to the question in p.Listen and repeat. Introduce some new words . . School year: 2011 . .: TiÕn Qu©n Ca .Ask sts to work in pairs. 2. it makes him feel great and proud of necessary and conduct the correction.rousing (adj): hµo høng s«i næi . . information they need to answer the questions.Give their answer. .Ask sts to compare their answer in pairs. . It is 'My favourite Musician'. He likes the song 'Tien Quan Ca' short notes to answer the questions. and then necessary and conduct the correction.national anthem(n): E. . .Listen and do the task..Ask some sts to read the words again.solemn(adj): trang nghiªm . .Check their answer.Some individuals read the words aloud . While you listen:( 17 mins) + Task 1: Aims: Practise listening and marking True/ False statements.Check their answer. Because it is hard and solemn. .Ask sts to read the questions in pairs and make .F He likes some Vietnamese musicians 3..TiÕn qu©n ca .Ask sts to compare their answer in pairs.Check sts’ answer. T plays the tape twice.2012 Some sts stand up and give their answer.

The life story of a famous person.board. chalk.I (strongly) agree with him.Ask some pairs to present in front of the whole class. Education Aims: .I don't agree with him. General knowledge: . III. II. Homework:(1 min) Write a short paragraph about your opinion about Van Cao's Music V. 3. .Students can write a profile.Language used to write a profile . + Disagreeing: .Reading: read the information about Van Cao. . Objectives: 1. textbook. . .I share the same point of view with him. Teaching Aids: . Skills: . Hung's ideas about Van Cao's music. Homework checking :( 5 mins) 194 . 5. Language: .Ask sts to work in pairs and discuss Quang Hung's ideas about Van Cao's music. b. . EXPERIENCE: Period 76: Class 10A D .Check and give remarks. Knowledge: a. Anticipated problems: . Two sts present.2012 . IV.I don't share his point of view.I think his opinion is similar to mine.English 10 School year: 2011 . Procedures: Teacher's activities Students' activities 1.Writing: make up complete sentences about Scott Joplin. . using the prompts and write about the life story of Van Cao. .The past tenses . T may introduce some sentences to show one's opinion: + Agreeing: . . to-infinitive and the passive voice .I share his opinion. .Students may find it difficult to use the prompts to write a complete profile.Move round to check the activities and to make sure that sts are working effectively. . . 2.I'm sorry but I don't think so.WRITING Teaching date Absentees 2 I.Work in pairs revising Quang .

. .2012 . . .Get feedback and give remarks. personal life. . the place of 2. We use the past simple. . the date of birth/death.Listen to the teacher. .Write down the sentences into their notebooks.Check and give remarks. He learned to play music when he was very young. + rag (n): a Ragtime song + beat (n): nhÞp + 'talent (n): a natural skill/ ability. 2.Aims: to get sts to recognise what a profile is like and to read the information about Van Cao. All in all. . .Ask some sts to read these words again. He quickly became famous. . His tune were wonderful mixture of classical European and African beats which were known as Ragtime. 1. 1.Share their answer with their friends. . . Before you write:( 20 mins) .Read the prompts and do the task in pairs. he wrote 50 piano rags. . Scott Joplin died in 1917.Answer T's questions: by asking some questions: 1.Ask sts to read the prompts in task 1 and to make up complete sentences about Scott Joplin by adding suitable auxiliaries. in a newspaper article) +'mixture (n) : sù hoµ quyÖn +tune (n): giai ®iÖu + Ragtime (v) : a kind of music which is a mixture of classical European and African beats.Ask other sts to listen to their friend and give remarks.Copy down the words into theit notebooks.Listen to the teacher. profile? 195 . . What kind of information is included in a birth. family.Introduce the topic of the lesson: Writing a profile. Scott learned to play the works of composers like Bach. . Beethoven. .English 10 . articles or prepositions and appropriate verb tenses. and Mozart as well as to compose music.Ask one st to talk about his/her opinion about Quang Hung's ideas about Van Cao's music.Ask sts to listen and repeat and then copy down these words into their notebooks. .Focus sts on some points about writing a profile . .Ask sts to compare their answer with other sts.Move around to help if necessary. . . + 'talented (a): having talent + app'reciate (v): recognise sb's good qualities. . + Task 1: . 3.Listen to the teacher carefully. 2.Present their ideas.Introduce some new words: + 'profile (n): a report of a person ( usu. and was called the King of Ragtime. 5.Allow sts to work in pairs first to make up sentences orally and the write them down into their notebooks. School year: 2011 . 4.Some sts stand up and read again.Listen and repeat. 6. Which tense do you use? 2.Listen to their friend and give remarks. career.

5. Period 77: Class 10A 2 I. he started composing music when he was very young.Do the writing task.Part D (page 73 . His parents were poor workers. . EXPERIENCE: . School year: 2011 .Listen to the teacher. . Objectives: E . 4. Van Cao was also very good at other artistic works like song writing.English 10 + Task 2: .Ask sts to write down what they have discussed into their notebooks. 3. After you write:( 9 mins) Aims: to get feedback and check sts' work. However. . The song " Tien Quan Ca". 1923 in Nam Dinh. . poem writing and paintings.Ask them to refer to their writing in task 1 as a sample.1995.Let sts write in 10 minutes.LANGUAGE FOCUS Teaching date Absentees 196 .Read their writing: ( a sample paragraph) " Van Cao was born on the fifteenth of November. Homework: ( 1min) .If there is enough time.workbook).Move around to conduct the activity.Get feedback by asking some sts to read their work aloud. T can have sts exchange their writing among sts within a group so that they can check their friend's work and give remarks. While you write:( 10 mins) .Ask sts to read the information about Van Cao and to work in pairs to discuss how to write a profile about him. . V. His first song was written in 1939 and it quickly became famous.Aims: Sts practise writing about a life story of Van Cao. .Check and give the correct answer. He died on the tenth of July. . .Work in pairs to discuss. He was known as a very talented musician and highly appreciated by the Vietnamese people. .2012 . .Ask some other sts to give remarks. which is the national anthem of Vietnam. was written in 1944.

Check and give the correct answers. Procedures: Teacher's activities Students' activities 1.Aims: to introduce two sounds /s/ and /z / and help sts to practise these sounds.Ask them to work in pairs to read the sentences and then find out the words containing sound /s / and sound /z / .Look at the book .. .Ask one st to report and other sts to give remarks. .. 2... Ask sts to look at sentences in page 130 in the book. listen and repeat..Tell sts how to pronounce these sounds .Move around to conduct the activity.Check and give a mark.... + Reading: . .. .Ask them to look at the textbook. Homework checking: ( 5mins) ..Ask another st to give remarks..Students revise to-infinitive and Wh-questions. listen and piece peas repeat...Ask some sts to read these sentences aloud.Pronunciation: /s/ and/z/ ... ..Ask them to work in 2 minutes.. Anticipated problems: . ....Read the sentences silently to do the exercises. . . II. ... a.Ask two sts to read again and give remarks....Move around to help ..Look at the book and work in pairs. .Students know how to pronounce the sound /s/ and /z/ correctly.. III. Write two sounds on the board and pronounce ..Then ask sts to work in pairs to read the words for their partners.English 10 School year: 2011 .. b.. .. . Pronunciation:( 10 mins) .Answers: /s/ /z/ Susan music classical jazz sound records .Work in pairs to discuss the exercises.. . IV. Teaching aids: ... again so that they can check for each other. .2012 1.. them clearly twice. Skills: + Speaking: .. Knowledge: + Language: ..Give remarks.To-infinitive and Wh-questions.. . .. .. 197 . 2. .Read these words in pairs and check .Read the sentences.. ... chalk. accurately... ... . ...Listen and give remarks... then ask sts to repeat. front of the whole class..Ask one st to read the passage they wrote about .One st reads his/her writing aloud in Eric Clapton's life aloud.Listen to the teacher and repeat.Read words and sentences aloud.board. Education Aims:.. /s/ /z/ / z / : a voiced sound Sue zoo / s / : a voiceless sound sip zip .Students may confuse sound /s/ in English with sound / s / in Vietnamese.. 3... .Write down two sounds.Listen to the teacher. textbook.

.... Who wants to talk to you? 198 . I'm saving money to buy a cassette player 3. . 2. She practise singing all day to win the singing contest. to-infinitive: .Ask sts to do Ex 3 individually and then share the answers with their friends. what. .Move round to conduct the activity.operator inversion in the Wh question asking about the S. Note: . EX 2: Each st writes three sentences 1... .Ask sts to look at Ex1 and to do the task. .One st answers: Who.... to read 2.Move round to help if necessary. . to invite 5...Give examples.. .Listen to the teacher and take note. + Exercise 2: .g. . + Exercise 1: . + Note: . When did he leave for Ho Chi Minh City? 4.Ask sts to give some examples...Ask sts to tell the T the use of to-infinitive in these sentences...g.Move round to help if necessary.We can also use in order to or so as to to show purpose.English 10 3.Ask sts to do the exercise in pairs and then compare their answers with other pairs..2012 . b..: To keep fit.... What sort of music does your father enjoy listening to? 3. .. What will you do if it rains? 2.g.. to learn . a..Ask some sts to report. I phoned her to tell her good news. .Check and give remarks.Listen and correct their work if necessary....Listen to the teacher. when.: Who gave you that present? + Exercise 3: .Ask some pairs to report.Listen to the T and take note.The question element generally comes first in the sentence..Recall the use of to-infinitive by giving an example: e. .Listen to the teacher . Grammar: ( 29 mins) Aims: to revise to-infinitive and Wh-questions and have sts do Ex1. School year: 2011 . .. .We can put to-infinitive at the beginning or at the end of the sentence.Listen and give remarks. to buy 3.Ask one st to name some question words they have already known. . Wh-questions: ... .Some pairs report. which . ..Ask sts to do Ex 2 individually and then share the answers with their friends. . where.EX2 and EX3. e.Two sts write their answers on the board: 1. to send 4.to show purpose. . 1..: A: What did you buy this cassette player for? B: I bought this cassette player to study English. ... .Do the Ex individually. . . + Use: . you have to do morning exercises every day. e..There is no S ..Read the example and tell the whole class their ideas..

English 10 . What time does the film start? 7. 199 . . What did you spend the evening last night? 6.Part B( page 71 . EXPERIENCE: School year: 2011 . Anticipated problems: .Ask two sts to write their answers on the board. Who is your favourite musician? 8. Knowledge: a. 2.Students know more about the history of films.Vocabulary concerning music: scene.Reading comprehension: better sts' reading skill through finding the word meanings in contexts. ... textbook. Skills: .2012 5.Check and give remarks. chalk. character.Show sts some pictures of famous film stars or scenes in famous films in Vietnam amd in the . Procedures: Teacher’s activities Students’ activities 1.. Homework ( 1 min) ..The past simple tense. IV. Language: . II.Knowledge about films and cinema.. Why do you like pop music? UNIT 13: Period 78: Class 10A FILMS AND CINEMA A . General knowledge: . some pictures. III. Objectives: 1.Students may not have much knowledge and words/phrases about films and cinema. answering questions and identifying the main idea. . b.Speaking : talk in pairs and in groups. 3. Teaching aids: board.Reading Teaching date Absentees 2 I.Look at the T's pictures . camera.workbook) V. Education aims: . Warm-up:(5 mins) . 5.

Ask some sts to give answers.. .Listen and check.Ask sts to share their answers with their partners. .. a...Give answers orally...Ask sts to work in pairs to ask and answer the questions in Before you read... + Task 1: Finding the words in the passage .Report their answers one by one.Tell sts to refer to Vocabulary for help and encourage them try to guess the meanings of the words in contexts of the reading. . .....Others listen . .Students do the work in pairs .Some pairs report their answers while 200 . character .Listen to the T. . ..Leave sts 1 minute to self-practice.Ask 4-5 sts to read all the word/phrases aloud in front of the class( 1 st/ 1 time) ..Read these words and check for their partner.Vocabulary. 1. sequence 3.V because it is cheap and I may feel more comfortable. rapidly 5. . . .Work in pairs to ask and answer.Call on 6 sts to read their answers aloud in front of the class.Read the words aloud. I want to see a film on T. . .Listen and repeat..Go round to help if necessary.Listen and read after the T.Read each word/phrase 3 times and ask sts to repeat it...Work individually. 2.. .. to answer the questions and to find the best title for the passage. 1. Before you read:( 12 mins) Aims: To introduce the topic and provide sts with words/phrases about films and cinema. .2012 .Ask sts to say the names of these films and film stars. Sts may give different answers. .Get feedback and give remarks. + Task 2: Answering questions.Stand up and say aloud the names of the films and film stars. . ..Provide sts with the new words/phrases: + 'sequence (n):chuçi + motion (n): sù vËn ®éng + movement (n):sù chuyÓn ®éng + 'decade (n): 10 years + au'dience (n):kh¸n gi¶ + spread (v): lan réng ....Listen and help sts to read the words/phrases correctly. 3. scene 6...Get feedback and check. b.English 10 world.….. cinema 2.....Write down these words into their notebooks... . Answering questions: . ..Ask sts to read the passage indepently then read the definition given in task 1 and scan the passage to find the suitable words.I want to see a film at the cinema because I can see the latest film there.. .. While you read:( 18 min) Aims: Read for information to find the word meaning in contexts.…... .. School year: 2011 .. .… . a decade 4.Listen to the T .. . .

.Self-correct the work .Some presentatives of the groups are required to report in front of the class. . the sound was introduced at the end of the 1920s 6.. After you read:( 9 mins) Aims: Students' summary about the history of cinema.. They dicovered that when a sequence of still pictures were set in motion .Ask sts to work in pairs to read the passage more carefully and find the answers to the questions given. 2. + Task 3: . 1. 3. No.Read the passage again and choose the best title. . It began in the early 19th century.Ask sts to highlight or underline the information in the passage that helps them to find the correct answers. . 4.2012 others watch.Some sts report.Move round to help is necessary.Work in groups orally.Listen and help the students to give correct answers. they didn't. .SPEAKING Teaching date Absentees 201 .Listen and check.Ask sts to read the passage again individually and choose the best title for the passage. .. Homework:( 1 min) . B or C.6 pairs are required to give answers in front of the class..Listen to their friends and the T..Ask one or two sts to give answer and to explain why they choose A. 5. Audiences were able to see long films in the early 1910s. the musical cinema appeared. V.. . on the cues.Write a summary of the reading text basing on what they have discussed in After you read. .. . .Go round to help sts with their work.English 10 . School year: 2011 .... Answer: B ( A brief history only) ..Ask sts to look at the cues given and work in groups to talk about the history of cinema basing . 4. 5. As the old silent films were being replaced by spoken ones.. . EXPERIENCE: Period 79: Class 10A B . . . .Listen and help sts to give correct answers.Listen to the T.

2. .Listen and take notes each kind of films. Skills: . Teaching aids: Textbook. . 2. Procedures: Teacher’s activities Students’ activities 1...detective film of films . pictures... . b.Some sts give the answers. .Give sts some film posters on the board: film with the correct types. . + Task 2: Find out what your friends feel about .Listen and give remarks.action film 4.Vocabulary to describe films.. 3..English 10 School year: 2011 . Pearl Habour ( 4) .Look at the posters and match the . preferences II. boxes that suit their preferences for a particular .... .Ask sts to study the table on p.Compare with their partner’s. Anticipated problems: Sts might not have enough vocabulary to talk about the topic. board. 134 and tick the . S3: I don't like horror films at all.Asking and answering questions about film. They might also have difficulty in using the structure find + O+ Adj and confuse adjs with ending in –ing with those ending in -ed .. IV.2012 2 I.cartoon 2.Talking about favourite kinds of music. Objectives: 1. S2: I don't like cartoons very much. . (2) The Lord of the Rings (3) .. III.Sts may not have enough vocabulary to talk about the topic. S1: I like science fiction films very .up: ( 5 minutes ) Aims : to get used to the topic.... Education aims: .Expressing attitudes.Ask sts to compare their answers with a partner. Knowledge: a. dislikes.Listen and check.Ask sts to match the films with the correct types + Key: 1.Some sts report: type of films.While you speak: ( 20 minutes ) Aims: Sts can talk about their favourite type of films.. ... Before you speak:( 8 minutes) Aims: :to focus sts on the topic and to introduce the words and phrases used in the task.war film .The simple present tense.Give sts some new words: + violent (adj): b¹o lùc 202 .Students can talk about some favourite kinds of music. Language: . 3. .. + Names of the films: Shrek (1) The adventures of Sherlock Holmes. chalk. 3.. General knowledge: ...Students know about some kinds of film. + Task 1: .Look at the table and tick .Call on some sts to report their likes and much. Warm..

.. ..Listen to the T .. ..Go around to offer help. After you speak: (10 min ) Aims: Sts can talk about the film they have seen..... .Listen and correct their mistakes.Make sentences with the structure. .Go around to help sts if necessary .Write a short paragraph about a film they have already said about. . .. . + Task 3: Find out the preferences of your friend for films.. It is about the life of a soldier after the war.Divide the class into small groups of 3 and ask sts to find out what the others of their group feel about the given types of films.. .Go around to help sts. Right / Sure ! I don't quite agree with you.Call on some groups to practise the dialogues. .Read the new words orally and individually.. exactly Yes. A: What do yoy think of detective films? B: Oh.g: I saw " Sand life" at the cinema. E...Ask sts to work in groups to ask and answer about a film they have seen using the suggestions given in the textbook.Work in groups. . It is a love story film. . . . I feel sorry for the soldiers' life after the war.Two sts read the model conversation. which can be used to talk about one’s preferences.Ask sts to work in pairs and find out about their partner’s preference for a particular type of films. .. School year: 2011 . Yes.Ask some sts to read the model conversation in the textbook. 4... C: I think so. . . I like the film because of its humane value.Read the model aloud..Listen to the T. .Some sts report in front of the class. ...Ask some sts present in front of the class if the permits 5. 203 . I think they are good fun.Work in groups and ask some sts to present.. + Task 4: Talk about a film you have seen. .Work in pairs to ask and answer the similar questions..2012 .. ..Ask sts to make sentences with the structure.Ask sts to read the new words orally and individually .Call on two sts to read the model conversation in the textbook.. I find them exciting. + Agreement: + Disagreement: I agree I don't think so. basing on the model conversation. . .Introduce sts some expressions of agreement and disagreement..Ask some pairs to practise the dialogues. but .. Life with two wives is definitely not easy..Listen to the T. . thrillers or science fiction films? S2: Well. Homework: ( 2 min ) . .Listen and give remarks..English 10 + horrifying (adj) lµm khiÕp sî + moving (adj): c¶m ®éng + find + O + Adj . S1: Which do you prefer. .Ask sts to take turns to talk about the films they have seen.. . He has already been married but after the war he returns with another woman.. I suppose I prefer science fiction films to thrillers.Introduce the structure “ prefer st to st” ..

..Work in groups to list the a.instead (adv): in the place of st/ sb . cassette player..LISTENING Teaching date Absentees 2 I. . board.guess(v): predict. . .Listening: Listen for the main idea and fill in the chart . Homework checking:(7 mins) -Ask one sts to talk about a film he likes best.. Skills: . S3: I sometimes listen to the radio. .Listen and give remarks.Read the words in pairs and . .Speaking: Talk about sb's plans.Some sts read the words aloud.Ask sts to read the words in pairs.. 2. IV. . Language: .Compare their answers with a partner... huge (The name of a film) . Anticipated problems: . on the right column..2012 Period 80: Class 10A C . .Vocabulary on days of the week . .Tape.Note down the list on board: go to the cinema/ watch TV .One st presents.Copy the words and phrases.English 10 V.V.Sts know how some people can arrange to do st. Introduce some new words . III.. Objectives: 1.Ask some sts to speak aloud.Sts may not interested in "The Titanic" as it is an old film.. 2. . 3. .. General knowledge: . give an answer but do not know if it is right .Listen and repeat. .. . textbook. correct each other’s mistakes. chalk. .Stand up and give their answers. Ask sts to work in groups and list the types of entertainments entertainments.Read the words asks sts to repeat. Teaching aids: . II. 204 . EXPERIENCE: School year: 2011 .Listen to the T. b. Procedures: Teacher’s activities Students’ activities 1..ti'tanic (adj): great.Listen to their friends. . listen to music/ . S1: I never go to the cinema.Others listen and give remarks. Before you listen:(12 mins) Aims:to focus sts on the topic and to review/ introduce the words and phrases used in the listening text.Ask sts to read the table in the book and put a tick S2: I often watch T.su'ppose(v): think that st is true but not be sure .

Play the tape once again. While you listen:( 17 mins) + Task 1: Aims: Sts practise listening and marking True/ False statements. . T plays the tape once. .Ask sts to look at the chart again and find out if there is a day when both Lan and Huong are free to go to the cinema together. Lan Mon see a play Tue Wed Huong work ang go to singing club take Chinese classes Thu Fri . Homework:(1 min) Write a short paragraph about your plan for next Sat Sun visit grandparents work (busy) go on a picnic Key: Tuesday . . Lan and Huong.Ask sts to listen to the talk and answer the question: "What are they planning to do?".Tell sts that they are going to listen to a conversation between two friends. . . . 5. .Check their answer. . -Ask sts to have a look at the chart in pairs and make sure they know what information they need to fill in the blanks. . .Compare their notes.Exchange their answer.Work in pairs talking about the two people' plans .be going to + V . 205 .Play the tape once again and conduct the correction.English 10 School year: 2011 . . + Task 2: Aims: to practise listening for specific information by fillingin a chart.Ask sts to exchange their answer in pairs.Some sts present.Ask some sts to present in front of the whole class.Ask sts to work in pairs. .Check their answer and then correct their work if necessary.be V-ing . . . Sts give their answer. .Ask some sts to read the words again 3.Listen to the T. .Listen and do the task.Check and gives remarks. look at the picture and guess what the conversation is about.Gives their answer.Check sts’ answer. They are planning to go to the cinema together to see Titanic . After you listen:(8 mins) . . and then correct their work if necessary. -Work in pairs to guess what the conversation is about.Work in pairs to have a look at the chart.Ask sts to compare their answer in pairs. -Listen to the tape and do the task . 4.Move round to check the activities and to make sure that sts are working effectively.Revise some structures to show one's plans: .Ask sts to listen to the tape once/twice and take short notes to fill in the chart. stop the tape where necessary and conduct the correction.Study the chart and find out a day when both of the girls can go to the cinema. .Ask sts to work in pairs and use the chart to talk about Lan and Huong's plan for nextweek .2012 .

Listen and repeat. film. Procedures: Teacher's activities Students' activities 1. . + be engaged: ®Ýnh h«n + 'iceberg (n): t¶ng b¨ng tr«i .WRITING Teaching date School year: 2011 . 3. EXPERIENCE: Period 81: Class 10A D . .Listen to the teacher carefully.Introduce the topic of the lesson: describing a . textbook. Homework checking :( 5 mins) . 2.Ask one st to talk about Lan and Huong's plans . . Objectives: 1.Ask sts to listen and repeat and then copy down .Aims: to get sts to recognise how to describe a film and to read the information about the film Titanic.Language used to describe a film.Read the description of the film .2012 Absentees 2 I.Listen to the teacher. .Ask other sts to listen to their friend and give remarks. + Task 1: . .Listen to their friend and give for the next week. . .Writing: write about a film they have seen. about the film. V. Language: . . Before you write:( 20 mins) . Anticipated problems: .Introduce some new words: +'tragic (a): bi th¶m +'luxury (n) : sù xa hoa . IV. these words into their notebooks.Ask some sts to read these words again.The present tenses . General knowledge: .The film Titanic. remarks.Some sts stand up and read again. Education Aims: . . Skills: . 206 .Copy down the words into theit +'voyage (n): a long journey by sea notebooks.Students can write a description of a film.Students may find it difficult to write about the content of the film. III. Knowledge: a.Reading: read the description of the film Titanic and then answer the questions.English 10 week.Ask sts to read the description of the film Titanic in task 1 and to answer the Titanic in task 1 and to answer the questions questions about the film. II. 2.board.Check and give remarks. chalk. + ad'venturer (v) : ngêi thÝch phiªu lu. b. Teaching Aids: .

. T can have sts exchange best.. The name of the film is Titanic..Correct sts' mistakes if there are any.. 3.English 10 . While you write:( 10 mins) . 4. .Read their writing: ( a sample work aloud.Listen to the teacher.Listen to the teacher. . 4. . . 6.Aims: Sts practise writing a description of a film they have seen basing on the answers. It is made in America. 5.If there is enough time. . . " . The film is made in America. The main character is Scallet O'hara.Ask them to refer to the model description in task 1 if necessary. . .Move around to help if necessary..2012 . Jack is a young and generous adventurer.. paragraph) . 8. She is a 5. + Task 2: . It is a tragic love story film. It is based on the true story of Titanic. It has a sad ending.Do the writing task.Get feedback and give remarks. It is about the sinking of a luxury liner. 207 . It is based on the famous novel " Gone with the wind" written by Margaret Mitchell. 1. Gone with the wind" is the film I like . 3. 7.Work in pairs to ask and answer . questions to those in task 1.Think of a film that they have seen. .Move around to help if necessary and to check . .Move around to conduct the activity. about the films they have seen. .Work in pairs to ask and answer and then share their answer with their friends. School year: 2011 .Ask sts to compare their answer with other pairs. EX1:" Of all the films I have seen. " Gone with the wind" is a love their writing among sts within a group so that story film. in America.Check and give the correct answer. 2. .Allow sts to work in pairs to ask and answer the questions orally.Ask some other sts to give remarks.Let sts write in 10 minutes. After you write:( 9 mins) Aims: to get feedback and check sts' work.Ask sts to think of a film they have already seen and then work in pairs to ask and answer similar . .Allow sts to work in pairs in 5 minutes. Jack and Rose fall in love with each other. . The main character are Jack Dawson and Rose DeWitt Bukater.Present their ideas.Get feedback by asking some sts to read their . Homework: ( 1min) beautiful but ambitious woman.Ask sts to write down what they have discussed into their notebooks. It is about the change in a they can check their friend's work and give woman 's life during the civil war remarks.

Read words and sentences aloud.Adjectives of attitude. .Students learn about: .Adjectives of attitude.LANGUAGE FOCUS Teaching date Absentees 2 I. Knowledge: + Language: . Nobita Nobi. . Doraemon is a cartoon film.. EXPERIENCE: Period 82: Class 10A E . The film has a happy ending.Students know how to pronounce the sound /f/ and /v/ correctly. Shizuka.Students may find it difficult to distinguish adjectives ending in -ing from adjectives ending in -ed.Structure: It is/was not until . . who nd travels back in time from the 22 century to help a schoolboy.2012 EX2: Of all the film I have seen Doraemon is the one I like best..Work in pairs to discuss the exercises. Shizuka is a pretty girl. + Reading: . Skills: + Speaking: . School year: 2011 . chalk. . Objectives: 1. Gian and Sueno. that .Articles: a/an and the 2.Read the sentences silently to do the exercises.Part D (page 79 . textbook.Articles: a/an and the 3.Pronunciation: /f/ and/v/ .board.. . It is made in Japan. Anticipated problems: . III. V..Structure: It is/was not until . Teaching aids: . Nobita.English 10 . II. that ... Nobita is a clumsy student. Education Aims:. Sueno is a rich kid and Gian is selfish and violent. Doraemon is an itelligent robotic cat. The main characters are Doraemon.workbook). It is about a robotic cat named Doraemon . . 208 .

. ..English 10 IV. structure: " It is/was not until ...Write down two sounds... . ..Ask them to work in 2 minutes..Ask two sts to talk about the films they have seen.... Adjectives of attitude: . Grammar: ( 29 mins) Aims: to introduce adjectives of attitude. . .Look at the book and work in pairs. a.Ask another st to give remarks. .Check and give the correct answers.. .. Write two sounds on the board and pronounce them clearly twice. . ..Listen and give remarks. ..Move around to conduct the activity..Check and give a mark.. Homework checking: ( 5mins) .... Pronunciation:( 10 mins) .. ... . ....Ask some sts to read these sentences aloud. listen and repeat.2012 Students' activities .. . + Exercise 1: School year: 2011 ....Then ask sts to work in pairs to read the words again so that they can check for each other...Ask sts to pay attention to the length of two sounds.. . Procedures: Teacher's activities 1. 3..Answers: /f/ /v/ feels Stephen enough driving photograph van .Ask one st to report and other sts to give remarks.. / f / : a voiceless sound / v / : a voiced sound ...Aims: to introduce two sounds /f/ and /v / and help sts to practise these sounds. . a....Two sts talk about the films they have seen. . 209 . . EX 3 and EX4.. that .Listen to the teacher and repeat.Look at the book ...Ask them to do task 1.Give remarks.Ask them to look at the textbook.. .. Ask sts to look at sentences in page 139 in the book.Read the sentences. listen and repeat.Tell sts how to pronounce these sounds accurately. then ask sts to repeat."... .. b..Move around to help . .. 2.Ask them to work in pairs to read the sentences and then find out the words containing sound /f / and sound /v / .Listen to the teacher. articles: " a/an" and "the" and have sts do Ex1...Ask two sts to read again and give remarks..Read the instruction and the example and then do task 1.... /f/ /v/ fan van first vine form view .Firstly ask sts to read the instruction and the example in task 1....Read these words in pairs and check for their partners... . .EX2 . ..Listen to the teacher .

1..Some pairs report. horrifying 7.Move round to conduct the activity.2012 Key: 1. that . . .Ask some sts to report.. .Move round to help if necessary. .. I 've read it twice.One st tells the difference: + The -ing adjectives: the nature of sth/sb + The -ed adjectives: how sb feels (about sth)... surprising 9.interesting 3..Ask sts to do Ex 3 individually and then share the answers with their friends. I did not start to learn English until 1995. School year: 2011 . . amusing .depressed 2. boring .g: Mary didn't know how to make cakes until I taught her... 1990 that she became a teacher. . fascinating 3. exciting 4. = It was not until 1995 that I started to learn English. . It is/was not until .Check and give remarks.Ask two sts to write their answers on the board. . . = It was not until I taught Mary that she knew how to make cakes. .Listen to the T. EX3: 1. . . the lights were on that the fooball match started. .I am interested in this book.. .Listen and correct their work if necessary.Look at the example.g: interest => interesting and interested ... .Look at the board and give remarks.. exhausting .Tell the T that the second sentences are more emphatic. . boring 8.Ask sts to do task 2.. 1980 that they began to learn English. . terrifying 5....Move round to help if necessary.Ask sts to do Ex 2 individually and then share the answers with their friends...Ask sts to look at the example and tell the difference E.Pay attention to the underlined parts. . irritating 6. 2. embarrassing 10.Ask two sts to write the adjectival forms of the verbs on the board.. .Ask sts to read the examples and tell the teacher which sentences are more emphatic. .This book is interesting.. his father came home that the boy did his homework.. frustrating 2.. ... b. depressing . 3. One ends in -ing and the other ends in -ed. 4. : .English 10 .Check and give remarks. 210 . ..Listen to the teacher. + Exercise 3: .Give examples so that sts can see the use as well as the form of this structure: E... interested .bored 4. + Tell sts that there may be two adjectival forms of a verb. + Exercise 2: ...Read the examples. 5..Ask sts to compare their answers with other sts..Do the Ex individually.. excited .exhausted .exciting 5. . he was 30 that he knew how to swim.

.. 3.. Warm-up:(5 mins) ... .g: I have a cat and a dog. 5.. Teaching aids: board.. Before you read:( 12 mins) . textbook. . Language: .a.. IV.… 211 .a. . . .Ask some sts to report.Knowledge about the World Cup. Objectives: 1.Part B( page 77 . .….Ask sts what they know about the 2006 World .Do the exercise in pairs.2012 . A/an and the .. The cat is lazy and the dog is intelligent.Move round to help if necessary. trophy.a .. Skills: .Speaking : talk in pairs and in groups. 2..the.the 4.. Knowledge: a.. . the.Look at the T's pictures ....workbook) V.Reading comprehension: better sts' reading skill through matching the words in A with the definitions in B..English 10 c.the 3. .Students may not have much knowledge and words/phrases about sport.Show sts some pictures of the 2006 World Cup tournament.Listen and correct their work if necessary.Give an example so that sts can revise the use of these articles: E. Education aims: .Check and give remarks..a.Ask sts to do this execise in pairs..a.Read the example and the tell the T the use of these articles: + A/an: indefinite articles.. A/an + N (sing) + The: definite article. a.Stand up and say aloud what they Cup tournament.the.…. an. EXPERIENCE: School year: 2011 .. II. Procedures: Teacher’s activities Students’ activities 1.Vocabulary concerning sport: tournament.... chalk... UNIT 14: THE WORLD CUP Period 83: A ..... know about the latest World Cup .. . General knowledge: .Some sts report: 1.READING Class Teaching date Absentees 10A 2 I. some pictures.the 2.Get feedback and check..Students know more about the World Cup.the..the..the. III..the. + Exercise 4: . final. sentence completing and marking true/false statements. an. Anticipated problems: . The + N . 2..The passive. tournament....Ask sts to do Ex 4.. Homework ( 1 min) . b.

.Read each word/phrase 3 times and ask sts to . answers. .Vocabulary..Give answers orally. 3.Work individually.. .Ask sts to scan the passage independently then complete each sentence with a word or a .Listen to the T of the class..e ..a partners.Tell sts to refer to Vocabulary for help and encourage them to try to guess the meanings of the words in contexts of the reading.Write down these words into their + 'honoured title (n): danh hiÖu cao quý notebooks. front of the class( 1 st/ 1 time) .Ask 4-5 sts to read all the word/phrases aloud in . .Read the words aloud.... correctly. . Answering questions: . .. Germany was.Ask sts to read the passage independently then read the words as well as the definitions given in . 2.. 5-d .Tell sts to refer to Vocabulary for help and encourage them to try to scan the information as ..Ask sts to work in pairs to ask and answer the questions in Before you read. + 'final (n): chung kÕt + 'witness (v): chøng kiÕn + elimi'nation game (n): trËn ®Êu lo¹i .. + Task 1: Matching: .....English 10 School year: 2011 .Read these words and check for their partner.. repeat it.Work in pairs to compare their fast as possible. . + 'victory (n): chiÕn th¾ng . . to do sentence completing and to mark true/false statements. .. . b.Listen and check.Work in pairs to ask and answer.Report their answers one by one.2012 Aims: To introduce the topic and provide sts with words/phrases about the World Cup...Leave sts 1 minute to self-practice. answers.Provide sts with the new words/phrases: + 'tournament (n): gi¶i ®Êu .Scan the passage and find the number.. Sts may give different . 3.Others listen . task 1 and scan the passage to match.. . .Listen and repeat. a.b 2-c 3 . . While you read:( 18 min) Aims: Read for information to match the words in A with the definitions in B. Brazil did....Ask some sts to give answers. . 212 .Get feedback and give remarks..... ... information..Listen to the T.. ...Ask sts to share their answers with their 1.Go round to help if necessary. + Task 2: Sentence completing.Listen and help sts to read the words/phrases . It was held in Japan and Korea. 1.Call on 5 sts to read their answers aloud in front 4 ..Listen and read after the T.

. E. period 84: Class 10A B .Asking and answering questions about the World Cup. Knowledge: a... Objectives: 1. .Ask 5 sts to give answers. 32 3..Present their ideas: 1. .The simple present tense..Talking about the World Cup winners... + Task 3: . . Argentina 4. .Call on 5 sts to read and explain their answers aloud in front of the class.Move round to help and ask sts to share their ideas..Work in groups orally. 26 . .Listen to their friends and the T. has won the trophy 5 times ) . After you read:( 9 mins) Aims: Students' summary of the reading passage.Vocabulary about football . Homework:( 1 min) .. .g: 13 is the number of teams that took part in the first tournament.. .SPEAKING Teaching date Absentees 2 I.. General knowledge: .Some presentatives of the groups are required to report in front of the class.. 1930 is the year when the first World Cup was held..Read the passage again and mark true/false statements. Skills: . .. 5. F ( every four years) 3.. Language: .. . 1.Feedback and give remarks.. one 5.English 10 ...Students know about the World Cup.Write a summary of the reading text basing on what they have discussed in After you read.Some sts report. 2. b.2012 ... T 5.Listen and check..Listen and help sts to give correct answers. . .Listen to the T... 4. F ( .Report their answers sentence by sentence.Ask sts to read the passage again individually and mark true/false statements.. Teaching aids: 213 .. 3.. . II.... . .Ask sts to share the answers with their friends and correct the false sentences. . Education aims: . T 4. III. Anticipated problems: Sts might not have sufficient vocabulary to talk about the topic. F ( in 1930) 2...Listen to the T . ... .Students can talk about the World Cup winners.Go round to help sts with their work.Move around to help.Ask sts to look at the figures and work in groups to talk about the events mentioned in the passage. EXPERIENCE: School year: 2011 . V. 13 2.

posters. . 3. a score of 1. board. Textbook. Who was the captain of the English national football team in World Cup 2006? Q8. 2. + Task 2: . Which team was the runner-up in the World Cup 2006? Q5.Listen and write down these words into their notebooks.up: ( 5 minutes) Jumble words Aims :Sts get used to the topic.Ask S to name the team in the photos on page 145: . Warm. While you speak: ( 15 minutes) Aims: Sts can talk about the World Cup tournaments.Germany .Listen to their friends and check. Zinedine Zidane 3. Who beat England in the World Cup 2006 quarter final? . .Work in groups and find out the words. What was the score of the World Cup 2006 final? Q4. .Ask sts to work in groups. . chalk.Write some groups of letters on the board.1( Italy won the game 5 .Give S some handouts and in each handout T writes two questions about the four football teams: Q1. . 4. Who was the captain of the French national football team in World Cup 2006? Q3.Read the table in 2 minutes.Ask some Ss to answer the questions. 1. How many times has Italy won the trophy up to World Cup 2006? Q2.England 3. Portugal (by 3-1) .host country.Jurgen Klinsmann 6. .Go around to check that S work and speak English. Procedures: Teacher’s activities 1. 5.Listen to the T.g.Ask sts to work in groups to answer the questions.Divide the class into small groups of 3 or 4 and introduce the games: Sts are to rearrange the letters into meaning words. . France. Who was the head coach of the German team in World Cup 2006? Q6.Before doing the task T give S some new words: + draw (v.2012 Students’ activities .Listen to the T and then some sts 214 .English 10 School year: 2011 .3 in a penalty shoout. IV.France 4.David Beckam 8.n): e. What nationality was the top scorer in World Cup 2006? Q7. .Answer the question of the T.Ask some goups to give answers .out . Before you speak: (12 minutes) Aims: :to focus sts on the topic and introduce the words and phrases used in the task. champion. German 7. Answer: 1.Answers: winner. + Task 1: A World Cup 2002 quiz . 4 times 2. runnerup. handouts.1 + lose the match to sb + defeat sb: beat sb + penalty shoot .Introduce the new lesson: Today we will talk about the World Cups. 1 .Italy 2. . . .out. score.

Work in pairs to make similar dialogues..Ask some pairs to report. . 2.Ask some Sts to talk about different World Cup if time permit.Some sts do not like football and have not heard the name of Pele. .Ask Sts to read the model in the textbook. S3: Which teams played in the final match? S4: Italy and Czechoslovakia. 4..Some Sts read the model... . EXPERIENCE: period 85: C . ..Ask sts to compare their answers with other pairs. and answer the questions. After you speak: ( 10 minutes) Aim: S can talk about the World Cup winners + Task 3: .Work in group to talk about the WC winners. V.Listening: Listen and fill in the table.. Anticipated problems: . .Ask sts to read the information about 17 World Cup tournaments in the table. Brazil becema the champion and Germany was the runner. 5... II. .. .Ask sts to work in pairs to make similar dialogues about the World Cup tournaments.up. .Ask Sts to work in groups and take turns to talk about the WC winner in a certain year.Introduce the task: S are going to take turns to talk about the World Cup winners in different years..... . Objectives: 1...Read the model dialogue aloud and then ask two pairs to read the dialogue again.. ..LISTENING Class Teaching date 10A . Suggested answer: The 17th World Cup was help in Korea and Japan in 2002.. .Listen to the T... Homework:( 2 minutes ) Write a paragraph to talk about World Cup 2006....Go around to check and to offer help.Some Sts present in front of the class. .. Skills: .Listen to the T.2012 read the model again. Absentees 2 I. ..The simple past tense. 3..Vocabulary on football. . Language: . General knowledge: . Teaching aids: 215 . III. .English 10 School year: 2011 . the most famous footballer in the world.Sts know some information about PelÐ. . .Move round to make sure that Sts are working and to help if necessary. The final match was between Brazil and Germany. . Brazil defeated Germany by 2 to 0. . .Listen and give remarks..Speaking: Talk about important events in Pele's life.Say aloud their dialogues: S1: Where was the second World Cup held? S2: It was held in Italy....

b.Others listen and give remark.participate in (v): take part in . the name of their football clubs. Pele 2. Before you listen:(12mins) Aims: to focus sts on the topic and to review/ introduce the words and phrases used in the listening text. . . . Introduce some new words . Procedures: Teacher’s activities 1. Homework checking:(7 mins) .kick (v):( miming) -control(v): to make people/ things do what you want. Year Events (1) Born in Brazil 1940 19 (2) Joined in a Brazilian 56 football club (3) First world cup 1962 championship (4) 1200th goal 1974 19 (5) Retired 77 216 . chalk. -Read the words and ask sts to repeat.Copy the words and phrases.ambassador(n) ®¹i sø .Tell sts that they are going to listen to a talk about Pele.Ask one st to talk about some World Cup tournaments. their nationalities. 2.Ask sts to read the words in pairs.Ask sts to listen to the tape twice and take short notes to fill in the table.2012 Students’ activities .. cassette player. IV.Discuss the players in the pictures . Ask sts to work in groups and talk about their favourite football players.English 10 School year: 2011 ..Some sts stand up and give their answers.. .Some sts report.One st presents.. + Task 2: .Ask sts to work in groups again to look at the pictures in the textbook and discuss the football players in the pictures. . . While you listen:(17 mins) + Task 1: Aims: Sts practise listening for specific information by filling in a table. .as a/ an.. . Barthez 5..Listen and give remarks.Ask sts to have a look at the table in pairs and make sure they know what information they need to fill in the blanks. .Listen and do the task.Some individuals read the words aloud Sts listen to the T.Read the words in pairs and correct each other’s mistakes.. board. 3. .Ask sts to compare their answers in pairs. a. .Compare their notes. 1. . . .Ask some sts to read the words again. Sts work in pairs to have a look at the table. .Tape.Play the tape once again. Maradona 3.Ask some sts to report. . : When he/ she was a/an... textbook.Work in groups to talk about their favourite football players . .Listen and repeat. . stop the tape where necessary and conduct the correction. Beckham .. Zidane 4. . .promote(v):to help the progress of st.

V. He was fanous for his powerful .Ask some sts to report. necessary and conduct the correction. Sts work in pairs to read the questions Aims: Sts practsce listening for specific information by answering questions.Reading: read the model announcement.Ask sts to compare their answer in pairs. and then correct their work if they have wrong answers. After you listen:(8 mins) football club before he retired.Work in pairs to talk about Pele's 5.An announcement concerning football. important events in Pele's life .Students can write an announcement. Language: .2012 .Compare their answer. .Ask some sts to present in front of the whole class. . 3. . 2.WRITING Class Teaching date 10A Absentees 2 I. . II. .Write a short paragraph about Pele. . .Check their answer. Homework:(1 min) life. EXPERIENCE: Period 86: D . . .Language used to write an announcement. Skills: .Ask sts to work in pairs and use the information in 4. .Some sts report.Play the tape once again.The future tenses and the passive voice.Check their answer. He became an international the table and the answers in Task 2 to talk about ambassador for the sport. . . He participated in 3 World Cups. Knowledge: a. 2. Objectives: 1. He played for an American 4. stop the tape where kicking and controlling the ball.Listen and do the task. wrong answer. . b. and then . 3.Check and give remarks.English 10 School year: 2011 . .Move round to check the activities and to make correct their work if they have the sure that sts are working effectively.Writing: write an announcement.Speaking: discuss in pairs. 1. .Some sts present. . General knowledge: .Ask sts to listen to the tape twice and take short notes to answer the questions. Anticipated problems: 217 .Ask sts to read the questions in pairs and make sure they understand the questions. Education Aims: .

IV. Homework checking :( 5 mins) . 2.Ask sts to read the announcement in their then share their answer with their notebooks and then work in pairs to answer the friends. life.Ask sts to listen and repeat and then copy down . The match will be played at 3 p.Some pairs report.Copy down the words into theit + announcement (n): th«ng b¸o notebooks.Ask them to work in pairs to answer the similar . The national football championship questions orally. . . + Situation 1: 218 . .Aims: to get sts to know how to write an announcement.Tell sts that these four questions are the main . + co'mmittee (n): uû ban + post'pone (v):tr× ho·n +due to (prep): v×. April 25th.Move around to help if necessary.Work in pairs to ask and answer and . The match between Nam Dinh and .board. pairs.Check and give remarks. Procedures: Teacher's activities Students' activities 1.m on Sunday.Students are not familiar with this type of writing.Introduce some new words: +a'nnounce (v): th«ng b¸o + a'nnouncer (n):ngêi th«ng b¸o . remarks.Ask one st to talk about the milestones in Pele's . + Task 1: . 4. III.Read the announcement in pairs and these words into their notebooks.Ask sts to read two situations in task 2. Before you write:( 20 mins) .Listen to the teacher. contents of an announcement. . .Listen and repeat.Work in pairs to discuss two situations.Allow sts to work in pairs to ask and answer the . . 2.Present their ideas. 1.Introduce the topic of the lesson: Writing an . Teaching Aids: .Listen to their friend and give remarks. annoucement. It will be played at My Dinh national .Get feedback and give remarks. textbook. + Task 2: . ChÝ Minh .Listen to the teacher carefully.Ask some sts to read these words again. . 3.Ask other sts to listen to their friend and give . then answer the questions that follow.2012 .Read two situations. . . . organizing committee is.Ask sts to compare their answer with other Binh Duong. + con'tact (v):liªn l¹c + The Ho Chi Minh Communist Youth Union : §oµn Thanh niªn Céng S¶n Hå . do + se'vere (adj) : very bad. .Listen to the teacher. Stadium. questions that follow. chalk.English 10 School year: 2011 . .Some sts stand up and read again.

.Ask some pairs to report. 3. . .m on Sunday. T can have sts exchange their writing among sts within a group so that they can check their friend's work and give remarks. . .Move around to conduct the activity.Ask sts to create the time and the place of the meeting in the first situation. . The HCM Communist Youth Union of NT High School. 3. Homework: ( 1min) . . The team are looking for new players for the new football season.If there is enough time. After you write:( 9 mins) Aims: to get feedback and check sts' work.Read their writing: ( a model announcement) " Tra Linh High School Football Team wishes to announce that the team are looking for new players for the new football season.Correct sts' mistakes if there are any. 2. . .2012 1. + Situation 2: 1. 3. The first meeting of volunteers will be at 7 p. . April 20th. It will be at Hai Duong Central Stadium. April 15th. The first meeting will take place at 7 p. you can contact Nguyen Van Ba. V. April 15th at Tra Linh playground. .Allow sts to work in pairs in 5 minutes.Ask them to refer to the model announcement in task 1 if necessary. 2.English 10 questions to those in task 1.m on Sunday. It will be played in the football field of New Stars Football Club. 4. .Ask sts to write down what they have discussed into their notebooks. Nguyen Trai High School Football Team. School year: 2011 . Volunteers must be good at football and are students of Tra Linh High School.Do the writing task.m on Sunday.LANGUAGE FOCUS 219 . 4. It will be played at 5 p.If you want any further information. . EXPERIENCE: . While you write:( 10 mins) . A friendly match with New Stars Football Club. 5. class 10 A2 or at 3880178.Check and give the correct answer.Listen to the teacher.Let sts write in 10 minutes. .Part D (page 84 .workbook). . . 4.Get feedback by asking some sts to read their work aloud." Period 87: E .Ask sts compare their answers with other pairs.Move around to help if necessary and to check .Ask some other sts to give remarks.Aims: Sts practise writing one of the two situations.

English 10 Class 10A Teaching date School year: 2011 ...Ask another st to give remarks...Tell sts how to pronounce these sounds . .Write down two sounds.. 2. Objectives: 1.Students may not know the difference between will and be going to.. Ask sts to look at sentences in page 150 in the book.. wrote aloud.. Education Aims:.... group scored . . a..2012 Absentees 2 I..The uses of will.Check and give marks.board. for their partners. Anticipated problems: .. Teaching aids: ..Ask two sts to read the announcements they ..Read these words in pairs and check repeat... .Give remarks.Move around to help . 2. /g/ /k/ / k / : a voiceless sound group club / g / : a voiced sound game kick .. Pronunciation:( 10 mins) .The uses of will.. Write two sounds on the board and pronounce ..The difference between will and be going to. Students revise: .Ask them to work in pairs to read the sentences goal took and then find out the words containing sound Uruguay cat /g / and sound /k / .Then ask sts to work in pairs to read the words again so that they can check for each other... .Work in pairs to discuss the exercises.Ask two sts to read again and give remarks. then ask sts to repeat... ....Two sts read the announcements aloud.Will vs...Answers: .Read words and sentences aloud. + Reading: ...... listen and . 3. chalk. .Ask them to look at the textbook.. . .Listen to the teacher and repeat.Aims: to introduce two sounds /g/ and /k / and help sts to practise these sounds.Look at the book . be going to. .. them clearly twice. Procedures: Teacher's activities Students' activities 1. listen and repeat.. ..Pronunciation: /g/ and/k/ .. Knowledge: + Language: .. . .. Skills: + Speaking: .Students know how to pronounce the sound /g/ and /k/ correctly.Read the sentences silently to do the exercises.Listen to the teacher..Look at the book and work in pairs. IV. .. /g/ /k/ b. . .. textbook. ...Ask sts to pay attention to the length of two together cup sounds.... 220 .. .. Homework checking: ( 5mins) .. III. II.. accurately...

+ Be going to: to talk about intentions/ decisions which are made before we report them..Listen and correct their work if necessary.Ask sts to do task 1.Firstly ask sts to look at the examples and tell the difference E.. . + Exercise 2: . . B: Ask Jack for some money.Listen to the S and give remarks. b. EX2: 1. I'm going to wash 3. . .English 10 . I will have 7. . + Exercise 3: ..Read the sentences.Some pairs report.Ask sts to read the examples and tell the teacher the use of will in this situation.g: A: I like that car very much but I don't have enough money to buy it.A: Why did you buy so much paint? B: I'm going to repaint my bedroom tomorrow. a. please.2012 . . . School year: 2011 .EX2 and EX3. won't lend me any money 3. . . I'm going to buy 5. 221 . it will rain today 4. ..Ask one st to report and other sts to give remarks..Pay attention to the underlined part. and have sts do EX1. will vs.. I'm sure he will lend you some. . .. .Move round to help if necessary..Ask them to work in 2 minutes.. .. . .Move round to help if necessary. and the uses of will.he will help . 1. 2.. will have to wear glasses 5.Ask some pairs to report.. . . E. are you going to paint 4.Move around to conduct the activity. .. He is rich and generous..Give an example so that sts can remember the use of will.Listen and give remarks.Ask two sts to write their answers on the board. Grammar: ( 29 mins) Aims: to revise the difference between will and be going to.Ask some sts to read these sentences aloud. will have a headache 6.Listen to the teacher. I'll show 6. I will fail .Check and give the correct answers. . Husband: Ok. won't like it 7. .Pay attention to the underlined part.Read the example.Wife: This dress looks beautiful.Ask sts to do Ex2 individually and then share the answers with their friends. I will buy it for you.Ask sts to do Ex 1 in pairs and then share the answers with their friends. . ..Listen to the T.Check and give remarks. I'll get 2. . . .Look at the examples.Read the example. . be going to: . Will: making predictions ..Do the Ex individually.Tell the T that will is used to talk about what the speaker predicts about the future. . 3.One st tells the difference: + Will: to talk about the future and the decision is made at the moment of speaking.g: . It must fit me well. I will do .

..Sts revise what they have learned in unit 12. 3..Tell the T the use of will in this situation: to make offer/ to show willingness. ..Part B( page 81 . . . Aims: .Ask one st to give remarks. III. we'll meet .. part IV: 222 . unit 13 and unit 14.workbook) V.. she'll come.. 2. 2.Some pairs report: 1.Give an example so that sts can revise the use of will: E... chalk... Procedures: Teacher's activities Students' activities 1.Give sts the time duration for each part : part II: 10 minutes. . Homework checking:( 5 mins) . II.Ask sts to do part II.. .. 6.Ask sts to do Ex 3.. 3. part III: 10 minutes. 5. . I'll take you there. Objectives: 1.Check and give remarks.Give remarks and marks.. .Move round to help if necessary. . 4. you will get . you will like. part III and part IV at home in advance to save time. .g: A: I'm so tired but I still have a lot of work to do. 4. 5.General knowledge in unit 12.Ask sts to do this execise in pairs..Ask one st to do Ex 4 in the workbook on EX 4: the board. I will help you to finish it. 8. I'll be. I'll give you a helping hand. The new lesson:( 39 minutes) .. It will look . Period 88: Class 10A TEST YOURSELF E Teaching date Absentees 2 I. c. I'll open it.English 10 .. unit 13 and unit 14. 2. I will make you a glass of orange juice..2012 .... Knowledge: . 2.Do the exercise in pairs.Language: pronunciation and grammar in the above units... Will: making offer . + Exercise 3: . . 7. 3.Listen and correct their work if necessary.... Homework ( 1 min) ... Skills: listening. Teaching aids: textbook. .Ask some sts to report. B: Oh.. board.. speaking and writing. I'll lend you some. EXPERIENCE: School year: 2011 .. 5. . They'll be.One st gives remarks....Check and give remarks.

Mountain 4.Ask sts to share their answers with their friends. . Sometimes parents. . 1.... 0.1.... 2.English 10 15 minutes......Ask other sts to give remarks..Listen and read after the teacher. 5..Ask some sts to report. 0 5. 8. 1. students 3. .. the . 2.Play the tape twice and ask sts to do the task. .Check and give feedback.Ask sts to work in groups to compare their answers... a.. Grammar: 2... 6.Ask sts to discuss their answers in groups. ....V..Copy down these words into their notebooks.. .Answers: 1... 3...Try to focus on the important words.. 7.. the 9.. to-infinitive: .. 2...2012 . the ....Ask sts to do listening in class...... .1. .Ask two other sts to give remarks..... .. Reading: . ..Ask sts to read the requirement of the task. a ...... 4..... 223 .Work in pairs to discuss their answers. ..Write these sentences on the board... 2. 2. 8. The whole school does..30 .. ... .. Listening: . 2...Compare their answers with their parners. 10. 0 .. 2. the . friends and other students will travel with them.Ask some sts to report his/ her answers aloud...the . 7. I wrote them a letter to thank them for the weekend.Introduce new words: + 'Jupiter (n): Sao Méc + senior citizen (n): ngêi giµ + re'duce (v): gi¶m . ..Listen carefully and do the task... .Check and give the correct answers..Ask sts to share their ideas with their partners. . ..He/She has to do a lot of practice and often spends a Saturday or Sunday away from home.... .Some sts stand up to report.Listen and check..3. .Discuss in groups. No. They are often played on Saturdays and Sundays.. ...... . School year: 2011 ...... ...work in groups to share their ideas. . are reduced 5..Check and give remarks. 1.Some sts report. To play against other school teams.. .Ask 2 sts to write on the board.45 2.Get feedback and play the tape again so that sts can check their answers.Look at the textbook and read the statements.2.2.3.. I stayed in to watch a film on T. 4.. 3..3.

Ask some sts to give remarks. He lives with his first wife now. The ship he worked on was sailing to the UK. You should go to Britain to improve your English. Listen carefully and decide if the following statements are true or false. Both of his daughters have become drug addicts. 7. He loves travels and he has visited every country in the world.Read their writing aloud " The monitor of class 10A2 wishes to announce that the musical performance of class 10A2 to raise money for the people in the flooded areas will be held at 7. The ticket price is 5. . 3. She went to university to study egineering. He became a millionaire when he was 35.4. 5.Listen to the teacher's remarks. 8.Part A ( Page 80 . Neither he nor his brother is happy. Writing: .English 10 2." . 9. 2. Listening: You are going to listen to a talk about Maximilian.000 VND. 10. Homework: ( 1 min) . After leaving school. You will listen to the tape twice. Maximilian worked on his brother's farm. Reading: 224 . 5. He left the village when he was 18. November 23rd in the school meeting hall. You should book your tickets well in advance to see that football match. 3.workbook) V. 4. . EXPERIENCE: Period 89+90: WRITTEN TEST 45' + CORRECT THE TEST Class Teaching date Absentees 10A 2 I. School year: 2011 .2012 3.m on Thursday. II. Tick in the right box to indicate your answer.Ask some sts to read their writing aloud. 4. His first wife was a model. T F 1.30 p. He made a lot of money on Wall Street. 6.

................................ ....................... ..................... She/ leave/ high school/ when/ she/ 16/ and/ go/ Los Angeles . elimination tournaments f.......................... 4.................................... .... 6............................ viewed and followed i....................... III....... ........................... Only seven nations have won the World Cup Finals..... . 1977/ she/ decide/ turn/ acting/ again.. by more than one billion people.... ................ 2............. (2)............................ 1946/ El Centro/ the USA.. 7....... However.................. a. The final match of the 2002 World Cup (10)....................... Writing: Use the prompts below to make up complete sentences about Cher.. ................................... host nation g................ ...................................... She/ plan/ take/ acting lessons/ there...........2012 Complete the following passage by choosing one of the given phrases to fill in each blank................... was watched b........... sporting event in the world.... organised by d........ 3.... The World Cup Finals is the most widely (9)................... phase (often called the "Finalists") involves 32 national teams competing over a four-week period in a previously nominated (7).............English 10 School year: 2011 .................................................................. the final tournament World Cup is the most important competition in international football....... The (6) .................................................. every four years e.................. of the competition (which narrows the field of as many as 197 teams down to the final 32 teams) take place over a three-year period..................................................... .................. was held k......................... The most recent football World Cup (8)..................................................................................... using regional (5)........................... The World Cup is held (3) ..................................................... but the (4)..................... and the world's most reprentative team sport event... Cher/ get married/ twice/ and/ have/ a daughter/ a son.... she/ meet/ Salvatore Bono/ there/ and/ become/ famous singer/ when/ she/ only/ 19.............. the World Cup is contested by men's national football teams which are FIFA members............ Cher/ win/ Best Actress/ the Cannes Film Festival/ 1985/ and/ Oscar/ 1987.. (1) .... (except in times of war)........... the sport's governing body h.. 225 .................. ................................ 1........... Cher/ born/ May 20th..... 2006.... Federation Internationale de Football Association (FIFA)...... a famous American pop star..... ................................................. elimination rounds c.......... in Germany between June 9 and July 10..... 5.................

.. Since then he has been part of the international jet set............... Choose the word that has the underlined part pronounced differently from the others... Listening: + key: 1... I've made a lot of money.... 4. Complete the second sentence so that it it has a similar meaning to the first one......... It was not. but she died two years later in a car crash.... He's had three wives........ ANSWERS I......... a............... meat d... He became a millionaire when he was only 25............... It was not until..... He's visited almost every country in the world. so she got a part-time job... On the ship he met a rich American businessman....... orphan d................. Country life wasn't for him...... Stephen 2........ Roger wants to buy a book.. Reading: (1) .......h (10) ......... But he soon became bored......2012 ........................ please 3..................................... 5....... ........ photo c.................................. Yes......... ........ laugh b...... Jane wanted to earn some pocket money........ village b....a 226 ................. a....................... I've been everywhere and I've done everything.........e (6) .......... 2........................... Her long career/ Cher/ be/ successful/ both/ serious actress/ pop star...... age d..c 2).............b (5)..... because b. We couldn't relax until all the guests had gone home..................................... a. God b.......... team b................ Language Focus: A.... One of his two daughters has become a drug addict.......... Emilio. Two years ago his son went to prison.. tense c.......... He liked Maximilian and offered him a job..........i (9) ........ engineer c...... He didn't return to his native village until the war ended. Now look at my brother............g (3) ....... It was not .....................F +Tape script: When he left school..k (7) ...... 3..........................f (8) . nose d. He went to Buenos Aires and there he got a job on a ship that was sailing to the USA.... 1..... a.... Emilio is a happy man...... phone d.......... game 4.. Maximilian learnt quickly and in the next ten years he made a lot of money on Wall Street.... I only recognized him when he came into the light..........English 10 School year: 2011 ......... globe c................. But he's happy...F 2-T 3-F 4-T 5-F 6-T 7-F 8-F 9-F 10 ...... Roger has gone . ............................. bread c.... host B. IV.. 1........ But has it made me happy? Not really.. He's been on television several times and the newspapers have followed his life closely.......... season 5....... Maximilian also started work on the family farm............... When he was 30 he married a beautiful model.......... His family life has not been happy.... ' Yes.. 8...... And so at the age of 18 he left the village....................................' II..... For the whole of his life he has loved to travel......................... a..... Jane got .... For the last ten years he has lived alone in his luxury villa in the Bahamas. His second and third marriages both ended in divorce... For several years his life hasn't changed at all.... so he's gone to town.....d (4) ... He's only been back three times since then.................

... Education aims: . 2 ..Listen to the T and find the answer.. Where is the Statue of Liberty situated? S2: It is situated in New York....... finding specific information. a famous American pop star............ Teaching aids: board. b.. Language: ... IV...b .. 5. some pictures. General knowledge: .... 4... However.Students know more about New York City....Ask sts some questions so that they can find out . IV...Listen to the T..Introduce the topic of the lesson.. 2.Reading comprehension: better sts' reading skill through guessing words' meanings in contexts. In 1977 she decided to turn to acting again.... Roger has gone to town to buy a book. 4. II. She planned to take acting lessons there.English 10 School year: 2011 .... It was not until the war ended that he returned to his native village. 1..... Anticipated problems: .. 1.Students may not have much knowledge about New York City... Cher won the Best Actress at the Cannes Film Festival in 1985 and an Oscar 1987. Objectives: 1..... S1: New York City is the largest city in What is the largest city in the USA? the USA.Speaking : talk in pairs and in groups. It was not until all the guests had gone home that we could relax.d .Knowledge about New York City... Cher was born on May 20th.. III..The passive. textbook.. Cher got married twice and has a daughter and a son. 3...... 7. 227 . 6.Vocabulary used to describe a city. Warm-up:(3 mins) . Jane got a part-time job to earn some pocket money.... chalk.b... which city they are reading about... Skills: ... 3. Writing: Use the prompts below to make up complete sentences about Cher.. Choose the word that has the underlined part pronounced differently from the others.... In her long career Cher has been successful both as a serious actress and as a pop star. Procedures: Teacher’s activities Students’ activities 1.... Language Focus: A... Knowledge: a. 2.... .. ..d...... 5.. she met Salvatore Bono there and became a famous singer when she was only 19....... 1.2012 III...a..... B. . . 2. 3 ... 4 . 1946 in El Centro in the USA. 5 .. Date: 10/04/08 UNIT 15: CITIES Part1: READING (period 91) Class Teaching date Absentees 10A 2 I. She left high school when she was 16 and went to Los Angeles. Complete the second sentence so that it it has a similar meaning to the first one.. 8. 3..... It was not until he came into the light that I recognized him..

. ..Ask them to match the names to the pictures.. ..Read each word/phrase 3 times and ask sts to repeat it. Ss: Yes. Before you read:( 12 mins) Aims: To introduce the topic and provide sts with words/phrases about New York City. Sts' answer.. .. ... .Encourage sts to answer freely. . . + Task 1: Matching: .Work individually.Read these words and check for their partner.Listen and check..Report their answers one by one....Guide sts to read the names of these places aloud. S2: No 2 is the United Nations Headquarters..Call on 5 sts to read their answers aloud in front of the class...Ask some sts to give answers.Vocabulary.e 4 -a 5-b . a.Listen to the T... Sts may give different answers.Read the sentences first and try to 228 . S1: No 1 is the Empire State Building.Ask sts to share their answers with their partners. we know....d 2-c 3 ...Ask sts to read the passage independently then read the words in column A as well as the definitions given in column B and scan the passage to match.Go round to help if necessary.Ask sts to work in pairs to ask and answer the questions in Before you read. .. .Read the words aloud..Leave sts 1 minute to self-practice.. .Listen and repeat..Others listen .Tell sts to refer to Vocabulary for help and encourage them try to guess the meanings of the words in contexts of the reading text. . b.. Answering questions: ..Get feedback and give remarks. ...Give answers orally... . ..Ask sts to look at the pictures of some wellknown places in New York and then ask them some questions: Do you know these places? What are they? ..Listen and help sts to read the words/phrases correctly. and find specific information.. 3. . ......Provide sts with the new words/phrases: + lo'cate (v): ®Æt ë + 'harbour (n):bÕn c¶ng + 'global (a): belong to globe + 'finance (n):tµi chÝnh + 'business (n):kinh doanh +' characterise(v):®Æc trng ho¸ .2012 ...Look at the pictures and answer the T.Listen to the T ..English 10 2...Work in pairs to ask and answer.Write down these words into their notebooks. . .... 1.. . ...Ask 4-5 sts to read all the word/phrases aloud in front of the class( 1 st/ 1 time) . . . . School year: 2011 . . 1. . 2.Listen and read after the T.. It is in the northeast of the USA. While you read:( 20 mins) Aims: Read and guess the meanings of the words from contexts..

Listen to the T. 3..2012 focus on the key words. Education aims: .. School year: 2011 . .Students know about diferent cities. . . T. . which place(s) of interest there would you like to see? Why?/ Why not? .Some sts report.. .Listen to the T . . T 5. 3.. Objectives: Period 92 1.Some presentatives of the groups are required to report in front of the class. Knowledge: 229 .Listen and check.Read the passage again and work in pairs to ask and answer..Ask sts to read the passage independently and then decide whether the statements are true or false..Work in groups orally.. 5. Homework:( 1 min) . .Write a paragraph to answer the questions in After you read...Move round to help and ask sts to share their ideas and correct the false sentences. It's in the southeastern part of New York state..Read the passage again and do the task.Move around to help.. ....Present their ideas: 1. After you read:( 9 mins) Aims: to test sts' understanding about the reading passage..Tell sts to refer to Vocabulary for help and encourage them to try to scan the information as fast as possible..Feedback and give remarks. . . discuss two questions.. 7 million in the city and 19 million in the metropolitan region. It is ice-free in all seasons. 4. . .. .Ask 5 pairs to give answers. .English 10 + Task 2: True or False. 2. T .Listen to their friends and the T... It is on the Hudson & Passaic River.Report their answers sentence by sentence. Because it was founded by the Dutch. .. ... 2.Ask sts to share the answers with their friends .Ask sts to work in groups of three or four to . .Ask sts to read the sentences in task 2 first. F.Listen and help sts to give correct answers.Ask sts to read the passage again and work in pairs to ask and answer the questions.. 1..Go round to help sts with their work.. Date: 11/04/08 LESSON 15: SPEAKING Class Teaching date Absentees 10A 2 I. and focus their attention on key words. . + Task 3: ..Call on 5 sts to read and explain their answers aloud in front of the class. T 2... If you could visit New York. .. 4. .Share their ideas with their friends.

Making the comparisions between London and New York. . Which city was known by more names through 3. Anticipated problems: Sts might have problem using the comparative form of short vs long adjectives fluently. .c-b. give the answers quickly.English 10 School year: 2011 .Ask some S to go and write their answers on the . Ho Chi Minh City 2. Warm. handouts.Hanoi or Ho km20 Chi Minh City? 2.The quiz: 1. .Answers: 1-d 2. . 3.up: (5 minutes) Aims : get used to the topic. b. infformation about New York city and the other S1: Do you know when NY was about London. IV. Before you speak: (8 minutes) Aims: : focus sts.Ask sts to work in pairs: One S read the .Listen to the T . board.Some S write on board . Ho Chi Minh City 6. II.Asking and answering questions about the two cities.Work in pairs to ask and answer.Hanoi or Ho Chi Minh City? 6. + Task 1: Complete each question in A with a suitable word in B . While you speak: (20 minutes) Aims: Sts can ask and asnwer about the two cities . Language: .Hanoi or Ho Chi Minh City? 5. Hanoi: 921 2. III.a-e 4-a-e 5. 2 milion.095 km2.Work in groups and find the Hanoi and Ho Chi Minh City. Ho CHi Minh City. Which city is closer to the sea.Ask S to do the task individually.Hanoi or Ho Chi 1. + Task 2: .Divide the class into 2 big groups and introduce the quiz: T is going to read out the questions about . Teaching aids: Textbook. Hanoi ( founded in 1010) history. ( pop.Talking about the preferences and explain the reasons. General knowledge: . Procedures: Teacher’s activities Students’ activities 1. Which city is older. then ask and asnwer about the cities founded? 230 . Which city is larger in area.b-c 6. board. ( Area of Minh City? HCM: 2. Hanoi: 3 milion) 4.Vocabulary to describe a city. Which city has more districts.Hanoi or Ho Chi Minh City? HCM: 6.Students can talk about the differences between London and New York. Which city has a bigger population. Of 3. . Sts need to listen and answers quickly.Work individually. . 3. . chalk. Ho Chi Minh City.2012 a. Skills: . .Hanoi or Ho Chi Minh City? 4. on the topic and introduce the words and grammar used in the task.f 3.Get feedback.The comparative structures. Hanoi 5.

.. as+ many/ few+ countable N+ as . .. What’s the area of New York? S2: It covers an area of 946 km2...Read the model aloud.Ask S to draw this table and take notes of their notes their opinions into the table.. + Task 3: And how large is London? ...Go around to check and offer help.....Listen and give remarks.. After you speak: (10 minutes) Aim: S can talk about the preferences and give the reasons.... again and compare the two cities they have just ..Call on some pairs to perform in front of the class and give feedback.. ..Pay attention to the words/ bold and review the comparative forms of Adjs and phrases in bold.... .. Ss will take turn to ask and answer about New York and London using the questions in Task 1.Equal comparison of nouns: . a Equal Comparison + Structure: S + Modal V/Aux S + V + as adj / V/Be adv as + NP Pro .Listen to the T and take notes. 231 . + Task 4: ...Pay attention to the words and phrases printed in .. .... E..Comparative nouns: more + count/ uncount .. S2: It was founded in 1624....Introduce the task: S are going to work in groups to talk about their preferences and to give reasons to back up their opinions..g: more buildings...Introduce the task: S are going to work in pairs .. too..Some pairs present in front of basing on the model conversation...Work in groups to listen and take .Go around to help Sts........Ask S to work in pairs to compare the two cities... And what about London? S1: It was founded in 43AD. .English 10 School year: 2011 .. 4.. the class. more money .as+ much/ little+ uncountable N+ as Eg..Work in pairs....Ask sts to share their answers with other pairs. .Compare the two cities.2012 .. .. conversation in the textbook..Call on two students to read aloud the model ..N .. . .: as many parks as/ as much money as b Comparative form: + Structure: S + Modal S+V+ comparative adj V/Aux V/Be /adv +than+ NP Pro . What about London? S1: 7 milion.In their pairs...Ask some Sts to perform in front of the class.. nouns: . asked and answer about. . Ans what is the population of New York? S2: 7 milion.. ...

General knowledge: .some sts present: E. 232 . . .:Hoa prefers New York to London because people are friendlier and opener.. . Teaching aids: .Textbook.After 2 minutes.English 10 friends’ opinions .Sts know about Van Mieu – Quoc Tu Giam. . the group which has the longest list will be the winner 2.g. Skills: .Discussing in group.Work in groups .Work in pairs. Procedure Teacher’s activities Students’ activities 1.. . 2. Homework: (2 minutes ) Write a paragraph about New York and London..Reading for general ideas and specific information. . chalk.Ask the students to name some historical places in Vietnam.The simple past tense.Go around to observe and offer help if necessary. II. 5. .Deciding on True or False statements. blackboard. Class 10A Unit 16: Historical places Period 1: Reading Teaching date Absentees 2 I. Anticipated problems: . Warm-up: Network. b. . .Give corrective feedback.Students are required to work in pairs to answer the questions .Sts can talk about Van Mieu – Quoc Tu Giam.… III.Students may not have sufficient words to talk about the topic . Education aim: .Ask students to work in groups of 3-4 students .Call some S to report their findings. Before you read: (8 minutes) Aims: To provide students with words/phrases about historical places. 3. . Binh prefers living in London because there are more high buildings but Nga prefers working in London because there are more holidays …… . Objectives: 1.Choosing the best suitable words and guessing in context.Vocabulary to talk about historical places. Knowledge: a.(5minutes) .2012 . Name City preferred Reasons School year: 2011 . IV.Language: Sts can recall more about: .

.Call on students to read and explain their answers aloud in front of the class. a 3. 3. . memorialise.Ask S read the text more carefully and decide whether the statements are true (T) or false (F). b 2. Hoa Lu Capital. . .Kiep Bac Site.Ask some S to answer the questions. While you read: (20 minutes) Aims: Read for information to do the task. c 4. c Task 2: Deciding on True or False statement . . . tr¹m træ + stelae ( n): bia ®¸ + banyan trees ( n): c©y ®a + tortoise ( n): con rïa Read each word/phrase 3 times and ask the students to repeat it. . Hoi An City. It is the first university of Vietnam. Ask 4-5 students to read all the word/phrases aloud in front of the class (1 student/ 1 time) Listen and help the students to read the words/phrases correctly.Some S questions answer the .Read after the T and then read individually. it is. flourish. . Yes. It is one of the most visited places in Hanoi. Quang Tri Citadel.Some S present. .Ask some representatives to give their choice orally in front of the class and explain their answers.Listen and take notes - . . Task 1: Guesing in context . etc. and do the tasks.Work individually . b 5. 233 .Quoc Tu Giam was founded in 1070 by the Ly Dynastry. Van Mieu.Listen and help S to give correct answers. Hue Imperial City.Feedback and give correct answers: * Key: 1.Ask S to go back to the text to locate and underline these words and try to guess the meanings. 3. 2. Co Loa Citadel.2012 in the textbook. .Some S do the task orally while others listen.Write these words on board: Originally.English 10 School year: 2011 . representative. .Listen and help S to give the right answer.S are required to compare their answers with their partner.Read the text and do the task individually . Den Hung Remains. .Go around to offer help S. . . nhµ nho + engrave ( v): kh¾c.Give S some new words: * The new words/phrases are: + Confucian ( a): ngêi theo ®¹o Khæng. Suggested answers: 1.Ask the students to read the passage indepently then find the italicised words in task 1. Correct the false information.Ask s to do the task individually and then check their answers with their friend. engrave.Son. Con.Check the answers with a partner. .T might want to check that S understand all these words by callingon some S to tell the meanings in Vietnamese. .

which can still be seen today. . Education aims: . Knowledge: . chalk.2012 Answer: 1. which attracts a great number of visitors every year. Suggested talk: Van Mieu. Royal exams used to take place here and the first comers were honoured by having their names carved on the stone stelae. F ( it is an example of well.Talking about historical places.S take turn to talk about Van Mieu. These talae were carried on the backs of giant tortoises. Unit 16 Period 2: Speaking Teaching date Absentees - .Ask some S to talk in front of the class and give feedback. Homework: (2 minutes) .Listen to the T . handouts. F ( it was built in 1070) 2.Quoc Tu Giam.preseved traditional Vietnamese architecture) 5. III/ Teaching aids: Textbook. T 6. 3.Ask S to work in groups of 3 or 4 and prepare a talk about Van Mieu. using the suggestions in the textbook. After you read: (10 minutes) Aims: S can talk briefly about Van Mieu. II/ Anticipated problems: Sts might not have sufficient vocabulary to talk about the topic.English 10 School year: 2011 .Quoc Tu Giam. which was established on the grounds of Vietnam. Quoc Tu Giam was considered the first university of Vietnam.Go round to help the students with their work.Language: The simple past tense.Asking and answering questions about a historical place.General knowledge: Sts can talk about a historical place. T 4. 234 .Quoc Tu Giam.Write a passage about Van Mieu.Quoc Tu Giam was built originally by the Ly dynasty in 1070 in Hanoi. 2.Quoc Tu Giam is a historical and cultural relic of Vietnam. .Quoc Tu Giam.Work in groups . board. Van Mieu. Class 10A 2 I/ Objectives 1. .Sts know about the historical places . . . T 3. 5. Skills: . Vocabulary on a historical place. F ( from 11th century to 18th century) 4.

Co Loa Citadel 6. B¶o tµng D©n téc g. 2.Ask S to work in pairs to ask and answer about President Ho Chi Minh’s Mausoleum. Ho Chi Minh Mausoleum 4.j 3. Presidential Palace 2.d 10.Check with the whole class.f Teacher’s activities 1.i 6. Chïa Mét Cét a. Cét Cê Hµ Néi b. Before you speak: (8 minutes) Aims: : focus sts. B¶o tµng C¸ch m¹ng c. 1. .Some pairs present in front of the class. 235 . . National Museum of Fine Arts 7. Flag Tower of Hanoi 9. B¶o tµng Mü thuËt i.English 10 IV/ Procedure: School year: 2011 .Give the answers. Task 1: Ask and answer about President Ho Chi Minh Mausoleum. National Museum of Ethnology 5.Work in group.up: (5 minutes) Aims : get used to the topic.2012 Students’ activities . Suggested questions: + Where is it located? + When did the construction start? + When did the constuction finish? + How many floors are there? + What is the use of each floor? + What time is it open? + What time is it closed? + Is photography allowed inside? 3. .a 9. Temple of Literature 3. .e 2. Thµnh Cæ Loa j. + stand : place + late( adj): nguyªn.Go around to observe and check that S work. Read the model conversation. . on the topic and introduce the words and grammar used in the task.Ask S to study the fact sheet of the monuments and explain new words if any. . . cè cùu + maintenance ( n): b¶o dìng . B¶o tµng LÞch sö h.: 1-e 4. .b 7.Ask S to read the model conversation in the textbook.Go around to help S. .h 5. While you speak: (20 minutes) Aims: Sts can ask and asnwer about the two historical places . L¨ng Hå Chñ TÞch e.Call on some pairs to perform in front of the class.Work in pairs. Phñ chñ TÞch f.c 8. Revolution Museum 10. .Answer the teacher’s questions. V¨n MiÕu d. .read the fact sheet and listen to the T. One Pillar Pagoda häc 8. . Vietnamese National History Museum .Introduce the game: You are going to work in groups to match the names of different historical places of interest in Hanoi with their English translatations.Ask S some questions as examples. Warm.

Date: 07/05/08 Class 10A Teaching date LESSON 4: WRITING Absentees 2 I.Student knows how to read the information in a chart.Go around to help S . Ss will take turn to ask and answer about two histirical places using the questions in task 1. . . 4.Remind S to take notes of their friends’ talk while listening so that they can report in front of the class.Introduce the task: S are going to work in groups to ask and answer questions about a historical place they have been to.Writing: write a description.Students can describe a chart.Listen and take notes.Reading: read the model description. II. . General knowledge: . .Call on some pairs to perform in front of the class and give feedback. . 5. Objectives: 1. b. Knowledge: a. .Call some S to report their findings. . + World Cultural Heritage:Di s¶n v¨n ho¸ thÕ giíi + Comprise (v): bao gåm + The Royal Citadel: Hoµng thµnh + The Imperial Enclosure: Thµnh néi + The Forbidden Purple City: Tö cÊm thµnh + Admission: gi¸ vÐ vµo cöa + Reunification Hall: Dinh Thèng nhÊt + To be heavily damaged: bÞ ph¸ huû nÆng nÒ + Air bombardment: nÐm bom + Chamber: phßng . After you speak: (10 minutes) Aim: S can talk about the historical place they have been to.The past tenses. Homework: (2 minutes ) Write a paragraph to talk about a historical place . 3. Anticipated problems: 236 .2012 Task 2: An information gap activity .Ask S to work in pairs . Task 3: . Education Aims: . Skills: .Speaking: discuss in pairs.Introduce the task: S going to ask and answer about Hue Imperial City and Thong Nhat Conference Hall. .Give corrective feedback. 2.Give S some new words: .English 10 School year: 2011 . Language: . . .In their pairs.Go around to check and offer to help.Language used to describe a chart.

.Check and give remarks.. chalk. . 5. The USA had the biggest number of visitors to Vietnam in 2001.. ask sts to look at the chart and explain ... 2.. .. + Adverbs: rapidly..700 visitors.. it isn't.Introduce some useful words/expressions that .. +Expressions: As we can see from the chart...Ask one st to talk about the ancient town of Hoi . comparison with that in 2001.. ..board.. .. then share their answer with their .. ..497 in . sharply. remarks. sts can use when describing a chart. + Task 2: 237 . ...Present their ideas..Aims: to get sts to know how to write a description of a chart.. + Comparatives and superlatives.Get feedback and give remarks.English 10 School year: 2011 . Teaching Aids: .. ... It can be seen from the chart that .. According to the chart.....Read the chart and try to understand the information in the chart... IV.. quickly. 4. 6.Work in pairs to ask and answer and the questions in pairs. rise. 3.Ask sts to compare their answer with other . steadily. Australia did. friends. The number of American visitors to Vietnam in 2002 increased by 29. notebooks. Before you write:( 20 mins) .. the information in the chart. While you write:( 10 mins) . . etc. 3..Aims: Sts practise describing the chart.. The chart presents some . Procedures: Teacher's activities Students' activities 1. France did.Students are not familiar with this type of writing...Answer: The chart shows..Listen to the teacher. textbook. 1.... An.. .Ask them to look at the chart and then answer .Do the writing task....Firstly..2012 ..Listen to their friend and give remarks.. + Task 1: .. No. + Verbs: increase >< decrease reduce. 99.... Homework checking :( 5 mins) ..Move around to help if necessary. pairs.Copy down these words into their information .Listen to the teacher.. + Beginning: Answer the question: " What does the chart show?" ... 2..Ask other sts to listen to their friend and give . III..

Aims: to introduce two sounds /ʒ / and / ʃ / 238 .. Skills: + Speaking: .board.Read the sentences silently to do the exercises. . II.Two sts read the announcements aloud.Read their writing: ( a model description) " The chart shows the number of visitor arrivals to Vietnam from the USA.Listen to the teacher. . Teaching aids: . Homework: ( 1min) .Check and give the correct answer.Give remarks. Pronunciation:( 10 mins) . Date: 08/05/08 LESSON 5: LANGUAGE FOCUS Class Teaching date Absentees 10A 2 I. they wrote at home aloud. 2.Pronunciation: / ʒ / and/ ʃ / .967 in 2002.Check and give marks.workbook)..Students know how to pronounce the sound /ʒ / and / ʃ / correctly. III. . Homework checking: ( 5mins) .Let sts write in 10 minutes.Students may forget the knowledge about comparisons. chalk. France and Australia in 2001 and 2002. Objectives: 1.If there is enough time. . . The statistics were provided by Vietnam National Administration of Tourism.Making comparisons. School year: 2011 . 3. 4. " 5. It is clear from the chart that the number of visitors to Vietnam from the USA.Ask another st to give remarks. 2.English 10 . According to the chart.Ask two sts to read the description of the chart ..Comparatives and superlatives. .Students revise: . After you write:( 9 mins) Aims: to get feedback and check sts' work.700 visitors in 2001 and 111. . + Reading: .Comparatives and superlatives. IV.Read words and sentences aloud.470 visitors in 2001 and 259. Anticipated problems: .Part D (page 95 . T can have sts exchange their writing among sts within a group so that they can check their friend's work and give remarks.Ask some other sts to give remarks.Work in pairs to discuss the exercises. France and Australia in 2002 is higher than that in 2001. . .Ask them to use the answers to the questions above to write.546 in 2002.Get feedback by asking some sts to read their work aloud.Move around to conduct the activity.. .2012 . . France ranked second with 99. Education Aims:. Knowledge: + Language: . Procedures: Teacher's activities Students' activities 1. textbook. the USA had the biggest number of visitors to Vietnam with 230. . . ..Ask sts to write a description of the chart. ..

.... ....Ask one st to report and other sts to give remarks..g: My house is smaller than your house.... . 3.. .Read the sentences...... listen and repeat. the most .Move around to help .Look at the book . Write two sounds on the board and pronounce them clearly twice..Notes: Irregular adjs good => better => the best bad => worse => the worst far => further/farther => the School year: 2011 ..Listen to the T..... and making comparisons..2012 .. ..Listen and give remarks... . . Comparatives and superlatives: . . ... ....Then ask sts to work in pairs to read the words again so that they can check for each other. .. . Grammar: ( 29 mins) Aims: to revise comparatives and superlatives. .Look at the book and work in pairs. My house is the smallest in this street. Exercise 1 is more difficult than exercise 2. . . 239 .......est long longer the longest hot hotter the hottest ... Ask sts to look at sentences in page 175 in the book....Move around to conduct the activity. ... . . E.. ...... ......... .. then ask sts to repeat... ..Look at the examples......Listen to the teacher and repeat. . .....Listen to the S and give remarks..One st tells the T the comparative and superlative form of the adjectives: Adjectives Comparatives Superlatives Short adjs .English 10 and help sts to practise these sounds...Ask sts to pay attention to the length of two sounds..Ask them to work in 2 minutes...... a...... / ʃ / : a voiceless sound / ʒ / : a voiced sound .Tell sts how to pronounce these sounds accurately. Long adjs more . ..Ask sts to tell the T the comparative and superlative form of the adjectives..Ask some sts to read these sentences aloud...Read these words in pairs and check for their partners.. a.Answers: /ʒ/ /ʃ/ pleasure shouldn't Asia shop illusions washing .. /ʒ/ /ʃ/ television shop pleasure machine measure Swedish .Firstly ask sts to look at the examples and revise the comparative and superlative form of the adjectives.er the .... and have sts do EX1. ...Check and give the correct answers. b..Write down two sounds. . Exercise 1 is the most difficult in this book.Ask them to look at the textbook. ..Ask two sts to read again and give remarks. listen and repeat..EX2 and EX3..... expensive more expensive the most ex.. ...Ask them to work in pairs to read the sentences and then find out the words containing sound /ʒ / and sound / ʃ / . ....

. Making comparisons: . b.. ...... . 3. Skills: listening..workbook) Date: 09/05/07 Class Teaching date 10A School year: 2011 .. . Homework checking:( 5 mins) .... Concord used to be the fastest passenger plane in the world...Language: pronunciation and grammar in the above units.... . than 8.....Listen and correct their work if necessary... 3... busy => busiest => the busiest .Check and give remarks..Some sts report: 1.. 2. v 2.Ask two sts to write the sentences on the board. . . Objectives: 1.. .Move round to help if necessary. the longest 5..Ask sts to read the requirement and the example carefully. chalk.......Ask sts to do the Ex individually. board. . more 4.. happy => happier => the happiest 3.. My sister is younger than me. III.. Knowledge: .. 3.. + Exercise 1: .Ask sts to share their ideas with their friends... .. + Exercise 2: .. Who is the oldest in the class? 4.Ask sts to EX3... Homework ( 1 min) .... of 9.. the worst 240 ..... ....Ask sts to do Ex 1 in pairs and then share the answers with their friends. Teaching aids: textbook. v ........Ask some pairs to report.Ask sts to do Ex3 in pairs and then share the answers with their friends. . young => younger => the youngest 2.English 10 furthest/farthest ... larger 4. so 3. the 6.Sts revise what they have learned in unit 15 and unit 16.. .2012 . big => bigger => the biggest 4... speaking and writing...Listen to the teacher.. 1... Aims: . the 5. ..Ask some sts to report in front of the whole class.Check and give remarks.Move round to help if necessary. .Part B( page 91 .Do the exercise in pairs.. + Exercise 3: ...General knowledge in unit 15 and unit 16..Move round to help if necessary.Listen and correct their work if necessary.Ask sts to do EX 1... ...Ask other sts to give remarks. ... 2. II...Read the requirement and the example carefully..Some sts report. 5. TEST YOURSELF F Absentees 2 I. v 7.Ask one st to do Ex 4 in the workbook on the EX 4: board. . . ... Procedures: Teacher's activities Students' activities 1.....Do the Ex individually... ..

2.Listen and check. bigger 2....... .Check and give remarks. Comparisons: .1.English 10 . the most popular . best 3.Get feedback and play the tape again so that sts can check their answers.3.. Non-defining Relative Clauses: . interesting . ... more polluted 5..Work in pairs to discuss their answers. ... Taipei is a busy city.. . but the weather there is very humid and not very pleasant.. The new lesson:( 39 minutes) ..Ask some sts to write on the board. Sandra has got a new job with Capital Insurers..1.Discuss in groups..Look at the textbook and read the statements.Ask sts to work in groups to compare their answers. It is the country's most exciting city. noisy 6.. 2.. . three 2..2. .Ask sts to share their ideas with their partners. A 3... .3 million.. crowds 5. .Some sts report...4... ....... ...2.. .Some sts stand up to report. ... A .. A 4.Listen carefully and do the task..... The new English teacher.. . who I met yesterday. happier 7.Compare their answers with their parners. 1.Ask some sts to report his/ her answers aloud.2012 6. which is quite big and modern...... more stressful . A 5..3.Ask sts to share their answers with their friends. 2. . .Ask sts to read the requirement of the task. which is a much . . . . ... part III: 10 minutes..Ask some sts to give remarks. 241 .Give remarks and marks.... which is the capital city of Taiwan. . 2. School year: 2011 ... Grammar: 2.. part IV: 15 minutes.Ask sts to do listening in class. ..Give sts the time duration for each part : part II: 10 minutes.. ....Ask sts to do part II.Ask one st to give remarks..... was founded in the 18th century.Ask sts to discuss their answers in groups....... . 3. Their house...Ask other sts to give remarks.Answers: 1. 1.Ask some sts to read their writing aloud. Writing: . and the streets are always full . capital 4.. ......Ask two other sts to give remarks......Play the tape twice and ask sts to do the task.. Listening: . 2.. Reading: .Read their writing aloud "Taipei. . ....Check and give feedback... part III and part IV at home in advance to save time.. ...Check and give the correct answers.. C 2....Ask some sts to report:.One st gives remarks. better 4. .. It has a population of 2. 2....3. 2.work in groups to share their ideas. friends 3.Answers: 1.

242 ." .Part A ( Page 85 .2012 of people. Homework: ( 1 min) .Listen to the teacher's remarks.workbook) School year: 2011 .English 10 3. It is famous for excellent museums.

You're Reading a Free Preview

Download
scribd
/*********** DO NOT ALTER ANYTHING BELOW THIS LINE ! ************/ var s_code=s.t();if(s_code)document.write(s_code)//-->